Home

- NFI: Industrial Automation Training Academy

1. g Input Object File Analog Input Config File Cancel 4 files will be automatically generated in the tree list of the Data Files Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 304 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 You need to adjust the number of the elements for each file according to your application In this example the number of the elements is 10 for Binary Input Object File and 10 for 16 bit Analog Input Object File In the Binary Input Config File the bit 1 bit 0 of B30 0 B30 1 and B30 2 are configured to 0 1 1 0 and 1 1 respectively The event for the index 0 15 of Binary Input Object will be generated as a Class 1 event the event for the index 16 31 asa Class 2 event and the event for the index 32 47 as a Class 3 event if there are any changes for the points B10 0 B10 1 or B10 2 For any other Binary Input points the events will not be generated Data File B30 bin Binary Input Config File 13 12 11 10 in e 5 OR rr 64 amp 8 6 utu ao oa a 6s 0O 0 G G amp m mw a4 m oo oO 2 Go 0 8 O a G O O 998 oo 2 2 O O O O O O 00000 07050 eco 2 cor
2. 308 310 Time Synchronizati l 311 Download User Program via DNP3 312 Default Directories and Files vc 313 Generating IMG files using RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro 313 Rules for File Authentication 0cc cece cece eee e aes 315 Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface System Loading and Heat Dissipation Table of Contents Rules for Downloading a User 1 316 Rules for Uploading a User 317 Rules for Initializing a User 318 Rules for uploading Communication Status Files 318 Starting and Stopping User Programs Mode Change via DNP3 n cceperunt bored e 318 Initialize User Program PES RANA RUNS 319 Start User Prograiis osodid MOSS ER CERTOS SB AO EERS 319 Stop User Programi ite epe eerta ead 320 Diagnostiese soana NAE 320 Diagnostics for Ethernet Channel Channel 1 326 Diagnostics for Secure Authentication 333 Punction Ut th aia a heus cu cul Doi Cr aa Eu 335 Implementation 338 Appendix G MicroLogix 1400 Controllers and Ethernet Communication 351 MicroLogix 1400 Performance 352 MicroLogi
3. 7 EMC Dire Ctiy Gases ta 7 Low Voltage waded edet votre qd 8 Installation Considerations orbe badd 8 Safety Considerations oto 6o uox eei tei sue S Moo bt senten i 9 Hazardous Location 9 Disconfiecring Main Power urhe terere dene 10 Safety IEGUIES Eon eerie a d 10 Power e sucre cte b E ER ERE SCC 10 Periodic Tests of Master Control Relay Circuit 11 Power Considerations 11 Isolation Transformers 29s 11 Power Supply IurisBi i qe iR nU ERES 11 Loss of Power me S patna De E rtis ex dabo tices 12 Input States on Power ht EX qr ing 12 Other Types of Line Conditions scene e 12 Preventing Excessive us eei viande Oder el 12 Master Control ee bae 13 Using Emergency Stop Switches e rtr hen 14 Schematic Using Symbols 15 Schematic Using ANSI CSA 16 Installing a Memory Module i oco kde daa e ete ew eene 17 Using the 17 Connecting the Battery Wire 19 Controller Mounting Dimensions 20 Controller and Expansion I O amp 20 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P 2012 10 Table of Contents Wire Your Controller Communication Connections
4. Descriptor Element Configuration Index LL Descriptor Code NONE Data Type Code NONE MaxDatalengh byes DQ Ancillary Value JO Point Address Type MicroLogix Data File File Number fo File Element fo File Sub Element fo Cancel Descriptor Code NONE DAEL PTYP Data Type Code NONE VSTR UINT INT FLT OSTR BSTR TIME Max Data Length bytes 0 255 Ancillary Value Any string This can be a binary array or ASCII string up to 16 words Point Addressing under Descriptor Element Configuration Data Set value for each Data Set element is configured by Point Address Type Point Type Point Index File Number File Element File Sub Element Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Point Address Type Standard DNP3 Point Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 291 When these values are configured properly according to the supported data files the MicroLogix 1400 responds with a g87v1 object filled with the value in the data file The following table shows the supported data files for the Point Addressing Point Address Type Standard DNP 3 Point ias ye icing Point Type Point Index Low Byte Point Index High Byte NONE 0 0 NONE 0 0 No point type is associated NONE 0 0 BI 1 Binary input 0 to Maximum 4095 UINT 22 0 1 2 0 4 INT 3 0 1 2 0 4 When the Data Types other than OSTR and BSTR are OSTR 25 0
5. OUT 6 A 4 OUT 7 SSS c 44576 1762 0W16 Wiring Diagram Em comp e 71 N N Pi N ron OUT 4 VAC VDC 44577 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 48 Wire Your Controller Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 1762 0X61 Wiring Diagram L1 0 OR 06 N OUTO ER L2 OR DC L1 OR 4DC OUTI N C aq L2 OR DC Cy oum L1 OR 06 L2 OR DC gore Fed OUT3 N C OUTS N C bo d OUTS 0 L2 OR DC 44578 1762 1080W6 Wiring Diagram DC Sinking DC Sourcing 0 gt T IN 1 bs N2 es INS 5 DC Sinking COMO DC Sourcing DC Sourcing we XM Ll INT DC Sinking DC DC Sourcing COM 1 L1 or DC d 71 Connected Internally m L1 or DC ouro 0 p OUT 1 L2 or DC OUT2 OUT3 A X OUT 5 CR 44579 Wire Your Controller 49 Analog Wiring Consider the following when wiring your analog modules The analog common COM is not connected to earth ground inside the module All terminals are electrically isolated from the system Channels are not isolated from each other Use Belden 8761 or equivalent shielded wire Under normal conditions the drain wire shield should be connected to the metal mount
6. ENET Setup Master Password After entering the Master password press the OK key on the LCD keypad The following menu is displayed SNHP Enabled HTTP Enabled If you want to change the SNMP setting press the Up or Down key and press the OK key to apply the change SHHP D isablecds HI IP Enabled Power cyclexxx Using Trim Pots Using the LCD 131 7 To change the HTTP setting press the Up or Down key and press the OK key to apply the change Enabled HITP Enabled Enabled HTTP Disabl Power cyclexxx TIP To exit the Protocol Setup Menu press the ESC key on the LCD keypad at any time Trim Pot Operation The MicroLogix 1400 controller provides two trimming potentiometers trim pots POTO and POT1 which allow modification of integer data within the controller The data value of each trim pot can be used throughout the control program for timers counters analog presets depending upon the requirements of the application You can change the data value of each trim pot using the trim pot screens provided by the LCD To access to the Trim Pot Set screen which is the top screen for the trim pot functionality select TrimPot Set on the LCD default menu screen as shown below and press the OK key on the LCD keypad 000000 RU
7. Calibration The module performs autocalibration upon power up and whenever a channel is enabled You can also program the module to calibrate every five minutes CJC accuracy 1 3 C 2 34 F Maximum overload at input terminals 35V DC continuous Input channel configuration via configuration software screen or the user program by writing a unique bit pattern into the module s configuration file 1 Rated working voltage is the maximum continuous voltage that can be applied at the input terminal including the input signal and the value that floats above ground potential for example 30V DC input signal and 20V DC potential above ground 2 Open circuit detection time is equal to the module scan time which is based on the number of enabled channels the filter frequency of each channel and whether cyclic calibration is enabled 3 Maximum current input is limited due to input impedance 1762 IT4 Accuracy Input Type Thermocouple J 210 Specifications 173 1762 IT4 Repeatability at 25 77 F 2 Repeatability for Input Type 10 Hz Filter Thermocouple J 0 1 C 0 18 F Thermocouple 110 1300 C 166 2372 F 0 1 C 0 18 F Therm ocouple 210 110 C 346 166 F 0 25 C 0 45 F Thermocouple T 170 400 C 274 752 F 0 1 C 40 18 F Thermocouple 270 170
8. DS Prototype 1 E DNP3 DS Prototype 2 E DNP3 DS Prototype 3 DNP3 DS Prototype 4 E DNP3 DS Prototype 5 E DNP3 DS Prototype 6 DNP3 DS Prototype 7 DNP3 DS Prototype 8 E DNP3 DS Descriptor 0 E DNP3 DS Descriptor 1 DS Descriptor 2 E DNP3 DS Descriptor 3 E DNP3 DS Descriptor 4 E DNP3 DS Descriptor 5 E DNP3 DS Descriptor 6 E DNP3 DS Descriptor 7 E DNP3 DS Descriptor 8 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 286 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 For DNP3 DS Prototype X you can configure the MicroLogix 1400 to construct the Data Set Prototype objects DNP3 Data Set Prototype 0 E Number of Prototype Elements jo Prototype Element Configuration Index Descriptor Code DataType Code Data Length bytes Ancillary Value Length bytes Ancillary fl 0 0 0 E NONE NONE 0 0 0 3 NONE NONE 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 6 NONE NONE 0 0 0 if NONE NONE 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 3 NONE NONE 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 Cancel Help For DNP3 DS Descriptor you can configure the MicroLogix 1400 to construct the Data Set Descriptor objects DNP3 Data Set Descriptor 0 General Number of Descriptor Elements o Event ccurrence Condition r Characteristics RD Point Address Type PT FN __ P 0 Standard Point NONE 0 0 I ST I EV 1 Standard DNP3 Po
9. L1 12 230 Disconnect Fuse MCR 230V AC Output if Circuits Isolation Operation of either of these contacts will Transformer remove power from the external 1 0 Master Control Relay MCR 1 ACor x2 circuits stopping machine motion Cat No 700 PK400A1 30V AC Emergency Stop Suppressor Fise Push Button Stop Start Cat No 700 N24 Limit Switch OAC 1 Suppr MCR MCR 115V AC or 230 e 1 0 Circuits DC Power Supply Use NEC Class 2 for UL Listing MCR Lo Hi S ee 24 V DC E O Circuits Line Terminals Connect to terminals of Power Supply 1766 L32AWA 1766 L32AWAA 1766 L32BWA 1766 L32BWAA Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Line Terminals Connect to 24V DC terminals of Power Supply 1766 L32BXB 1766 L32BXBA 44565 Install Your Controller 17 Installing a Memory 1 Remove the memory module port cover Module WIND um 5 44534 2 Align the connector on the memory module with the connector pins on the controller 44535 44536 um Y 4 Usea screwdriver as in step 1 to remove the memory module in the future Using the Battery The MicroLogix 1400 controller is equipped with a replaceable battery catalog number 1747 BA The Battery Low indicator on the LCD display of the controller play shows the status of the replaceable battery When the battery is low
10. File specification string not supported by Series A controllers supported by Series B controllers g91v1 Status of Requested Operation Activate configuration not supported by Series A controllers supported by Series B controllers Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 313 Default Directories and Files The MicroLogix 1400 has default directories and files for file handling in a DNP3 subsystem The default directories and files can be read from the controller using the function code OPEN_FILE 25 Read 1 and CLOSE_FILE 26 Currently supported directories are EXE and DIAG Supported files are listed in this section These directories files cannot be removed and cannot be created using DNP3 requests Supported Files and Directories jeu Directory File Level Full name string to access evel Level y y EXE EXE processorName IMG EXE processorName IMG DIAG DIAG CHO CSF DIAG CHO CSF CH1 ESF DIAG CH1 ESF CH2 CSF DIAG CH2 CSF The directory file names must all be in capital letters Root level can only be a directory marker The directory marker is for Series A ot V for Series B Directory level can only contain directories File level can only contain files Note that the directory marker is different in the MicroLogix 1400 Series A and Series B controllers The directory marker is for Series A and V for Series B contr
11. LIBE TEE TE Loaded from HH gt mode Conf i rm TIP For more information on transferring data to and from memory modules see Memory Module Operation on page 159 LCD setup ae LCD Setup screen you can configure the contrast value and backlight for the Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 140 Using the LCD Configuring contrast value 1 On the Main Menu screen select Advanced Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad If the menu items shown are not displayed on the Main Menu screen scroll down by pressing the Down key User Display b dvanced Set N Press the OK key on the LCD keypad Select LCD Setup using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad When the LCD Setup menu screen is displayed press the OK key REMOTE Comms EEPROM Setup 4 Select Contrast to adjust the contrast of LCD REHOTE LED Setup Contrast Back Light Publication 1766 UM001G EN P 2012 Using the LCD 141 5 Adjust the contrast value using the Left and Right keys on the LCD keypad LIBET ETE LED Contrast Bright Dark mmm 588 Configuring the backlight 1 On the Main Menu screen select Advanced Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad If the menu items shown are not displayed on the Main Menu screen scroll down by pressing the
12. Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 36 Wire Your Controller Sinking and Sourcing Wiring Diagrams Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 WARNING If you connect or disconnect wiring while the field side power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding WARNING The local programming terminal port is intended for temporary use only and must not be connected or disconnected unless the area is free of ignitable concentrations of flammable gases or vapors Any of the MicroLogix 1400 DC embedded input groups can be configured as sinking or sourcing depending on how the DC COM is wired on the group Type Sinking Input Definition The input energizes when high level voltage is applied to the input terminal active high Connect the power supply VDC to the input group s COM terminal Sourcing Input The input energizes when low level voltage is applied to the input terminal active low Connect the power supply VDC to the input group s COM terminal ATTENTION The 24V DC sensor power source must not be used to power output circuits It should only be used to power input devices for example sensors switches See Master Control Relay on page 13 for information on MCR wiring in output circuits 1766 L32BWA 1766 L32AWA 1766 L32BXB 1766 L32BWAA 1766 L
13. o Oll 2 Ff ol cil HE 8302 0 Binary Columns fie 7 Desc i ASA Eo Properties Usage Help Data File B10 bi Binary Input Object File LS 1 1 T G prayo oL oo000000OH 0000 0 00000208 00208 0700805 2000 oo000 00H 00000000 0000028 0D0208 00002000 ooo000030 0000000 0600 0 oo000 00H 00000000 oo000 00H 40000000 0000020002000 070000 0000002002002002 0000 ug Radix Binary Sma id Columns 16 Be po Properties Usage Help Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 305 In the same manner this 16 bit Analog Input Object File has bit 1 bit 0 of B36 0 B36 1 and B36 2 configured to 0 1 1 0 and 1 1 respectively The event for the index 0 of 16 bit Analog Input Object will be generated as a Class 1 event the event for the index 1 as a Class 2 event and the event for the index 2 as a Class 3 event if there are any changes for the points N14 0 N14 1 or N14 2 For any other 16 bit Analog Input points the events will not be generated 2 0 9 6 76 2 l 36 0 36 1 0000020000000 De X oj 36 2 ao0800 00080 0 0 0 01 B36 3 Goo00d0000008080890 0 Uu B36 4 00000000000 0 36 5 0000900009009099 36 6 00
14. 54 CS0 54 CS2 54 Format Code 2 55 50 55 CS2 55 Application Layer Error Codes 0 NO_ERROR No error found in the Application Layer 1 FC_CANNOT_BROADCAST Reserved 2 FC_NOT_SUPPORTED The received packet has unsupported Function Code 3 OBU_NOT_SUPPORTED The received packet has unsupported object s 4 BAD REQUEST LENGTH Reserved 5 CONFIGURATION ERROR The error was caused by the invalid configuration during packet generating E g invalid Data Set Configuration 6 BAD PARAMETER The received packet has invalid parameters except Function Code and Object Codes F g invalid Qualifier codes 7 BAD FILE TYPE The error was caused by invalid configuration in DNP3 Slave Application Layer Invalid File Type specified 8 BAD FILE NUMBER The error was caused by invalid configuration in DNP3 Slave Application Layer Invalid File Number specified 9 BAD DNP3 ADDRESS The error was caused by invalid configuration in DNP3 Slave Application Layer Invalid File Number specified 10 TABLE WRITE PROTECTED The specified DNP3 object data file has been locked to be written 11 TABLE ACCESS DENIED The specified DNP3 object data file has been locked to be read or written 12 TABLE OWNERSHIP ERROR The specified DNP3 object data file has been locked to be read or written If an error code is within 6 to 12 related file number and element number are shown in word 59 and 60 56 CS0 5
15. If the 16 bit Analog Output Object File Number 32 bit Analog Output Object File Number and Short Floating Point Analog Output Object File Number are configured in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file the starting index number of 16 bit Analog Output Object is 0 and the starting index number of 32 bit Analog Output Object starts from the last index number of 16 bit Analog Output Object For example if 10 elements of 16 bit Analog Output Object are configured 10 elements of 32 bit Analog Output Object and 10 elements of Short Floating Point Analog Output Object are configured the index numbers will be 16 bit Analog Output Object From 0 to 9 32 bit Analog Output Object From 10 to 19 Short Floating Point Analog Output Object From 20 to 29 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 281 As an example 16 bit 32 bit and Short Floating Point Analog Output Object Files are configured as below Data File N17 has 10 elements L18 has 10 elements and F19 has 10 elements accordingly A total of 30 Analog Output Object index are configured Index 0 of the Analog Output Object is N17 0 Index 10 is L18 0 Index 20 is F19 0 and Index 29 is F19 9 Data File N17 dec 16bits Analog Output Object File z 1 O Properties Usage Help Analog Output Command Control analog output block When the controller is in Non Executing mode the MicroLogix 1400
16. TIP Once a valid bitmap file is imported successfully you should be able to see the data in ASCII data files Make sure that the second element file size in the first ASCII data file is 0x0440 1088 bytes in hexadecimal value After a power cycle you should be able to see the customized boot logo on your LCD display For more information on how to create and use a customized Startup screen refer to the LCD Function File described in the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 RM001 After the default Startup screen or your customized Startup screen is displayed for 3 seconds either the default screen the I O Status screen is displayed by default or a user defined screen is displayed if your application uses a custom default screen Using the LCD 89 Main Menu and Default Screen The Main menu consists of five menu items I O Status Monitoring Mode Switch User Display and Advanced Set LCD Main Menu 000006 RU PI O Status Monitoring Mode Switch RU Acvanced Set Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 90 Using the LCD Main Menu Items Menu Item Description For details refer to 1 0 Status Displays the I O Status screen which shows the 1 0 status 1 0 Status page 93 of the embedded digital 1 0 Monitoring Allows you to view and change the data value of a bit and an Monitor User Defined Target Files on page 95 integer file Monitoring
17. 2012 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 293 When the Descriptor Code is selected as PTYP the Point Addressing parameters for the Descriptor element are replaced by 10 Point Addressing parameters These should be configured in the same order of the DAEL elements in the relevant Prototypes Descriptor Element Configuration Index Descriptor Code Data Type Code NONE rz Data Lenath bytes p 7 Ancillary Value 0000000000000000000000000 Cancel Point Index Point Address 1 r Point Address 6 Paint Address Type Standard DNP3 Point 7 Point Address Type Standard DNP Point Type om Point Type NONE Point Index o Point Index 0 Point Address 2 r Point Address 7 Point Address Standard DNP3 Point Point Address Standard DNP Point Type YS Point Type NONE Point Index Point Index 0 Point Address 3 r Point Address 8 Point Address Type Standard DNP3 Point v Point Address Type Standard DNP Point Type NONE Point Type NONE Point Index n Point Address 4 Point Address Standard DNP3 Point Point Type Point Index o Point Address 9 Point Address Type Point Type Point Index Standard DNP NONE Point Address 5 Point Address Type Standard DNP3 Point x Point Type NONE Point Index o
18. C 140 F for 10 ms 2 0 A Repeatability is once every 2 s at 60 C 140 F for 10 ms Isolated groups Group 1 Outputs 0 to 3 Group 2 Outputs 4 to 7 Group 1 Outputs 0 to 7 Group 1 Outputs 0 to 15 Group 1 Outputs 0 15 Group 2 Outputs 16 31 internally connected to common Output group to backplane isolation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1836V AC for 1 s or 2596V DC for 1 s 265V AC working voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1200V AC for 1 s or 1697V DC for 1 s 75V DC working voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1200V AC for 2 s or 1697V DC for 2 s 75V DC working voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Output group to output group isolation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1836V AC for 1 s or 2596V DC for 1 s Not applicable Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1200V AC for 2 s or 1697V DC for 2 s 75V DC working voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation 265V AC working voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Vendor 1 0 code 1 Product type code 7 Product code 119 101 103 100 102 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 164 Specifications Output Specifications Specification Shipping weight approx with carton 1762 0
19. Load range Voltage output gt 1 KQ Output coding 0 10V DC 0 4095 Output resolution 12 bit Analog output setting time 3 ms max Overall Accuracy 20 60 C 4 140 F 1 0 of full scale Electrical isolation Non isolated with internal logic Cable length 30 m 98 ft shielded cable Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 154 Specifications Specifications for Outputs in Hazardous Locations Class 1 Division 2 Groups A B C D Relay Outputs 1766 L32AWA A Description 1766 L32BWA A 1766 L32BXB A Maximum controlled load 1440 VA 1080 VA Maximum Continuous Current Current per channel and group 2 5 A per channel 2 5 A per channel common 8A max channel 8 11 common Current per at 150V 28 A or total of per point controller max loads whichever is less at 240V 20 A or total of per point max loads whichever is less Relay Outputs 1766 L32AWA A 1766 L32BWA A 1766 L32BXB A Turn On Time Turn Off Time 10 msec maximum Load current 10 mA minimum 1 Scan time dependent Description Maximum Volts Amperes Amperes Volt Amperes Make Break Continuous Make Break 240V AC 75A 0 75 25A 1800 VA 180 VA 120V AC 15 0 1 5 25A 1800VA 180 250V DC 0 11 1 0 28 VA 125V DC 0 22A 1 0A 28 VA Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Input Power Required N co N N at 24V DC Watts
20. Mode remate RUH HUN gt PHOG mode Conf i rm nN The usual method for using a memory module is to reuse the device Select Reuse Device or Write Only by pressing the Up or Down keys LIBE TEE TE REMOTE 1 Reuse Device 2 Write Only Select Num IMPORTANT Once Write Only is set write protection cannot be removed A change ee cannot be made to the control program stored in a write protected memory module If a change is required use a different memory module For more information on transferring data to and from memory modules see Memory Module Operation on page 144 7 This screen appears if the save is complete Press the OK key to go back to executing mode LIBET ETE Stored to HH PHOG gt RUN mode Conf i rm Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Using the LCD 139 Loading communication EEPROM Follow these steps to load user programs and data from the memory module to the controller s memory 1 Select Load from MM to load user programs and data LIBET ETE Comms Store to HH from HH 2 If your controller is in a non executing mode skip to the next step Otherwise switch your controller to a non executing mode REMOTE Mode remote RUH gt mode Conf i rm 3 This screen appears if the load from the memory module is complete Press the OK key to go back to executing mode
21. Power cycle is required for changes to take effect When the selection is Disabled Unchecked DNP3 service over Ethernet is disabled after power cycle When the selection is Enabled Checked DNP3 service over Ethernet is enabled after power cycle Enable Master Address Validation The valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked When the selection is Disabled Unchecked the MicroLogix 1400 accepts the requests from any DNP3 Master When the selection is Enabled Checked the MicroLogix 1400 accepts the requests only from the DNP3 Master Node Address which is configured in the parameters Master Node0 on page 236 and Master Node1 Master Node2 Master Node3 Master Node4 on page 236 The maximum number of Master Node Address for the Master Address Validation is 5 Enable Self Address The valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked When this bit is Disabled Unchecked any packets which contain the destination address 65532 FFFCh are ignored When this bit is Enabled Checked any packets which contain the destination address 65532 FFFCh are accepted and processed Enable Access Control The valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked When the selection is Disabled Unchecked the MicroLogix 1400 accepts the requests from any DNP3 Master When th
22. Using a Modem You can use modems to connect a personal computer to one MicroLogix 1400 controller using DF1 Full Duplex protocol to multiple controllers using DF1 Half Duplex protocol or Modbus RTU Slave protocol via Channel 0 as shown in the following illustration See Appendix E for information on types of modems you can use with the micro controllers IMPORTANT Do not attempt to use DH 485 protocol through modems under any circumstance The communication timing using DH 485 protocol is not supported by modem communications Personal Computer m Modem Cable TII straight through BE XII ID S MicroLogix 1400 Modem Channel 0 Protocol Options e DF1 Ful e DF1 Half Duplex protocol to multiple controllers CI e Modbus RTU Slave protocol Duplex protocol to 1 controller 1761 CBL APOO or Modem 1761 CBL PM02 straight through 44594 1 Series C or later cables are required for Class Div 2 applications You can connect a MicroLogix 1400 controller to your modem directly without using an external optical isolator such as AIC catalog number 1761 NET AIC as shown in the illustration below because Channel 0 is isolated within the controller Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 64 Communication Connections Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 MicroLogix 1400 Channel 0 to Modem Cable Pinout When connecting Mic
23. oO oO oO om ag O oOocococoooooos ook cO c owe m cc meo ww ol ooo O oO ok ooo OC oO oll O oO o oa OO ae X DUO X u cC OC a oe O of ol O Retain previous value EN B3 0 0 Radix Binary Symb C Left right arrow moves the cursor between the digits of the value Up down arrow changes the value Up arrow increment Down arrow decrement 0 Status The MicroLogix 1400 provides I O status indicators on the LCD screen You can view the status of inputs and outputs on the I O Status screen on the LCD as shown below The I O status indicators on this screen are updated every 100 ms to reflect the current I O status in real time regardless of controller scan time 000000 BUM usi I BBOOOOO0O0000 0100000 6143456789012 456789 0 00000000 Output status indicators 12 A solid rectangle is displayed when the input or output is energized An empty rectangle is displayed when the input or output is not energized Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 94 Using the LCD Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 IMPORTANT If no user defined LCD screen is used the 1 0 Status screen is displayed e 5 seconds after the contro
24. the highest index number is 1 Except for Binary and Double Bit Binary type objects the index number can be increased by 1 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 260 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 DNP 3 Configuration Files You can set configuration files for each object These configuration files allow you to configure parameters such as Class level and Object Flag bit information for each element Only a Binary Data file type can be used for configuration file Relationship between MicroLogix Data Files and Configuration Files Maximum MicroLogix Data Files Configuration Files File Type File Number Configurable Elements Binary Input File Binary Input Config File Only B file 3 9 to 255 256 Binary Input Online Config File In Series B Double Bit Binary Input File Double Bit Binary Input Config File Only B file 3 9 to 255 256 Double Bit Binary Input Online Config File In Series B Binary Output File Binary Output Config File Only B file 3 9 to 255 256 16 bit Counter File 16 bit Counter Config File Only B file 9 to 255 256 16 bit Counter Threshold Config File In Series Only N file 7 9to 255 32 bit Counter File 32 bit Counter Config File Only B file 3 910 255 256 32 bit Counter Threshold Config File In Series B Only L file 9 to 255 Frozen 16 bit Counter File Frozen 16 bit Counter Config File Only B file 9 to 255 256 Frozen 32 bit Counte
25. 0 0 0 to 65535 17 Update Key 5 0 0 0 to 65535 18 Update Key 6 0 0 0 to 65535 19 Update Key 7 0 0 0 to 65535 90 User Number 0 0 0 to 65535 For User 10 91 Reserved 0 0 0 For User 10 92 Update Key 0 0 0 0 to 65535 93 Update Key 1 0 0 0 to 65535 94 Update Key 2 0 0 0 to 65535 95 Update Key 3 0 0 0 to 65535 96 Update Key 4 0 0 0 to 65535 97 Update Key 5 0 0 0 to 65535 98 Update Key 6 0 0 0 to 65535 99 Update Key 7 0 0 0 to 65535 Diagnostic File Number in Secure Authentication This parameter is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers The diagnostic file number is used to store the diagnostics for the troubleshooting of DNP3 Secure Authentication subsystem The value of this parameter is file only Valid range is 0 7 9 to 255 Default value is 0 See the table for the contents of the data file in the section Diagnostics Default Variation Contig File Number This parameter is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers This file number is used to define default variations in a response to a Class 0 poll request Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 248 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 The value of this parameter is N file only Valid range is 0 7 9 to 255 Default value is 0 In RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro software when this parameter is configured properly you can see a DNP3 Default Variation Config File tree in Chann
26. 2 and 3 are reported Since Hold Times are configured to 5 seconds generated events will be reported after 5 seconds Channel Configuration Eg General Channel D Channel 1 Channel2 DNP3 Slave Data Link Layer Channel for Unsolicited Response Layer Enable Unsolicited On Start Up Send Initial Unsolicited On Start Up Enable Unsolicited For Class1 Enable Unsolicited For Class2 Enable Enable Unsolicited For Class3 etis ad Max Response Size 2048 Synchronization Interval x1 mins 0 Confirmation Timeout 1 ms 10000 Number of Retries 0 Number of Classi Events 100 Hold Time after Class1 Events st s 5 Number of Class2 Events 100 Hold Time after Class2 Events x1 s 5 Number of Class3 Events 1000 Hold Time after Class3 Events x1 s Select Timeout x1 10 DNP3 Object Data File Number DNP3 Object Config File Number Binary Input Bina Input 30 Binary Output Binary Output 0 Counter 156 0 Counter 32bits fo Frozen Counter 16bits jo Frozen Counter 32bits p Analog Input 16bits 36 Analog Input 32bits 0 Analog Input Short Floating fo Double Bit Input SmalBco 0 Counter 166 Counter 32bits Analog Input 16bits Analog Input 325 Analog Input Short Floating Analog Output 16bits Analog Output 32bits Analog Output Short Floati
27. 252 0 240 Device Attribute 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 start stop 245 247 06 no range or all 2 write 00 01 start stop 0 254 Device Attribute 1 read 00 01 start stop Non specific all attributes 06 no range or all request 0 255 Device Attributes List of 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 start stop attribute variations 06 no range or all 1 0 Binary Input Any Variation 1 read 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 1 1 Binary Input Packed format 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 1 2 Binary Input With flags 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 2 0 Binary Input Event Any 1 read 06 no range or all Variation 07 08 limited qty 2 1 Binary Input Event Without 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 2 2 Binary Input Event With 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index absolute time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 2 3 Binary Input Event With 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index relative time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Implementation Table for Series controllers DNP Object Group amp Variation Request Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 345 DNP3 Master may issue Micr
28. 256 8 binary input points 237 Read Only INT 1 1 Support for binary input 1 events 238 Read Only UINT 4 2 Max binary input index 256 16 239 Read Only UINT 4 2 Number of binary input 0 256 16 points 240 Read Only UINT 4 2 Max transmit fragment 2048 27 2048 When this value is size written to the controller the communication configuration file is changed to this value 241 Read Only UINT 4 2 Max receive fragment size 2048 242 Read Only VSTR length of length of the Device manufacturer s This variation returns firmware FRN the string string value software version FRN 1 00 value Supported ranges FRN FRN FRN FRN where x is 0 99 and 00 999 For example 1 00 FRN 1 05 FRN 12 05 FRN 102 27 or FRN 103 117 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Object Group 0 Variations for Attribute Set 0 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 301 R Attribute Length in Max Variation 829 Data Bytes Length in Descripti Value Series A Value Series B ption alue Series alue Series Mite Type Series A Bytes 243 Read Only length of length ofthe Device manufacturer s This variation This variation the string string value hardware version returns hardware returns hardware value series and revision series and revision of
29. 3 24V DC es IN4 T INS IN6 7 COM Common connected DC sinking Y internally DC sourcing DC ee a COM 44571 1762 1016 Wiring Diagram DC Sinking SSS SS DC Sourcing INO oe aa tob T IN 2 Ho r tx fee 240 INS IN6 7 DC DC Sinking COM 0 DC Sourcing DC Sinking DC Sourcing Ih 24V DC aa pr d DC Sinking DC Sourcing 44572 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P 2012 44 Wire Your Controller Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 1762 1032T Wiri DC sourcing DC sinking DC sourcing DC sinking DC sinking DC sourcing DC sinking DC sourcing ng Diagram DC COM 1 A DC COM 1 INO IN 1 N2 24VDC 3 N4 c1 5 6 N7 IN 9 9 IN 10 IN 11 mm m 2avoc 12 272 7 N13 5 7 1 IN 14 Aug IN15 DC Y COM2 DC COM2 1762 0A8 Wiring Diagram DC sourcing DC sourcing DC sourcing DC sourcing DC sinking DC sinking DC sinking DC sinking DC COM 3 A DC COM 3 N16 IN18 24 0 19
30. 5 Mount the controller 6 Leave the protective debris shield in place until you are finished wiring the controller and any other devices Mounting Template OX 2 a v9 GM 44521 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P 2012 24 Install Your Controller 1762 Expansion 1 0 Dimensions A A 44567 Dimension Measurement A 90 mm 3 5 in B 40 mm 1 57 in C 87 mm 3 43 in Mounting 1762 Expansion 1 0 ATTENTION During panel or DIN rail mounting of all devices be sure that all debris such as metal chips and wire stands is kept from falling into the module Debris that falls into the module could cause damage when the module is under power DIN Rail Mounting The module can be mounted using the following DIN rails 35x 7 5 mm EN 50 022 35 x 7 5 or 35x 15 mm EN 50 022 35 x 15 Before mounting the module on a DIN rail close the DIN rail latch Press the DIN rail mounting area of the module against the DIN rail The latch momentarily opens and locks into place Use DIN rail end anchors Allen Bradley part number 1492 EA35 or 1492 EAH35 for vibration or shock environments The following illustration shows the location of the end anchors Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Install Your Controller 25 End anchor End anchor 44974 TIP 1762 expansion 1 0 must
31. BWAA AWAA or BXBA and y is A F For example 1766 L32BWA SER A 1766 L32AWA SER B 1766 L32BXB SER or 1766 L32BWAA SER Publication 1766 UM001G EN P 2012 302 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Object Group 0 Variations for Attribute Set 0 Attribute Length in Max Read Length in Sope 5 Variation Data Bytes Description Value Series A Value Series B Bytes Series B 251 Reserved for future assignment 252 Read Only VSTR 13 19 Device manufacturer s This variation This variation name returns the returns the Company name Company name Allen Bradley Rockwell Automation for DNP3 253 Read Only Reserved for future assignment 254 Read Only Non specific all attributes This variable returns all of the variations request in this group except this variation 255 Read Only List of attribute variations This variation returns the R W property for each variation From g0v211 to g0v253 0 for Read Only 1 for Read or Write Event Reporting Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 This section covers how to generate DNP3 events from DNP3 Data Objects and how to teport the generated events by polled response or unsolicited response Generating Events The MicroLogix 1400 has a separate buffer area that you can use to log DNP3 events internally The maximum number of the Events that can be lo
32. C 454 274 F 1 5 C 2 7 F Thermocouple 270 1370 C 454 F 2498 0 1 C 0 18 F Thermocouple 270 170 C 454 274 F 2 0 C 3 6 F Thermocouple E 220 1000 C 364 1832 0 1 C 0 18 F Thermocouple 270 220 C 454 364 F 1 0 C 1 8 F Thermocouples S and R 0 4 C 0 72 F Thermocouple C 0 2 C 0 36 F Thermocouple B 0 7 C 1 26 F 50 mV 6 uV 100 mV 6 uV 1 sam 2 input signal temperature is stable 1200 C 346 2192 F Hz Filters max at 25 C 77 F Ambient 0 6 C 1 1 F With Autocalibration Enabled Accuracy 3 for 10 Hz 50 Hz and 60 at 0 60 32 140 F Ambient 30 9 C 1 7 F Repeatability is the ability of the input module to register the same reading in successive measurements for the Repeatability at any other temperature in the 0 60 C 32 140 F range is the same as long as the Without Autocalibration Maximum Temperature Drift at 0 60 C 32 140 F Ambient 0 0218 C C 0 0218 F F Thermocouple 200 1300 C 328 2372 F 1 C 1 8 F 1 5 C 2 7 F 0 0367 C C 0 0367 F F Thermocouple 210 200 C 346 328 F 1 2 C 2 2 F 1 8 C 3 3 F 0 0424 C C 0 0424 F F Thermocouple T 230 400 C 3
33. Channel 0 and Channel 2 Link Layer Configuration 225 Channel 1 Link Layer Configuration 226 DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration 228 Channel 0 and Channel 2 Link Layer Configuration Parameters 230 Channel 1 Ethernet Link Layer Configuration Parameters 233 DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration Parameters 238 DNP3 Slave Application Layer 1 ero eee 250 Piunction ee eei tue cR dee ie eta ce tdt 251 Internal Indications 255 DNP3 Objects and MicroLogix 1400 Data 256 PNPA ati Piles ih aua ed olla 259 DNP 3 Configuration Files uester ode E bebe bd i c mere 260 DNP3 Binary Input Object mettere catu pa rat 264 DNP3 Binary Output Object 266 DNP3 Double Bit Binary Input 269 DNP3 Counter Objects suos ss 271 DNP3 Frozen Counter Object 274 DNP3 Analog Input Object ss ossia EN 276 DNP3 Analog Output Object i ere is eat cere eres 280 DPNPI BCD mad 282 DNP3 Data OPERE bene I 283 Object Quality Flags 295 DNP3 Device Attribute Object panties 298 Event Reporting 302 DM aut iid 302 Control Generating Event 306 Reporting Event By Polled 307 Reporting Event By Unsolicited
34. FC Byte 0x17 23 Delay Measurement used for Non LAN Procedure This function code is used to measure the communication channel delay time FC_RECORD_CURRENT_TIME FC Byte 0x18 24 Record Current Time used for LAN Procedure This function code is used in the procedure for time synchronizing MicroLogix 1400 controllers that communicate over a LAN This applies only to MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers FC_OPEN_FILE FC Byte 0x19 25 Open File This function code is used to make a file available for reading or writing FC_CLOSE_FILE FC Byte 26 Close File After the file reading or writing operation this function code used to unlock the file Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 254 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 FC DELETE FILE FC Byte 0 1 27 Delete File A DNP3 master uses this function code to delete a file FC GET FILE INFO FC Byte 0 10 28 Get File Information This function code is for the master to retrieve information about a file in the MicroLogix 1400 This applies only to MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers FC AUTHENTICATE FILE FC Byte 0 10 29 Authenticate File This function code is used to obtain an authentication key that is needed to open or delete a file FC ABORT FILE FC Byte 0x1E 30 Abort File This function code is used to immediately request termination of the
35. IN20 21 7 22 23 24V Y N24 7 N25 2 N27 1 28 N29 LL IN 30 eue m N31 DC COM 4 DC COM 4 44920 ps 11 OUT 1 L2 OUT 2 OUT 3 vac 1 Tore L 9 ars LI FG OUT 6 i 44573 Wire Your Controller 45 1762 0B8 Wiring Diagram L 4 VDC DC OUT 0 OUT 1 CRH m OUT3 A our4 OUT5 V 1 4 cr OUT 6 24V dc source OUT 7 _ DC COM 4 Y DC 44574 1762 0B16 Wiring Diagram VDC DC 97 9 OUT 0 A OUT 3 cr 4 ours 34 i OUT 6 OUT7 t 68 OUT 8 24V dc source j Y DC 44575 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 46 Wire Your Controller 1762 0B32T Wiring Diagram VDC 1 DC A VDC 1 A cR d OUT 1 er gt lt OUT 2 N OUT 3 OUT4 OUT 5 CON cR 4 24V DC OUT 7 en outs cR outs aed OUT 10 V 1 cr OUT 11 ey OUT 12 OUT 13 Ne OUT 14 Vy 1 OUT 15 4 DC DC COM 1 DC COM
36. If you do not run the cable through a contiguous metallic wireway or conduit keep the communication cable at least 0 15 m 6 in from AC power lines of less than 20 A 0 30 m 1 ft from lines greater than 20 A but only up to 100K VA and 0 60 m 2 ft from lines of 100 K VA or more If you run the cable through a contiguous metallic wireway or conduit keep the communication cable at least 0 08 m 3 in from AC power lines of less than 20 A 0 15 m 6 in from lines greater than 20 A but only up to 100 K VA and 0 30 m 1 ft from lines of 100 K VA or more Running the communication cable through conduit provides extra protection from physical damage and electrical interference If you route the cable through conduit follow these additional recommendations Use ferromagnetic conduit near critical sources of electrical interference You can use aluminum conduit in non critical areas Use plastic connectors to couple between aluminum and ferromagnetic conduit Make an electrical connection around the plastic connector use pipe clamps and the heavy gauge wire or wire braid to hold both sections at the same potential Ground the entire length of conduit by attaching it to the building earth ground Do not let the conduit touch the plug on the cable Arrange the cables loosely within the conduit The conduit should contain only serial communication cables Install the conduit so that it meets all app
37. May 2012 250 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 DNP3 Slave Application Layer Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Disable EtherNet IP Incoming Connections If you have a critical application and do not want to allow any Ethernet IP Incoming Connections use the parameter Disable Ethernet IP Incoming Connections When this parameter is checked disabled in the Channel 1 Ethernet configuration the MicroLogix 1400 does not allow any incoming Ethernet IP connections In doing so you cannot use RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro over Ethernet port to monitor or change the configuration user program Channel Configuration E General Channel 0 Channel 1 Chan 1 DNP3 Channel 2 DNP3 Slave Driver Ethernet Y Hardware Address 00 00 00 00 0000 Network Link ID p IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask mmm Gateway Address fis i Default Domain Name T Primary Name Server 0 0 0 Number of Pages Secondary Name Server 0 0 0 0 uel Uter User Provided Web Pages Starting Data File Number o Protocol Control M BOOTP Enable DHCP Enable Msg Connection Timeout x 1 5 1 5000 SNMP Server Enable SMTP Client Enable Msg Reply Timeout 1m5 3000 v Server Enable DNP3 over IP Enable Inactivity Timeout Min 30 Modbus TCP Enable Disable EtherNet IP Incoming Connections Auto Negotiate Disable Duplicate IP Address De
38. Monitoring functionality on the LCD is the first 256 words 0 255 of the target integer file 12 If you have finished monitoring the integer file N7 press the ESC key to return to the Main Menu screen as shown in step 2 Monitoring Double Integer files The LCD allows you to view and change the data value of a double integer file You can access to this functionality via the Monitoring screen of the LCD Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 106 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Using the LCD To monitor a double integer file on the LCD you have to specify its file number in the Target User Defined File Number TUF element of the LCD Function File and download your application program to the controller The TUF element can only be changed by a program download The value stored in the TUF element identifies the double integer file with which the LCD will interface Valid double integer files are L9 and L10 through L255 When the LCD reads a valid double integer file number it can access up to 256 words 0 to 255 on the LCD screen The protection bit LCD edit disable in the data file properties of target integer file are used to define the read only or read write privileges for its file Valid file type include Bit Integer Double integer or Float as specified in the TUF element The data protection for its file depends on the setting for LCD Edit Disable If LCD Edit Disable is set to 1 in file propertie
39. Po Point Index 0 Ancillary Value 222222222222222222222222222222 Point Address 3 m Point Address Point Address Standard DNP3 Point v Point Addre Point NONE Pa PointIndex 0 Poj Point Address 4 Point Addres n Point Add Mi i i X Point Addre DAEL configuration for A dem Data File relevant Prototype 0 File Number Index 4 File Element 6 File Sub Element p o Point Address 5 Paint Address Point Address Standard DNP3 Point z Point Addre Point NONE Po EXT Point Index 0 Po Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Object Flags for Binary Input Object Quality Flags tules below are also applied to Event data When the controller is in Executing mode and there is no configuration fil only the Online flag in the object flag is set Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 295 The object flag is composed of an 8 bit string for some DNP3 objects The tables below show Flag Descriptions for each object The ONLINE RESTART COMM LOST REMOTE_FORCED and LOCAL FORCED flags are common to all object group types that contain flags There are some rules for the Object flag set or clear for each bit by the controller The When the controller is in Non Executing mode the object flag is always all 0 gt When the controller is in Executing mode and there is a configuration file the flags in the
40. Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Mounting the Controllers 20 DIN Rail Mounting ee eene e et 22 Pan l Mountings s osie elei oi 23 1762 Expansion I O Dimensions eee 24 Mounting 1762 Expansion S eben dts tems 24 DIN Rail Mounting coder EE Lee ee SR E 24 Panel MOURNE 25 Connecting Expansion O eI NERA TIFEE EROS S 26 Chapter 3 Wiring Requiremelitss i2 ise es Re CR any mee e UI RU E HN ROPA 27 Wiring 4 27 Wire without Spade Lugs 28 Wire with Spade Lugs ates 28 Using Surge SUppEeSSORS e pese eot edi rante tide que 29 Recommended Surge Suppressors 30 Grounding the Controller tr erroe ber ete RO 31 Wiring d da pP ess x aa d E PCIE pM SS 32 Terminal Block Layouts J L eite Mad Sl ad 33 Sinking and Sourcing Wiring Diagrams 00 0 0 cece eee 36 1766 L32BW A 1766 L32AW A 1766 L32BXB 1766 L32BW AA 1766 L32AWAA 1766 L32BXBA Wiring Diagrams 36 Controller 39 Minimizing Electrical Noises RE RES 39 Wiring Your Analog Channels zai iore t e eror t e atat 39 Analog Channel Wiring Guidelines 0 o 40 Minimizing Electrical Noise on Analog Channels 41 Grounding Your Analog er Ee da 42
41. Specifications 155 Specifications for Outputs in Non Hazardous Locations only Relay Outputs Ne 1766 L32AWA A Description 1766 L32BWA A 1766 L32BXB A Maximum controlled load 1440 VA 1080 VA Maximum Continuous Current Current per channel and group 2 5 A per channel 2 5 A per channel common 8A max channel 8 11 common Current per at 150V 28 or total of per point controller max loads whichever is less at 240V 20 A or total of per point max loads whichever is less Relay Outputs E 1766 L32AWA A 1766 L32BWA A Description 1766 L32BXB A Turn On Time Turn Off Time 10 msec maximum Load current 10 mA minimum 1 Scan time dependent MicroLogix 1400 DC Input Power Requirements for 1766 L32BXB A Unit 1766 L32BXB A Typical Power Requirements 4 8 12 16 20 Calculated Expansion Power Load Watts Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 156 Specifications Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 1766 L32BXB 1766 L32BXBA FET Output Maximum output current temperature dependent FET Current per Point 1 5A 30 C 86 F Current Amps 0 75A 60 C 140 F FET Total Current Current Amps 6 0A 30 C 86 F 3 0A 60 C 140 F 10 C 300 50 70C 80 A 50 F 88 1229 158 176 Temperature 44533 High Speed 1 General Operation Operati
42. The over or under range flag comes on when the normal operating range over under is exceeded The module continues to convert the ana Repeatability is the ability of the module to register the same reading in successive measurements for the same signal Rated working voltage is the maximum continuous voltage that can be applied at the terminals with respect to earth ground og input up to the maximum Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 170 Specifications Input Specifications Specification Number of inputs 1762 IF20F2 2 differential unipolar 1762 1 4 4 differential bipolar 1762 IR4 4 1762 IT4 4 input channels plus 1 CJC sensor Update time typical 2 5 ms 130 250 290 450 Input filter and NA 530 ms selectable cofiguration dependent A D converter type Successive Successive Delta Sigma Delta Sigma approximation approximation Common mode voltage 27V 27V NA 10V range Common mode 55dBat50and60Hz gt 55dBat50and60Hz gt 110 dB at 50 Hz with 10 gt 110 dB at 50 Hz with 10 rejection or 50 Hz filter or 50 Hz filter gt 110 dB at 60 Hz with 10 gt 110 dB at 60 Hz with 10 or 60 Hz filter or 60 Hz filter Non linearity in percent 0 129 4 0 12 4 0 05 NA full scale Typical overall accuracy 0 55 full scale at 0 32 full scale at 0 5 C F for Pt 385 NA 20 65 C 20 65 C 0 3 full scale at 25 0 24 full scale
43. The processor broadcasts BOOTP request message containing its hardware address over the local network or subnet The BOOTP server compares the hardware address with the addresses in its look up table The BOOTP server sends a message back to the processor with the IP address and other network information that corresponds to the hardware address it received With all hardware and IP addresses in one location you can easily change IP addresses in the BOOTP configuration file if your network needs to be changed The BOOTP request can be disabled by clearing the BOOTP Enable parameter in the channel configuration file When both BOOTP Enable and DHCP are cleared disabled the MicroLogix 1400 uses the existing channel configuration data IMPORTANT If BOOTP is disabled or no BOOTP server exists on the network you must use RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro programming software to enter change the IP address for each processor or you must use DHCP instead of it Using the Rockwell BOOTP DHCP Utility The Rockwell BOOTP DHCP server utility is a standalone program that incorporates the functionality of standard BOOTP software with a user friendly graphical interface It is located in the Utils directory on the RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro installation CD Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 362 Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface The newest version of the utility can be downloaded from http www ab com networks ethe
44. WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD A AIC must be operated from an external power source This product must be installed in an enclosure All cables connected to the product must remain in the enclosure or be protected by conduit or other means See Safety Considerations on page 9 for additional information Install and Attach the AIC 1 Take care when installing the AIC in an enclosure so that the cable connecting the MicroLogix controller to the AIC does not interfere with the enclosure door 2 Carefully plug the terminal block into the RS 485 port on the AIC you are putting on the network Allow enough cable slack to prevent stress on the plug 3 Provide strain relief for the Belden cable after it is wired to the terminal block This guards against breakage of the Belden cable wires Communication Connections 81 Powering the AIC MicroLogix 1000 1200 and 1500 programmable controllers support 24V DC communication power on Channel 0 When connected to the 8 pin mini DIN connector on the 1761 NET AIC 1761 NET ENI and the 1761 NET ENIW these controllers provide the power for the interface converter modules The MicroLogix 1400 does not provide 24V DC communication power through communication ports Instead these pins are used to provide RS 485 communications directly Any AIC ENI or ENIW not connected to a MicroLogix 1000 1200 or 1500 controller requires a 24V DC power supply If both the controller and external power are c
45. ae Descriptor Code NONE Data Type Code Data Lenath bytes Ancillary Value Cancel Descriptor Code UUID for element 1 NSPC NAME DAEL for element 2 higher Data Type Code NONE for element 1 NONE VSTR UINT INT FLT OSTR BSTR TIME for element 2 or higher Max Data Length bytes 0 for element 1 0 255 for element 2 or higher Ancillary Value Binary Array in hexadecimal for element 1 ASCII strings for element 2 or higher Maximum 32 bytes Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 288 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Data Set Descriptors Configuration Parameters These parameters are used to construct Data Set Descriptors objects DNP3 Data Set Descriptor 0 General Event Occurrence Condition Number of Descriptor Elements 0 fase PointAddress Type FA Standard DNP3 Point NONE 0 0 Standard DNP3 Point NONE 0 0 2 Standard DNP3 Point 0 0 Standard DNP3 Point 0 0 Trigger Event Disable Change of State Even PT Point PI Point Index Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 FN File Number FE File Element FSE File Sub Element Ancillary Value Lenath bytes Ancillary Value 0 cOoooooooo cows Number of Descriptor Elements 0 10 This must be the same as the number of the Descriptor elements that are configured Characteri
46. cold restart No Object function code only 14 warm restart No Object function code only 23 delay meas No Object function code only Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 24 record current time MicroLogix 1400 Controllers and Ethernet Communication Appendix G Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface This appendix describes MicroLogix 1400 controllers and Ethernet communication describes MicroLogix 1400 performance considerations describes Ethernet network connections and media explains how the MicroLogix 1400 establishes node connections lists Ethernet configuration parameters and procedures describes configuration for subnet masks and gateways Ethernet is a local area network that provides communication between various devices at 10 to 100 Mbps The physical communication media options for the MicroLogix 1400 are built in twisted pair 10 100Base T with media converters or hubs fiber optic broadband thick wire coaxial cable 10Base 5 thin wire coaxial cable 10Base 2 See the following page for more information on Ethernet physical media Publication 1766 UM001G EN P 2012 352 Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface The MicroLogix 1400 supports Ethernet communication via the Ethernet communication channel 1 shown in the drawing below 44606 Channel 0 i Channel 1 RS 232 485 Ethernet DH4
47. is connected to earth ground inside the module These terminals are not electrically isolated from the system They are connected to chassis ground Analog channels are not isolated from each other Use Belden 8761 or equivalent shielded wire Under normal conditions the drain wire shield should be connected to the metal mounting panel earth ground Keep the shield connection to earth ground as short as possible To ensure optimum accuracy for voltage type inputs limit overall cable impedance by keeping all analog cables as short as possible Locate the I O system as close to your voltage type sensors or actuators as possible The controller does not provide loop power for analog inputs Use a power supply that matches the transmitter specifications as shown below Wire Your Controller 41 Analog Input Transmitter Specifications 2 Wire Transmitter Transmitter Controller Controller 0 IV1 9 IV2 or IV3 Controller 44530 Minimizing Electrical Noise on Analog Channels Inputs on analog channels employ digital high frequency filters that significantly reduce the effects of electrical noise on input signals However because of the variety of applications and environments where analog controllers are installed and operated it is impossible to ensure that all environmental noise will be removed by the input filters Several specific steps can be taken to help reduce the effects of environmental noise
48. is or was in Executing mode and the configuration file 3 REMOTE_FORCED May be 1 when the controller is in Executing mode and the configuration file 4 LOCAL FORCED E 5 ROLLOVER 6 DISCONTINUITY 7 reserved Object Flags for Analog Input Bit Offset Name Description 0 ONLINE 0 when the controller is or was in Non Executing mode 1 when the controller is or was in Executing mode and the configuration file does not exist May be 1 when the controller is in Executing mode and the configuration file exists 1 RESTART 0 when the controller is or was in Non Executing mode ae 2 COMM LOST is or was in Executing mode and the configuration file 3 REMOTE_FORCED May be 1 when the controller is in Executing mode and the configuration file 4 LOCAL FORCED RM 5 OVER RANGE 6 REFERENCE ERR 7 reserved Object Flags for Analog Output Bit Offset Name Description 0 ONLINE 0 when the controller is or was in Non Executing mode 1 when the controller is or was in Executing mode 1 RESTART Always 0 Not used 2 COMM LOST Always 0 Not used 3 REMOTE FORCED Always 0 Not used 4 LOCAL FORCED Always 0 Not used 5 reserved Always 0 Not used 6 reserved Always 0 Not used 7 reserved Always 0 Not used Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 298 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Object Flags for Analog Output for Series A controllers Bit Offset Name Des
49. on analog signals install the MicroLogix 1400 system in a properly rated enclosure for example NEMA Make sure that the MicroLogix 1400 system is properly grounded use Belden cable 8761 for wiring the analog channels making sure that the drain wire and foil shield are properly earth grounded route the Belden cable separately from any AC wiring Additional noise immunity can be obtained by routing the cables in grounded conduit Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 42 Wire Your Controller Expansion 1 0 Wiring Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Grounding Your Analog Cable Use shielded communication cable Belden 8761 The Belden cable has two signal wires black and clear one drain wire and a foil shield The drain wire and foil shield must be grounded at one end of the cable Clear Wire x 44531 IMPORTANT Do not ground the drain wire and foil shield at both ends of the cable Digital Wiring Diagrams The following illustrations show the digital expansion I O wiring diagrams 1762 IA8 Wiring Diagram L1 INO 2 tse IN3 100 120V AC IN 4 p lx T IN 5 6 o IN 7 AC COM a connecte L2 AC a internally COM 44570 Wire Your Controller 43 1762 108 Wiring Diagram DC sinking DC sourcing IN 0 Tos IN 1 o
50. or all 129 response 17 28 index 16 bit without time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 32 3 Analog Input Event 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index 32 bit with time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 32 4 Analog Input Event 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index 16 bit with time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 32 5 Analog Input Event 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index Single prec flt pt 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp without time 32 7 Analog Input Event 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index Single prec flt pt with 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp time 341 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P 2012 342 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Implementation Table for Series A controllers DNP Object Group amp Variation Request DNP3 Master may issue MicroLogix 1400 must parse Response DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Group Descrintion Function Qualifier Codes Function Qualifier Codes Num Num Codes dec hex Codes dec hex 40 0 Analog Output Status 1 read 06 no range or all Any Variation 40 1 Analog Output Status 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop 32 bit with flag 40 2 Analog Outp
51. up in a Missing Corrupt OS state The current revision number reflects the version of Boot Firmware To recover the controller from this state see Recovering from Missing ot Corrupt OS State on page 208 Update Status Catalog Number 1766LEC Serial Number Current Revision New Revision A 2 0 n st oe es Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System 205 18 Click the OK button You ate returned to the Welcome to ControlFLASH dialog box Welcome to ControlFi ASH Welcome to ControF the firmware update tool ContioFLASH needs the following information from you before it can i begn updating a device Con irol 1 The Catalog Number of the taiget device 2 The Network Configuration parameters optional 3 The Network Path to the target device A The Firmware Revision lor this update mea _ 19 You can continue to upgrade additional controllers by clicking the Next button or exit the program by clicking the Cancel button If you click cancel you are asked to verify that you want to end the update session ControlFLASH Are you sure you want to end this ControlFLASH session ow ControlFLASH Error The following are error messages you can receive Messages Invalid Catalog Number Target Module Not in Proper State for Programming Failed to Receive Initial TFTP Request from Target Communication error during TFTP tr
52. 0 3 Group 2 connected connected inputs 8 15 Inputs 8 15 inputs 4 7 commons commons Group 3 Inputs 16 23 Group 4 Inputs 24 31 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 162 Specifications Input Specifications Specification 1762 1A8 1762 108 1762 1016 1762 1032T 1762 1080 6 Input group to Verified by one of Verified by one of Verified by one of Verified by one of Verified by one of backplane isolation the following the following the following the following the following dielectric tests dielectric tests dielectric tests dielectric tests dielectric tests 1517V AC for 1 sor 1200V ACAC for 1s 1200V for1sor 1200V AC for2sor 1200V AC for 1 sor 2145V DC for 1 s or 1697V DC for 1s 1697V DC for 1 s 1697V DC for 2 1697V DC for 1 s 132V AC working 75V DC working 75V DC working 75V DC working 75V DC working voltage IEC Class 2 voltage IEC Class 2 voltage IEC Class 2 voltage IEC Class 2 voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced reinforced reinforced reinforced reinforced insulation insulation insulation insulation insulation Vendor I D code 1 Product type code 7 Product code 114 96 97 99 98 1 Sinking Sourcing Inputs Sourcing sinking describes the current flow between the 1 0 module and the field device Sourcing 1 0 circuits supply source current to sinking field devices Sinking 1 0 circuits are driven by a current sourcing field device Field devic
53. 080 0800 B3 1 000002020000 02 0000 B3 2 00000202020020 02 02 080 00 B3 3 0000020202000 0 02 02000700 3 4 00000202000020 0200000 B3 5 00000202020000 02 0800 0 B3 6 0 qo 0 Sg 0 107 O Z0 fof 70 3 7 0000020200020 0 020000 3 8 000002020000 02 6000 0 B3 9 000002020000 02 00000 B3 10 00000000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 vj 53 8 _ Columns fie _ EN 5 4 Properties Usage Help the LCD 97 LCD Edit Disable is set to unchecked disable Data File Properties Global C Local C Constant The TUF element of the LCD Function File is set to 3 to specify the bit file B3 as the target bit file to monitor on the LCD as shown in the screen capture below Function Files F B eee Boot Logo ASCII File 1 4 D Start with Customize g TO Data Input Timeout of LCD Instructic DN ED instruction Job Done LCD Dis Operation Error Bit iE LCD uis peration Error Num TUF Target User Define File Number Jog data update Mode Set TMN Trimpot Value Trimpot Hi h Valie y POTD rimpot 0 Data TMIN yoo a gt Trimpot 1 Data MIN W i D D Instruction Display Window OK key in in Customized Dis Jisplay ooo The controller mode is set to REMOTE RUN Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 98 Using the LCD Follow
54. 0x1A optional 27 0x1B optional 28 0x1C optional 29 0x1D Critical optional 30 0x1E optional 31 0x1F Critical optional 32 0x20 N A 33 0 21 129 0 81 optional 130 0x82 optional 131 0x83 N A N A Expected Session Key Change Interval x1 s in Secure Authentication This parameter is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers This parameter is used for configuring the expected session key change interval in seconds The valid range is 0 7200 2 hrs Default value is 1800 30 mins When DNP3 Master does not change the Session Key within this time configured the MicroLogix 1400 invalidate the Session Key and its state for each user Expected Session Key Change Count in Secure Authentication This parameter is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers This parameter is used for configuring the expected session key change count The valid range is 1 to 10000 Default value is 2000 Reply Timeout x100 ms in Secure Authentication This parameter is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 245 This parameter is used for configuring the reply timeout in 100 msec The valid range is 0 1200 120 s Default value is 20 2 s Maximum Error Count in Secure Authentication This parameter is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers This parameter is used for confi
55. 10 elements of Short Floating Point Analog Input Object were configured the index numbers will be 16 bit Analog Input Object From 0 to 9 32 bit Analog Input Object From 10 to 19 Short Floating Point Analog Input Object From 20 to 29 As an example a configuration of 16 bit 32 bit and Short Floating Point Analog Input Object Files is shown below Data File N14 has 10 elements L15 has 10 elements and F16 has 10 elements accordingly A total of 30 Analog Input Object indexes are configured Index 0 of the Analog Input Object is N14 0 Index 10 is L15 0 Index 20 is F16 0 and Index 29 is F16 9 Data File N14 dec 4161 Obj N14 0 Radix Decimal hd Synbit 1 Couns io z Bes oo E nia Properties Usage Help Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 278 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Data File 115 dec 321 Obj lol Radix Decimal be OO SOES Columns 5 z 915 Properties Usage Help Data File F16 AFI Obj E lol xl As an example an Analog Input Config File is shown below These files have 10 elements each B36 0 0 and B36 0 1 can be configured for Class Level 0 1 2 or 3 for DNP3 Index 0 of the 16 bits Analog Input Object File B36 1 0 and B36 1 1 can be configured for Class Level for DNP3 Index 1 of the Analog Input Object File Default Class Level is 0 Any other bits are reserved In
56. 1982 par 8 a provides that Persons that receive cell and batteries covered by this exemption may reship them pursuant to the provisions of 49 CFR 173 22a in any of these packages authorized in this exemption including those in which they were received The Code of Federal Regulations 49 CFR 173 22a relates to the use of packaging authorized under exemptions In part it requires that you must maintain a copy of the exemption at each facility where the packaging is being used in connection with shipment under the exemption Shipment of depleted batteries for disposal may be subject to specific regulation of the countries involved or to regulations endorsed by those countries such as the Articles Regulations of the International Air Transport Association Geneva Switzerland IMPORTANT Regulations for transportation of lithium batteries are periodically revised Refer to htto www dot gov for the latest shipping information Replacement Parts 181 Disposal ATTENTION Do not incinerate or dispose of lithium batteries in general trash collection Explosion or violent rupture is possible Batteries should be collected for disposal in a manner to prevent against short circuiting compacting or destruction of case integrity and hermetic seal For disposal batteries must be packaged and shipped in accordance with transportation regulations to a proper disposal site The U S Department of Transportation autho
57. 2 write file 00 start stop index 7 90 1 Application Identifier 16 init appl 5B free format 17 start appl 06 no range or all 18 stop appl 101 1 Binary Coded Decimal 1 read file 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop Integers small 130 unsol resp 17 28 index Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 344 Implementation Table for Series A controllers DNP Object Group amp Variation Description Binary Coded Decimal Integers medium Request DNP3 Master may issue MicroLogix 1400 must parse Function Codes dec Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Qualifier Codes hex Function Codes dec Response DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Qualifier Codes hex No Object function code only 13 cold restart No Object function code only Implementation Table for Series B controllers DNP Object Group amp Variation 23 delay meas Request DNP3 Master may issue MicroLogix 1400 must parse Response DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Group Var Descrintion Function Codes Qualifier Codes Function Qualifier Codes Num Num hex Codes dec hex 0 211 239 Device Attribute 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 start stop 241 243 06 no range or all 248 250
58. 2 0A 1249 1 1 5A above 40 C 104 F 2 For DC voltage applications the make break ampere rating for relay contacts can be determined by dividing 28 VA by the applied DC voltage For example 28 VA 48V DC 0 58A For DC voltage applications less than 14V the make break ratings for relay contacts cannot exceed 2A Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 166 Specifications Relay Contact Ratings 1762 0X6l Continuous Amperes Voltamperes Amps per Volts max Point Make Break Make Break 240 5 0 15A 15A 3600 VA 360 VA 120V AC 7 0 A 30A 3 0A 125V DC 25A 0 4A 50 24V DC 7 0 AP 7 0 168 VA 2 ambient temperatures above 40 C 104 F The continuous current per module must be limited so the module powe does not exceed 1440VA Make Break Voltamperes below 28V DC are limited by the 7 A Make Break current limit Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 3 Surge Suppression Connecting surge suppressors across your external inductive load will extend the life of the relay contacts For additional details refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 4 DC Make Break Voltamperes must be limited to 50 VA for DC voltages between 28V DC and 125V DC DC Specifications 167 Module Load Ratings 1762 0 61 Volts max Controlled Load Current per Module max 240V AC 6A 12
59. 240V AC 24V DC 12 Fast 24V DC Inputs 4 Voltage 8 Normal 24V DC Inputs Inputs 12 Relay Outputs 2 Voltage 1766 L32BXBA 24V DC 1 Isolated RS 232 RS 485 combo port 7 Non isolated RS 232 Standard D sub connector Component Descriptions Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 None 20 120V AC Inputs 12 Relay Outputs 12 Fast 24V DC Inputs 8 Normal 24V DC Inputs 6 Relay Outputs 3 Fast DC Outputs 3 Normal DC Outputs MicroLogix 1400 Memory Module and Built in Real Time Clock The controller has a built in real time clock to provide a reference for applications that need time based control The controller is shipped with a memory module port cover in place You can order a memory module 1766 MM1 as an accessory The memory module provides optional backup of your user program and data and is a means to transport your programs between controllers Hardware Overview 3 The program and data in your MicroLogix 1400 is non volatile and is stored when the power is lost to the controller The memory module provides additional backup that can be stored separately The memory module does not increase the available memory of the controller 1766 MM1 Memory Module 44536 1762 Expansion 1 0 1762 expansion I O can be connected to the MicroLogix 1400 controller as shown below TIP maximum of seven 1 0 modules in any combination can be connected to a controller See Ap
60. 351 Modbus 221 supported 57 communication scan 373 communications toggle push button using 58 component descriptions 2 1762 expansion 0 3 communication cables 4 memory module 2 real time clock 2 configuration errors 190 configure processor with DHCP server 363 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 382 Index configuring Ethernet network 120 IP address 122 configuring the Ethernet channel 358 connecting expansion 1 0 26 connecting the system AIC 74 80 DeviceNet network 82 83 62 68 connecting to DF1 Half Duplex network 66 connecting to networks via Ethernet interface 351 connecting to networks via RS 232 RS 485 interface 209 connections to the Ethernet network 353 control profile 374 ControlFLASH error messages 205 firmware upgrade 195 missing or corrupt OS state 208 using 193 controller 373 grounding 31 1 0 wiring 39 installation 7 LED status error conditions 186 185 minimizing electrical noise 39 20 22 23 preventing excessive heat 12 status indicators 183 controller modes 112 controller overhead 373 controller spacing 20 counter 374 CPU Central Processing Unit 374 cursor display 92 D data table 374 default communication configuration 58 DeviceNet Communications 82 83 DeviceNet network connecting 82 83 selecting cable 82 DF1 Full Duplex protocol connecting 62 description 209 example system configuration 210 using a modem 63 212 DF1 Half Duplex protocol description 210 DH485 communication
61. 94 144 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Rx Invalid Aggressive Mode Request Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 335 Word Offset Current State Description CHO CH1 CH2 45 95 145 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Rx Valid Key Change 46 96 146 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Rx Invalid Key Change 4 97 147 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Rx Challenge 48 98 148 Wait for Reply Reserved 49 99 149 Wait for Reply Counter for Ignored events Function Codes Function Codes for MicroLogix 1400 Series A Controllers These tables show the Application Layer Function codes implemented in MicroLogix 1400 Message Function MicroLogix Descrintion Type Code 1400 Support Confirmation 0 0x00 FC_CONFIRM Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses sends Request 1 0x01 FC_READ Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 2 0x02 FC WRITE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 3 0x03 FC SELECT Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 4 0x04 FC OPERATE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 5 0x05 FC DIRECT OPERATE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 6 0x06 FC DIRECT OPERATE NR Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 7 0x07 FC IMMED FREEZE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 8 0x08 FC IMMED FREEZE NR Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 9 0 09 FC_FREEZE_CLEAR Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 10 0x0A FC FREEZE
62. ACOO 1747 E m Connections from to AIC Power Supply Switch Required Setting SLC 5 03 or SLC 5 04 processor channel 0 port 1 yes external PC COM port port 1 yes external PanelView 550 through NULL modem port 1 yes external adapter DTAM Plus DTAM Micro port 1 yes external Port 1 on another AIC port 1 yes external MicroLogix 1400 ch 2 port2 yes external External power supply required unless the AIC is powered by the device connected to port 2 then the selection switch should be set to cable Cable straight 9 25 pin Length Connections from user supplied cable modem or other communication device 44603 to AIC Power Supply Required Power Selection Switch Setting external External power supp Cable 1761 CBL ASO3 1761 CBL AS09 y required unless the AIC is powered by the device connected to port 2 Length 3 m 9 8 ft 9 5 m 31 17 ft 80 1761 803 1761 CBL AS09 44604 External m Connections from to AIC Power Supply Switch Required Setting SLC 500 Fixed port3 yes external SLC 5 01 SLC 5 02 and SLC 5 03 processors PanelView 550 RJ45 port port3 yes external External power supp
63. Ambient Temperature RTC Accuracy 0 C 32 F 13 121 seconds month 25 C 77 F 54 5 seconds month 40 C 104 F 29 78 seconds month 55 C 131 F 43 150 seconds month Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 312 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Download a User Program via DNP3 Network Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 1 These numbers are maximum worst case values over a 31 day month Using File Control Status of Requested Operation objects a user program can be downloaded uploaded initialized via DNP3 communication Also Serial Channel 0 Status File Ethernet Channel 1 Status File and Serial Channel 2 Status File can be uploaded from the MicroLogix 1400 All File Control Status of Requested Operation objects and supported File Control Status of Requested Operation objects are listed in this section Unsolicited Response for File Control Status of Requested Operation objects is not supported All t g70v1 Fi g70v2 Fi g70v3 Fi g70v4 Fi g70v5 Fi g70v6 Fi g70v7 Fi g70v8 Fi he responses are sent to DNP3 Master with Function Code 129 81h e Contro e Contro e Contro e Contro e Contro e Contro e Contto e Contto File identifier superseded not supported Authentication supported File command supported File command status supported File transport supported File transport status supported File desctiptor supported
64. Applicable 1 8 Slotted Screwdriver Not Applicable Not Applicable DH 485 Communication Cable The suggested DH 485 communication cable is either Belden 3106A or 9842 The cable is jacketed and shielded with one or two twisted wire pairs and a drain wire One pair provides a balanced signal line and one additional wire is used for a common reference line between all nodes on the network The shield reduces the effect of electrostatic noise from the industrial environment on network communication The communication cable consists of a number of cable segments daisy chained together The total length of the cable segments cannot exceed 1219 m 4000 ft However two segments can be used to extend the DH 485 network to 2438 m 8000 ft For additional information on connections using the AIC refer to the Advanced Interface Converter AIC User Manual publication 1761 6 4 When cutting cable segments make them long enough to route them from one AIC to the next with sufficient slack to prevent strain on the connector Allow enough extra cable to prevent chafing and kinking in the cable Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 72 Communication Connections Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Use these instructions for wiring the Belden 3106A or 9842 cable See Cable Selection Guide on page 76 if you are using standard Allen Bradley cables Connecting the Communication Cable to the DH 485 Connector TIP daisy chai
65. Bit Binary Input Config File Number Bit Offset 15 14 13 12 111 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Element 0 r r r r C1 CO Element 1 r r r r r r r r r C1 CO Element 2 r r r r r r r r r r r r r C1 CO Element 3 r r r r C1 CO Element 4 r r r r r r r C1 CO Element 5 r r r r r r r r r C1 CO reserved C1 C0 Class level 0 to 3 For Binary Input Element 0 for data index 0 to 15 For Double Bit Binary Input Element _0 for data index 0 to 7 For Binary Input and Binary Output type data you can configure Online information of the object flag in the Configuration file If this bit is set the Online bit bit 0 in the object flag for each point is set when you read Status type objects You can set this information using ladder logic Related Configuration File Binary Input Online Config File Number In Series B Binary Output Online Config File Number Bit Offset 15 14 13 12 11 10 19 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Element 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Element 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Element 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Element 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Element 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Element 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 offline 1 online For Binary Outp
66. CLEAR NR Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 11 OxOB FC FREEZE AT TIME No Request 12 0x0C FC FREEZE AT TIME NR No Request 13 0x0D FC COLD RESTART Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses MicroLogix 1400 should not be in the executing mode and any program and files should not be in open state Request 14 0xOE FC WARM RESTART No Request 15 0xOF FC INITIALIZE DATA No Obsolete Request 16 0x10 FC INITIALIZE APPL Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Clears fault and changes the controller mode to Remote Program See Starting and Stopping User Programs Mode Change via DNP3 Network on page 318 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 336 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Function Codes for MicroLogix 1400 Series A Controllers Message Function MicroLogix Type Code Name 1400 Support Description Request 17 0x11 FC_START_APPL Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Clears fault and changes the controller mode to Remote Run See Starting and Stopping User Programs Mode Change via DNP3 Network on page 318 Request 18 0x12 FC_STOP_APPL Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Changes the controller mode to Remote Program See Starting and Stopping User Mode Change DNP3 Network on page Request 19 0x13 FC_SAVE_CONFIG No Deprecated Request 20 0x14 FC_ENABLE_UNSOLICITED Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 21 0x15 FC D
67. Class Division 2 e o not replace components or disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off Do not connect or disconnect components unless power has been switched off e This product must be installed in an enclosure All cables connected to the product must remain in the enclosure or be protected by conduit or other means e All wiring must comply with N E C article 501 4 b Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 10 Install Your Controller Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Use only the following communication cables in Class I Division 2 hazardous locations Environment Classification Communication Cables Class Division 2 Hazardous 1761 CBL ACOO Series or later 1761 CBL AMOO Series or later 1761 CBL APOO Series C or later 1761 CBL PMO0 2 Series C or later 1761 CBL HM02 Series C or later 2707 NC9 Series C or later 1763 NCO01 Series A or later 1747 CP3 Series Disconnecting Main Power WARNING Explosion Hazard Do not replace components connect equipment or disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off The main power disconnect switch should be located where operators and maintenance personnel have quick and easy access to it In addition to disconnecting electrical power all other sources of power pneumatic and hydraulic should be de energized before working on a machine or process controlled by a controller Safety Ci
68. DCc como INO IN4 IN2 IN3 COM 1 INA INS ING IN7 COM 2 INS INQ IN10 INI 1766 L32BXBA only DC COM _ IN12 IN13 1 14 1 15 1 16 IN17 IN18 IN19 ANA IVO 24 1766 L32BXB L32BXBA Sourcing Input Wiring Diagram DCb DCc DCa DCb DCc DC DC DC COMO INO IN1 IN2 IN3 COM 1 IN4 IN5 ING IN7 COM2 IN8 IN9 IN10 IN11 1766 L32BXBA only DC COM COM3 N12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16 IN17 IN18 IN19 ANA IVO IVi IVa V8 1766 L32AWA L32AWAA and 1766 L32BWA L32BWAA Output Wiring Diagram DCa DCa Lia 12 Lib Lab Lic L2c Lid L2d Lad Lie L2e L3e Lit Lat Lat Lat Lst Aoc Aore Aom amp lt oOQcoogeeooceecooeeecooooeee DCO OUTO DC1 OUTI DC2 OUT2 DC3 OUT3 DC4 OUT4 OUTS DCS 068 0 OUTO OUT ovo Ovi 400540 ve VAC VAC VAC VAC VAC VAC VAC ANA Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Wire Your Controller 39 1766 L32BXB L32BXBA Output Wiring Diagram 065 DC DCe DCc 064 DCd sDCe DCe DCT DCf Ao Asst 24 DCO DC1 OUT VDC2 OUT2 OUT8 OUT4 OUTS OUT6 2 DC3 064 OUTS 065 09710 OUT ovo Ovi l DOIN J VAC VAC VAC VAC ANA Controller 1 0 Wiring Minimizing Electrical Noise Because of the variety of applications and environments where controllers are installed and operating it is impossible to ensure that all environmental noise will be re
69. DNP3 protocol the channel must be configured to DNP3 protocol The default communication protocol for the Ethernet Channel 1 in the MicroLogix 1400 is Ethernet IP To communicate with DNP3 over IP protocol in the MicroLogix 1400 Series B controller the channel must be configured to use the DNP3 protocol The MicroLogix 1400 Series A controller supports DNP3 protocol via Channel 0 and or Channel 2 Serial ports The MicroLogix 1400 Series B controller also supports DNP3 over IP protocol via Channel 1 Ethernet port To program the MicroLogix 1400 controller use RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro software version 8 10 00 or later for Series A controller and version 8 30 00 or later for Series B controller Publication 1766 UM001G EN P 2012 224 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 In RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro open Channel Configuration in the MicroLogix 1400 ptoject tree RSLogix 500 Pro UNTITLED Edt Yew Search Comms Tools Window Hep DOSu tae la Driver _ 1 Proect C cg Controller Cortroter Properties Processor Status Q Fundinn fies i Au 10 Configuration Channel Status Program Files 550 B sys1 LAD 2 There ate 4 configurations related to DNP3 protocol in RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro softwate Channel 0 configuration Channel 2 configuration Channel 1 configuration DNP3 Slave Application Layer config
70. DNP3S A E3 H E Help Controler General Compiler Passwords Controller Communications J Controller Properties Processor Status Processor Type Function Files Bul 1766 MicroLogix 1400 Series JIU 10 Configuration Channel Configureti Processor Name DNP3 Program Files Program Checksum 9897 svso Progam Files 3 ens Data Files 32 h Data Files Memory Used 144 Instruction Words Used 335 Data Table Words Cross Reference Memory Left 12290 Instruction Words Left 0 oureur n euT D s2 status D 63 sinary D T4 Timer Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 316 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 ML1400A_DNP3S_CFG_A E Controller Properties Controller Properties 9 Controller General Compier Passwords Controler Communications i Controller Properties Processor Status amp Function Files e Password RI IO Configuration e be Channel Contigurati News CQ Program Files 5 80 Master Password iid New 4 I il p Remove 5 8 Data Files BB cross Reterence r Subroutine Protection Password D 09 outeur New D meut Remove s2 status D Dime Once the DNP3 Master receives a proper Authentication Key Non zero value from the MicroLogi
71. Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 249 Word Offset Default Variation for the following Objects End ana an ar P 0 Binary Input Static Object g1v1 v2 1 Binary Input Change Object g2v3 vi v2 2 Binary Output Static Object g10v2 none 3 Reserved 4 Double Bit Binary Input Static Object g3v1 v2 5 Double Bit Binary Input Change Object g4v3 vl v2 6 16 bit Counter Static Object g20v6 v2 7 32 bit Counter Static Object g20v5 vi 8 Frozen 16 bit Counter Static Object g21v10 v2 v6 9 Frozen 32 bit Counter Static Object g21v9 v1 vb 10 16 bit Counter Change Object g22v2 none 11 32 bit Counter Change Object g22v1 none 12 Frozen 16 bit Counter Change Object g23v2 v6 13 Frozen 32 bit Counter Change Object g23v1 v5 14 16 bit Analog Input Static Object g30v4 v2 15 32 bit Analog Input Static Object g30v3 v1 16 Short Floating Point Analog Input Static Object g30v5 none 17 16 bit Analog Input Change Object g32v2 v4 18 32 bit Analog Input Change Object g32v1 v3 19 Short Floating Point Analog Input Change Object g32v5 v 20 16 bit Analog Output Static Object g40v2 none 21 32 bit Analog Output Static Object g40v1 none 22 Short Floating Point Analog Output Static Object g40v3 none 23 Reserved 24 Reserved 25 Reserved 26 Small BCD Object g101v1 none 2 Reserved 28 Reserved 29 Reserved 30 Reserved 31 Reserved Publication 1766 UM001G EN P
72. Down key LIBET ETE User Display bAcvanced Set N Press the OK key the LCD keypad Select LCD Setup using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad When the LCD Setup menu screen is displayed press the OK key Comms Setup Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 142 Using the LCD 4 Select Back Light to adjust backlighting options for the LCD LED Setup Contrast Light 5 The default value for the backlight is 30 seconds You can adjust backlight time using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad LIBET ETE HEHUTE LED Setup BackL ight 1 3Hsec Publication 1766 UM001G EN P 2012 Real Time Clock Operation Chapter 6 Using Real Time Clock and Memory Modules The MicroLogix 1400 controller has a built in real time clock RTC You can order a memory module as an accessory TIP For more information on Real Time Clock Function File and Memory Module Information File refer to the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 001 type of memory module is available for use with the MicroLogix 1400 controller Memory Module 384 KB Catalog Number 1766 MM1 Operation at Power up and Entering a Run or Test Mode At power up and when the controller enters a run or test mode the
73. Each bit can be configured for Online information if the corresponding point is active or not 0 offline 1 online of the Binary Output points B31 0 0 is for Index 0 B31 0 1 is for Index 1 and B31 9 15 is for Index 159 In the example below all bits are cleared and all of the points are in offline state Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 268 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Table F1 If this bit is set the Online bit in the status flag of each Binary Output points is set when you read Binary Output Status objects File B31 bin Binary Output Config File 5 14 13 12 1110 76 5 43 21 BILE 00000 00 900 0 0 09 0 o ug 551 1 aon o nnt nonon n n0 n o D31 2 Go be Od oO oOo ob Oo oe B31 3 0 a og ggg gaguunm5bnmnmnsopiounesit 31 4 Ba ogouguggauagauunmutultusonsg 31 5 Dag gd 0 00 0 0 D 831 5 0 0 D 0 0 0 000 OD oO Dun B31 7 00008000000200000 0 31 8 0000000000000 B31 3 0 8 B8 0 nnn o BD GO D D 411 DE Binary Symbal Gelumns fis 821 Desc Properties Usage Binary Command Control relay output block CROB The MicroLogix 1400 has three control models for Binary Output Control They are Activation model Complementary latch model and Complementary two output model For the Complementary two output model two bits are required to control this model
74. Expansion IO WIE pong cold poet b etre Cow 42 Digital Wiring Diagrams 42 Analog SCHAUEN 49 Chapter 4 Supported Communication Protocols 57 Default Communication 8 58 Using the Communications Toggle Functionality 58 Changing Communication Configuration 59 Connecting to the RS 232 Port ici 5 sasaki ws 62 Making a Point to Point 62 Using rette eta her edad 63 Connecting to a DF1 Half Duplex Network 66 Connecting to a RS 485 Network cesses 68 DE 485 Configuration Parameters 69 Recommended 71 DH 485 Communication 71 Table of Contents 11 Connecting the Communication Cable to the DH 485 Connector 72 Grounding and Terminating the DH 485 Network 73 Connecting rhe AC e eheu tea od ues s ple li 74 Cable Selection 76 Recommended User Supplied 79 Safety Considerations re LEE I ee ger cb EeeS dad ide 80 Install and Attach the 80 Powering Dens ERER 81 Connecting to Device Nets 82 4 82 Connecting to Ethernet vios oer e t p NR e
75. Group2 Group 3 44524 Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 Output Terminal Block Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 34 Wire Your Controller Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 ATTENTION The 24V DC sensor supply of the 1766 L32BWA and 1766 L32BWAA controllers should not be used to power output circuits It should only be used to power input devices for example sensors and switches See Master Control Relay on page 13 for information on MCR wiring in output circuits 1766 L32AWA L32AWAA Input Terminal Block I 1 T IN10 COM3 INI3 IN15 IN17 IN19 ate IN1 IN3 IN4 1 6 COM 2 1 9 IN11 IN12 IN14 IN16 IN18 COM 1 1V3 ANA L 1 1 L L VAC VAC COM L2 N OUTO OUTI OUT2 OuT3 OUT4 DC5 OUT7 OUT8 OUT10 ANA ovi DCO DC1 062 063 064 OUTS OUT6 DC6 OUT OUTI1 ovo VAC VAC VAC VAC VAC VAC L IL IL IL L L 0 Group Group2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 44525 Output Terminal Block Input Terminal Block IN10 COM 3 IN13 IN15 IN17 IN19 1 0 IV2 4 eS S666 66666 amp amp Group 0 Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 Output Terminal Block COM 0 IN3 4 ING COM 2 INS 1 11 IN12 114 IN16 IN18 COM 1 1 1V3 ANA L L 1 voc VDC COM 24 NEUT OUTO OUT OUT 0074 OUTS 2 OUT8 OUT9 OUTO ANA ovt A DCO DC1 VDC2 OUT3 OUTS 0077 063 064 06
76. Hold down the Up key until the target bit becomes 255 15 as shown below The maximum range of bits you can monitor with the LCD is 256 words of specified target bit file B B3 255 15 Protected 11 If you have finished monitoring the bit file B3 press the ESC key to return to the Bit Integer File Select screen as shown in step 2 Monitoring Integer Files The LCD allows you to view and change the data value of an integer file You can access to this functionality via the Monitoring screen of the LCD To monitor an integer file on the LCD you have to specify its file number in the Target User Defined File Number TUF element of the LCD Function File and download your application program to the controller The TUF element can only be changed by a program download The value stored in the TUF element identifies the integer file with which the LCD will interface Valid integer files N7 and N10 through 255 When the LCD reads a valid integer file number it can access up to 256 bits 0 255 on the LCD screen Using the LCD 101 The protection bit LCD edit disable in the data file properties of the target integer file are used to define the read only or read write privileges for its file Valid file type include Bit Integer Double integer or Float as specified in the TUF element IMPORTANT Use your programming software to ensure that the integer file you specify in the TUF
77. Integer Files on page 100 Mode Switch Allows you to change the mode switch selection Using the Mode Switch on page 111 User Display Displays the user defined LCD screen Using a User Defined LCD Screen on page 115 Advanced Set Allows you to configure or view the following e Change the key in mode for value entry for a trim pot e Use the communications toggle functionality e View and change the Ethernet network configuration e Change the data value of trim pots e View system information such as OS series and firmware version e User communication EEPROM functionality e Change LCD contrast and backlight option e Changing Key In Mode on page 118 e Using Communications Toggle Functionality on page 120 e Viewing Ethernet Status on page 120 e Using Trim Pots on page 131 e 0 Status on page 93 e Saving Loading Communication EEPROM on page 137 e LCD setup on page 139 LCD Default Screen 1 0 Status Screen NS 0100000 RU I BBOOOOOOO00000 00000 6123456769012 456789 This is the default screen of the display allowing you to monitor controller and I O Status For more information on the I O Status screen see I O Status on page 93 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 UsingtheLCD 91 Operating Buttons NT Button Function Cursor Move cursor Buttons Select menu item Choose file numbers values etc OK Next menu leve
78. MicroLogix 1400 Series controller do not support the opening of IMG files Be sure to store your ladder program in the RSLogix Files RSS format before generating RSLogix IMG Files IMG Otherwise you may lose the latest modifications to your ladder program Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 315 IMPORTANT RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro v8 30 00 and the MicroLogix 1400 Series B controller support the opening of IMG files However some information is not stored into the IMG file for example rung comments Be sure to store your ladder program in the RSLogix Files RSS format before generating RSLogix IMG Files IMG Rules for File Authentication The File Authentication process is optional and unnecessary when the master passwotd of the downloaded ladder program is not configured When the passwotd in the ladder program is configured by RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro the DNP3 master sends a request with the function code AUTHENTICATE FILE 29 to authenticate permission before file operation The object g70v2 is used for File Authentication with two parameters Username from the Processor Name in the Controller Properties dialog in RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro Password from the Master Password in the Controller Properties dialog in RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro In the example below Username is DNP3 A and Password is 12345 9 ML1400A
79. No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations WARNING Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequence SHOCK HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present BURN HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures gt gt gt IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product Allen Bradley Rockwell Automation MicroLogix RSLinx RSLogix 500 and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respe
80. OK key The Gateway address is displayed 000006 ENET stati Gateway address 192 166 188 01 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P 2012 126 Using the LCD Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 10 After configuring the Gateway address press the OK key The Primary DNS is displayed 000000 ENET stati Pri DNS 1 1080 168 11 After configuring the Primary DNS press the OK key The Secondary DNS is displayed 000000 ENET Mode stati Sec ONS 198 100 166 BH TIP To exit the Network configuration Menu press the ESC key on the LCD keypad at any time Configuring the Ethernet Port The Port Settings screen of the LCD displays the Ethernet port settings assigned to the controller Follow these steps to edit the Ethernet port settings for your controller 1 On the Main Menu screen select Advanced Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad If the menu items shown in the figure below are not displayed on the Main Menu screen you need to scroll down the screen by pressing the Down key O00000 User Display b dvanced Set N A Using the LCD 127 Press the OK key on the LCD keypad The Advanced Settings Menu screen 1s displayed KeyIn DCDHM Cfg ENET Cfg If ENET Cfg is selected press the OK key If not select ENET Cfg
81. POWER LED and the FORCE LED stay solid ON The concurrent ControlFLASH and LCD displays during the Firmware download are shown here Stage 1 Catalog Number 1766LEC Serial Number Current Revision A 2 0 New Revision A 20 Starting update Please Wait m The LCD displays this screen 1 66 LEC BOOT FAN H1 BB ready Stage 2 Progress Catalog Number 1766LEC Serial Number Current Revision A 2 0 New Revision A 20 Transmitting Chunk 1934 of 3072 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 202 Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System The LCD displays this screen 1 66 LEC BOOT FAN 01 BH ready The Run Fault and Force LEDs display a walking Pattern Stage 3 The LCD displays this screen Progress Catalog Number 1766LEC Serial Number Curent Revision A 2 0 New Revision A 2 0 Waiting while module burns flash 1 66 LEC BOOT FAN 61 88 flashing At this stage the Power and Force LEDs are solid ON After flashing of the controller the LCD shows this screen 1 66 LEC BOOT FAN 91 BB reset Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System 203 15 After the flashing is complete the following dialog box prompts you to wait for the controller to reset verify that the POWER LED is solid GREEN and verify the FAULT LED is turned OFF ControlFLASH EN 1 wait until th
82. RSLogix Micro In this example the Application Identifier is DNP3 TASK UNTITLED n x EE 2 DNP3_TASK Project ame 8 20 Help Controller General i Controller Properties Processor Status PAS Function Files IM 10 Configuration Pi Channel Configuration 5 88 Program Files B syso B sys Type Ladder amp LAD 2 DNP3_TASK Data Files BB cross Reference 00 OUTPUT i File Number 2 Description D n input D s2 status 0 Attributes Debug D 14 Timer Allow Online Edits View Disable lt 5 COUNTER D e cn tet ew _ If the qualifier code is 06h the MicroLogix 1400 controller does not check the string of the Application Identifier Initialize User Program If MicroLogix 1400 receives the function code FC_INITIALIZE_APPL 16 with the object Application Identifier g90v1 it changes mode to Remote Program If the controller is in a fault mode the MicroLogix 1400 clears the fault before changing the mode to Remote Program Start User Program If MicroLogix 1400 receives the function code FC START APPL 17 with the object Application Identifier g90v1 it changes its mode to Remote Run If the controller is in a fault mode it sends the command with the function code FC INITIALIZE APPL 16 before the command with the function code FC START APPL 17 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 32
83. STOP APPL 18 See Starting and Stopping User Programs Mode Change via DNP3 Network on page 318 for more details Executing modes include Run Remote Run Test Continuous Scan and Test Single Scan modes Any others are Non Executing modes Rules for Uploading a User Program DNP3 master should send the function code OPEN FILE 25 READ 1 and CLOSE_FILE 26 for uploading user programs When a master sends the function code OPEN_FILE 25 with the file command object the file name string in File command object must be in this directory and file name format EXE processorName IMG The directory and file name extension string must all be in capital letters and the string size cannot be exceed 64 bytes The file name processorName is from the Processor Name in the Controller Properties dialog in RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro The maximum file size is 384 Kbytes The MicroLogix 1400 supports uploading of user programs up to 256Kbyte in size when Recipe is not configured When Recipe is configured Maximum file size is 384 Kbytes The first application segment of the ladder program should be larger than or equal to the size of System Exe File structure 64 bytes An application segment of the ladder program cannot be exceed 2048 bytes Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 318 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Rules for Initializing a User Program DNP3 mast
84. Spacing on page 20 Refer to the mounting template inside the back cover of this document Close the DIN latch if it is open Hook the top slot over the DIN rail While pressing the controller down against the top of the rail snap the bottom of the controller into position Leave the protective debris shield attached until you are finished wiring the controller and any other devices remove your controller from the DIN rail 1 Place a flat blade screwdriver in the DIN rail latch at the bottom of the controller Holding the controller pry downward on the latch until the latch locks in the open position Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the second DIN rail latch Install Your Controller 23 4 Unhook the top of the DIN rail slot from the rail closed 519 o J o n Panel Mounting Mount to panel using 8 or M4 screws To install your controller using mounting Screws 1 Remove the mounting template from inside the back cover of the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Installation Instructions publication 1766 IN001 2 Secure the template to the mounting surface Make sure your controller is spaced properly See Controller and Expansion I O Spacing on page 20 3 Drill holes through the template 4 Remove the mounting template
85. V 1 5 0 A for UL 508 3 0A for UL 1604 Class 1 Division 2 Hazardous Locations Groups A B C D 2 3 0 A above 40 C 104 F 3 For DC voltage applications the make break ampere rating for relay contacts can be determined by dividing 28 VA by the applied DC voltage For example 28 VA 48V DC 0 58A For DC voltage applications less than 14V the make break ratings for relay contacts cannot exceed 2A Working Voltage Working Voltage for 1766 L32AWA A Description Power Supply Input to Backplane Isolation Recommend Verified by on ation e of the following dielectric tests 1836V AC for 1 second or 2596V DC for 1 second 265V AC Wor ing Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Input Group to Backplane Isolation Input Group to Input Group Isolation Output Group to Backplane Isolation Output Group to Output Group Isolation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1517V AC for 1 second or 2145V DC for 1 second 132V AC Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1517V AC for 1 second or 2145V DC for 1 second 132V AC Working Voltage basic insulation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1836V AC for 1 second or 2596V DC for 1 second 265V AC Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1836V AC for 1 second or 2596V DC
86. a MSG instruction executes and no previous connection exists When a MSG instruction executes the MicroLogix 1400 checks to see whether a connection has been established with the destination node If a connection has not been established the MicroLogix 1400 attempts to establish a connection of the peer type In order to receive messages from another device on Ethernet an incoming connection must be established This incoming connection is made by the sending processor and uses one incoming connection in the receiving processor The MicroLogix 1400 supports a maximum of 32 EtherNet IP connections and 32 Modbus TCP connections allowing a maximum of 32 outgoing and a maximum of 32 Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface 357 Duplicate IP address Detection incoming simultaneous connections with up to 64 other devices or applications The connections are dedicated as follows Number of Connections Dedicated to 16 Incoming EtherNet IP Connections 16 Series B only Incoming Modbus TCP Connections 16 Outgoing EtherNet IP Connections 16 Series B only OutgoingModbus TCP Connections Connections established by an INTERCHANGE client RSLinx client and peers are all included when counting the number of connections IMPORTANT For outgoing connections no more that one connection per destination node is established If multiple MSG instructions use the same destination node they share the s
87. back the white with blue stripe wire immediately after the insulation jacket is removed This wire is not used by DH 485 Grounding and Terminating the DH 485 Network Only one connector at the end of the link must have Terminals 1 and 2 jumpered together This provides an earth ground connection for the shield of the communication cable Both ends of the network must have Terminals 5 and 6 jumpered together as shown below This connects the termination impedance of 120 ohm that is built into each AIC or the 1763 NCO1 cable as required by the DH 485 specification Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 74 Communication Connections End of Line Termination Jumper Belden 3106A or 9842 Cable 1219 m 4000ft Maximum Jumper MicroLogix 1400 Channel 0 to DH 485 Communication Cable Pinout When connecting MicroLogix 1400 Channel 0 to DH 485 communication cable pinout using an RS 232 cable the maximum that the cable length may be extended is 15 24 m 50 ft Refer to the following typical pinout DTE Device DCE Device DH 485 MicroLogix connector 1400 Channel 0 8 Pin 6 pin 7 TXD 6 Termination 4 RXD 5 A 2 GND 4 B 1 B 3 Common 8 2 Shield 5 DCD 1 ChassisGround 6 CTS 3 RTS Connecting the AIC You can connect a MicroLogix 1400 controller to a DH 485 network via Channel 0 directly without using an optical isolator such
88. connection or using a modem Descriptions of these methods follow ATTENTION All devices connected to the RS 232 485 A communication port must be referenced to controller ground or be floating not referenced to a potential other than ground Failure to follow this procedure may result in property damage or personal injury e For 1766 L32BWA controllers the COM of the sensor supply is also connected to chassis ground internally The 24V DC sensor power source should not be used to power output circuits It should only be used to power input devices e For 1766 L32BXB controllers the VDC NEUT or common terminal of the power supply is also connected to chassis ground internally Available Communication Cables Communication Cables Length 1761 CBL AMO0 Series C or later cables are required for Class Div 2 applications 45 cm 17 7 in 1761 CBL APOO Series C or later cables are required for Class Div 2 applications 45 cm 17 7 in 1761 CBL PMO02 Series C or later cables are required for Class Div 2 applications 2 m 6 5 ft 1761 CBL HMQO 2 Series C or later cables are required for Class Div 2 applications 2 m 6 5 ft 2707 NC9 Series or later cables are required for Class Div 2 applications 15 m 49 2 ft 1763 NC01 Series A or later 30 cm 11 8 in 1747 CP3 Series A or later 3 m 9 8 ft ATTENTION UNSUPPORTED CONNECTION A Do not connect a MicroLogix 1400 controller to another MicroLogix fami
89. control Failure to properly edit a running program could result in unexpected controller operation Physical injury or equipment damage may result ATTENTION If you use Ell or STI interrupts and your application A requires a quick interrupt latency the online edit feature is not recommended Online editing feature may increase the interrupt latency response time To ensure minimum interrupt latency place the mode switch in LCD screen in the RUN mode This prevents the use of the online editing feature The type of online editing is dependent on the MicroLogix 1400 processor s mode switch position in LCD display and the processor s mode There are two types of online editing Program Online Editing when the processor is in either PROG mode or REM Program mode Runtime Online Editing when the processor is in either REM Test or REM Run mode The following table summarizes the MicroLogix 1400 processor mode switch positions in LCD and modes that enable online editing mode switch Position ds Editing Mode RUN A RN Not Available PROGam Prgam Program Online Editing REMoeteProgram Program Online Editing _ J Runtime Online Editing REMoe REMoteRm Runtime Online Editing IMPORTANT Online editing is not available when the mode switch in LCD screen is in the RUN position ATTENTION Use the online editing function while in the RUN A mode to make minor
90. damage by e sending an erroneous signal to your systems field devices causing the controller to fault e causing an explosion in a hazardous environment Electrical arcing causes excessive wear to contacts on both the module and its mating connector Worn contacts may create electrical resistance reducing product reliability WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD In Class Division 2 applications the bus connector must be fully seated and the bus connector cover must be snapped in place In Class Division 2 applications all modules must be mounted in direct contact with each other as shown on page 26 If DIN rail mounting is used an end stop must be installed ahead of the controller and after the last 1762 1 0 module Chapter 3 Wire Your Controller This chapter describes how to wire your controller and expansion I O Topics include wire requirements using surge suppressors grounding the controller wiring diagrams sinking and sourcing wiring diagrams controller I O wiring wiring your analog channels expansion I O wiring Wiring Requirements Wiring Recommendation ATTENTION Before you install and wire any device disconnect power to the controller system ATTENTION Calculate the maximum possible current in each A power and common wire Observe all electrical codes dictating the maximum current allowable for each wire size Current above the maximum ratings may cause wiring to overheat which can cause d
91. elements for Frozen Counter Object is the same as the number of Counter Objects For example if 10 Counter elements were configured 10 Frozen Counter elements will be generated in the MicroLogix 1400 controllers internally You cannot access the Frozen Counter database directly There is one buffer for Frozen Counter Object Read the Frozen Counter Object before you send another request with Freeze function codes If two consecutive Freeze function codes are received without Read operation into them for Frozen Counter Object the values of Frozen Counter Objects are overwritten by the second Freeze operation Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 275 If both 16 bit Counter Object File Number and 32 bit Counter Object File Number were configured in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file the 16 bit Frozen Counter Object starting index number is 0 and the 32 bit Frozen Counter Object starting index number of starts after the last index number for 16 bit Frozen Counter Object For example if 10 elements of 16 bit Counter Object were configured and 10 elements of 32 bit Counter Object were configured the index numbers will be 16 bit Frozen Counter Object From 0 to 9 32 bit Frozen Counter Object From 10 to 19 When only one of the Counter Object File was configured Index number starts from 0 for the configured object As an example a Frozen Counter Config File is shown below These files have 10 elements
92. enable it in the channel configuration page Channel Configuration fs General Channel O Channel 1 Channel 2 Diiver ot Network Link ID 0 Hardware Address 2 IP Address 10 116 38 202 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 G ateway Address 0 0 0 0 Defaut Domain Name User Provided Web Pages Stating Data Fie Number 0 Primary Name Server 0 0 0 A p Number of Pages 1 Secondary Name Server n 0 n 0 ash me Protocol Control BOOTP Enable DHCP Enable Msg Connection Timeout x 15 15000 V SNMP Sever Enable 7 SMTP ClentEnable Msg Reply Timeout 105 250 v HTTP Server Enable Inactiviy Timeout Min 30 Auto Negotiate Setting 10 Mbps Half Duplex Forced Cortact Location E E IMPORTANT The user program is cleared as part of the operating system upgrade process You must restore your program after successfully loading the operating system upgrade The Ethernet communication configuration parameters are retained and the SNMP is enabled by default after a successful firmware upgrade IMPORTANT A power cycle is needed in order for the changes in the Channel Configuration page to be applied Using ControlFLASH for Firmware Upgrade Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System 195 2 Ensure that you complete the IP configuration for the OS firmware upgrade Note the assigned IP address of the controller If the IP addres
93. file has 10 elements B39 0 0 and B39 0 1 can be configured for Class Level 0 1 2 or 3 for DNP3 Index 0 to 7 of the Double Bit Binary Input Object File B39 1 0 and B39 1 1 can be configured for Class Level for DNP3 Index 8 to 15 of the Double Bit Binary Input Object File Default Class Level is 0 Any other bits are reserved So in the example below Class Level of Index 0 to 7 is 1 B39 0 0 and B39 0 1 Class Level of Index 8 to 15 is 2 B39 1 0 and B39 1 1 Class Level of Index 16 to 23 is 3 B39 2 0 and B39 2 1 and Class Level of other Indexes are 0 254 bata File B39 bin Double Bit Input Config File 5 1 3 2 11 D a dal 7 5 es eee 1 0 239 0 of oo oo oot oo ob oe 1 839 Q0 39 2 D 0 n m n u ud n m 0 070 0 Dn B39 3 corun rt o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 B39 4 0002000000000000 0 39 5 0000000000600 000 0 0 39 6 0 0000000000000 B39 7 Uguugouuguuududglogntulctu uu 839 8 U D D Uu U 0 U U D B U tto D B39 9 O00 O00 0 0008 O Oo 8 8 0 DO alt piel Pedi Brar Swbo id Cairns 18 I o 03 z Brepertics Usage Help DNP3 Counter Object The supported object group and variations are listed in this section The MicroLogix 1400 responds with the default group and variation when the DNP3 Master requests to tead an object with Any variation Counter Static Objects g20v0 Counter Any Variation g20v1 Counter 32 bit with flag g
94. for each B34 0 0 and B34 0 1 can be configured for Class Level 0 1 2 or 3 for DNP3 Index 0 of the 16 bits Frozen Counter Object File B34 1 0 and B34 1 1 can be configured for Class Level for DNP3 Index 1 of the Counter Object File Default Class Level is 0 Any other bits are reserved So in the example below for 16 bit Frozen Counter Config File Class Level of Index 0 is 1 B34 0 0 and B34 0 1 Class Level of Index 1 is 2 B34 1 0 and B34 1 1 Class Level of Index 2 is 3 B34 2 0 and B34 2 1 and Class Level of other Indexes are 0 zs Data File BH bin 1555 Frozen Counter Config File DoD eo D 2 Doo 5 NU oM O ORE oonoo0o0 D ogg Do O O D UD O O D D D O O C odo oo M D H m I I in GOD gt 2 2 D OD D ODODO D OD OO E P adi Binary Symbok 2 Curs 16 Desc fpu Brcpertes Usage Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 276 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 For 32 bit Frozen Counter Config File Class Level of Index 10 is 1 B35 0 0 and B35 0 1 Class Level of Index 11 is 2 B35 1 0 and B35 1 1 Class Level of Index 12 is 3 B35 2 0 and B35 2 1 and Class Level of other Inde
95. g 0 53 Ibs approx with carton Bus current draw 40 mA at 5V DC 40 mA at 5V DC 40 mA at 5V DC 40 mA at 5V DC 40 mA at 5V DC max 105 mA at 24V DC 50 mA at 24V DC 165 mA at 24V DC 50 mA at 24V DC 50 mA at 24V DC Analog normal Voltage 0 10V DC Voltage Voltage 0 10VDC NA NA operating range Current 4 20mA 10 10V DC Current 4 20 mA Current 4 20 mA Full scale analog Voltage Voltage Voltage NA NA ranges 0 10 5V DC 10 5 410 5VDC 0 10 5V DC Current 0 21 mA Current Current 0 21 mA 21 21 mA Resolution 12 bits unipolar 15 bits bipolar 12 bits unipolar Input filter and 15 bits plus sign configuration dependent Repeatability 0 12 4 0 12 4 0 12 4 0 1 eC 0 18 F for See Table 173 Ni and NiFe 0 2 C 0 36 F 0 2 C 0 36 F for other RTD inputs 0 04 ohm for 150 ohm resistances 0 2 ohm for other resistances group to system N E C Class 2 required rated working working voltage working voltage isolation IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation voltage type test 500V AC or qualification test type test 500V AC or 707V DC for 1 minute IEC Class 2 707V DC for 1 720V DC for 1 reinforced minute minute insulation type test 500V AC or 707V DC for 1 minute Vendor D code 1 1 1 1 1 Product type code 10 10 10 10 10 Product code 75 67 66 65 64 1 full scale range 2 3 4 Only applicable to Series 1 0 modeles
96. in the Binary output object The point index is different than in the Activation or Complementary latch model The point index varies as shown in the table below The maximum number of Binary Output index for Complementary two output model is 2048 Binary Output Activation model or Complementary two output Database Index Complementary latch model model 0 BO Index 0 BO Close Index 0 1 BO Index 1 BO Trip Index 0 2 BO Index 2 BO Close Index 1 3 BO Index 3 BO Trip Index 1 4 BO Index 4 BO Close Index 2 5 BO Index 5 BO Trip Index 2 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Table F 1 Binary Output Database Index Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 269 Activation model or Complementary latch model Complementary two output model 4094 BO Index 4094 BO Close Index 2047 4095 BO Index 4095 BO Trip Index 2047 These control codes and point models are implemented in the MicroLogix 1400 controller 0x00 NUL NUL Clear field Off 0x20 NUL NUL Clear field On 0x01 Pulse On NUL Clear field Off Activation Model 0x21 Pulse On NUD Clear field On Activation Model 0x03 Latch On NUL Clear field Off Complementary latch model 0x23 Latch On NUL Clear field On Complementary latch model 0x04 Latch Off NUL Clear field Off Complementary latch model 0x24 Latch Off NUL Clear field On Complementary latch model 0x41 Pulse On Close
97. limited qty 130 unsol resp 22 5 Counter Event 32 bit with 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index flag and time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 22 6 Counter Event 16 bit with 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index flag and time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 23 0 Frozen Counter Event Any 1 read 06 no range or all Variation 07 08 limited qty 23 1 Frozen Counter Event 32 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index with flag 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 23 2 Frozen Counter Event 16 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index with flag 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp Publication 1766 UM001G EN P 2012 Implementation Table for Series controllers DNP Object Group amp Variation Request Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 DNP3 Master may issue MicroLogix 1400 must parse Response DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue 347 Group Description Function Codes Qualifier Codes Function Qualifier Codes Num Num hex Codes dec hex 23 5 Frozen Counter Event 32 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index with flag and time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 23 6 Frozen Counter Event 16 bit
98. object flag are set according to the upper byte of the configuration Bit Offset Name Description 0 ONLINE In Series A controllers 0 when the controller is or was in Non Execting mode 1 when the controller is or was in Executing mode In Series B controllers 0 when the controller is or was in Non Execting mode 1 when the controller is or was in Executing mode and the configuration file does not exist May be 1 when the controller is or was in Executing mode and the configuration file exists 1 RESTART Always 0 Not used 2 COMM_LOST Always 0 Not used 3 REMOTE_FORCED Always 0 Not used 4 LOCAL_FORCED Always 0 Not used 5 CHATTER_FILTER Always 0 Not used 6 reserved Always 0 Not used 7 STATE Reflects point state of Binary Input point Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 296 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Object Flags for Double Binary Input Bit Offset Name Description 0 ONLINE In Series A controllers 0 when the controller is or was in Non Execting mode 1 when the controller is or was in Executing mode In Series B controllers 0 when the controller is or was in Non Execting mode 1 when the controller is or was in Executing mode and the configuration file does not exist May be 1 when the controller is or was in Executing mode and the configuration file exists 1 RESTART Always 0 Not used 2 COMM_LOST Always 0 Not used 3 REMOTE_FORCED Always 0 No
99. power continues to be provided to the controller s power supply so that diagnostic indicators on the processor can still be observed The master control relay is not a substitute for a disconnect to the controller It is intended for any situation where the operator must quickly de energize I O devices only When inspecting or installing terminal connections replacing output fuses or working on equipment within the enclosure use the disconnect to shut off power to the rest of the system TIP Do not control the master control relay with the controller Provide the operator with the safety of a direct connection between an emergency stop switch and the master control relay Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 14 Install Your Controller Using Emergency Stop Switches When using emergency stop switches adhere to the following points Do not program emergency stop switches in the controller program Any emergency stop switch should turn off all machine power by turning off the master control relay Observe all applicable local codes concerning the placement and labeling of emergency stop switches Install emergency stop switches and the master control relay in your system Make certain that relay contacts have a sufficient rating for your application Emergency stop switches must be easy to reach In the following illustration input and output circuits are shown with MCR protection However in most applications
100. previous final segment received 4 DISCARD_OUT_OF_ORDER_SEG The received packet was discarded since the sequence number was out of order 69 CS0 69 CS2 69 Transport Layer Error Count 70 CS0 70 52 70 End Of List Category ID 0 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 324 X Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 The elements can be seen in the Function Files for each Channel Function Files Ei C C C C CO PwMx sr 160 BHI cso 51 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 325 For the elements of the DNP3 Slave Link Layer diagnostic counter CS0 9 to CS0 17 and 52 9 to CS2 17 the counter values are available with the structured display in RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro as below 3 Channel Status 1 Channel 1 Channel 2 DNP3 Slave MessagesSent o Messages Received This Node 0 Messages Observed n Messages Received o Undelivered Messages o Link Layer ErorCount 0 MessagesRetied n LinkLayerEmorCode 0 Modem Lines RTS CTS DCD Channel Status Channel 0 Channel 1 DNP3 Slave Messages 0 Messages Received ThisNode y Messages Observed Messages Received Undelivered Messages L
101. select it and then press the OK key Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 A nN N Using the LCD 103 The current data value ON of the N7 0 word is displayed Note that the target word 0 which is right next to N7 is flashing which means the cursor is at the target word position We will change the data value of the N7 0 word to the negative decimal value 1300 First press OK to move the cursor to the data value position Then the last digit of 00000 will be flashing which means the cursor is at the data value position Press the Left key twice Then the cursor will position at the third digit Press the Up key three times to change the third digit to 3 Press the Left key once Then press the Up key once The second digit will change to 1 Note that 1 is still flashing which means the cursor is still at the data value position Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 104 Using the LCD Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 8 Press the Left key once Then press the Down key once The sign digit will change to as shown below Note that is still flashing which means the cursor is still at the data value position B I I Ni 01 38H UnProtected 9 Press OK to apply the changes Then the new value 1300 is applied Note that the target word 0 which is right next to NT is flashing
102. tested to meet Council Directive 2006 95 ECLow Voltage by applying the safety requirements of EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Part 2 Equipment Requirements and Tests For specific information required by EN 61131 2 see the approptiate sections in this publication as well as the following Allen Bradley publications Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Noise Immunity publication 1770 4 1 Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries publication AG 5 4 Automation Systems Catalog publication B115 Most applications require installation in an industrial enclosure Pollution Degree 2 to reduce the effects of electrical interference Over Voltage Category IIO and environmental exposure Locate your controller as far as possible from power lines load lines and other sources of electrical noise such as hard contact switches relays and AC motor drives For more information on proper grounding guidelines see the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 ATTENTION Electrostatic discharge can damage semiconductor devices inside the controller Do not touch the connector pins or other sensitive areas ATTENTION Vertical mounting of the controller is not supported due to heat build up considerations 1 Pollution Degree 2 is an environment where normally only non conductive pollution occurs except that occasionally temporary conductivity caused by condensat
103. the controller of the controller HW SER A REV HW SER A REV 01 03 Supported ranges HW SER x REV where x is A F and is 00 31 For example HW SER A REV 01 HW SER B REV 03 or HW SER C REV 31 244 Reserved for future assignment 245 Read VSTR length of length ofthe User assigned location Non NULL terminated Write the string string value name value max max 255 255 bytes bytes 246 Read VSTR length of length ofthe User assigned ID Non NULL terminated Write the string string value code number value max 255 255 bytes bytes 247 Read VSTR length of length ofthe User assigned device Non NULL terminated Write the string string value name value max max 255 255 bytes bytes 248 Read Only VSTR 12 12 Device serial number This variation returns Ethernet MAC ID 0000BCxxxxxx 249 Read Only VSTR 6 6 DNP subset and This variation This variation conformance returns Subset returns Subset level and Test level and Test procedure version procedure version 2 2008 2 2009 250 Read Only VSTR length of length ofthe Device manufacturer s This variation This variation the string string value product name and model returns Catalog returns Catalog value Number and OS Number and OS Series of the Series of the controller controller 1766 L32BWA 1766 L32BWA SER A SER B Supported ranges 1766 L32xxxa SER y where xxxa is BWA AWA BXB
104. the destination address 65532 FFFCh are accepted and processed Master This value is used to validate the Master node address when the Enable Master Address Validation is Enabled Checked send Unsolicited Response when Unsolicited Response functionality is enabled An Unsolicited Response is sent out to the DNP3 Master having this address The valid range is 0 to 65519 Default value is 0 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 232 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Master Node1 Master Node2 Master Node3 Master Node4 The valid range is 0 to 65519 Default value is 0 This value is used to check validation for Master node address when Enable Master Address Validation is Enabled Checked Control For Channel 0 the selections can be No Handshaking Half Duplex Modem CTS RTS handshaking and No Handshaking 485 Network Default selection is No Handshaking For Channel 2 the selections can be No Handshaking and Half Duplex Modem CTS RTS handshaking Default selection is No Handshaking When the MicroLogix 1400 is connected to DNP3 Master using RS 232 line directly you must select No Handshaking If you want to use the Modem line in a half duplex netwotk you must select Half Duplex Modem CTS RTS handshaking If the MicroLogix 1400 is connected to an RS 485 network and 1763 NC01 cable is used you must select No Handshaking 485 Networ
105. the example below for 16 bit Analog Input Config File Class Level of Index 0 is 1 B36 0 0 and B36 0 1 Class Level of Index 1 is 2 B36 1 0 and B36 1 1 Class Level of Index 2 is 3 B36 2 0 and B36 2 1 and Class Level of other Indexes are 0 Data File B36 bin 16bits Analog Input Config File OEESEL Gy C Pale eye AR ali ast ae ta ye 2 l 0 B36 0 0000n000000001 o0 B36 1 0000000000200 01 0 B36 2 0000000000070 0 1 B36 3 000000000000 36 4 0 B36 5 000000 000 00 0 B36 6 B36 7 0 00 B36 8 00000000000 0 B36 9 0000000000000 BE Radix Binary Swbd 0 0 0 coms 16 9 Ee Properties Usage Help Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 279 For a 32 bit Analog Input Config File Class Level of Index 10 is 1 37 0 0 and B37 0 1 Class Level of Index 11 is 2 B37 1 0 and B37 1 1 Class Level of Index 12 is 3 B37 2 0 and B37 2 1 and Class Level of other Indexes are 0 Data File B37 bin 32bits Analog Input Config File rfset 15 14 13 B37 0 0 IZ 113 10 e O a e 0G QG t Do Sc oo ce t t O B m 5 GOG O OG a O O O ull oo
106. the indicator is set Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 18 Install Your Controller Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 displayed as a solid rectangle This means that either the battery wire connector is disconnected or the battery may fail within 2 weeks if it is connected IMPORTANT The MicroLogix 1400 controller ships with the battery wire connector connected Ensure that the battery wire connector is inserted into the connector port if your application needs battery power For example when using a real time clock RTC Replacing the battery when the controller is powered down will lose all user application memory Replace the battery when the controller is powered on Refer to the SLC 500 Lithium Battery Installation Instructions publication 1747 IN515 for more information on installation handling usage storage and disposal of the battery See RTC Battery Operation on page 144 for more information on the use of the battery in relation with RTC WARNING When you connect or disconnect the battery an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that the area is nonhazardous before proceeding For Safety information on the handling of lithium batteries including handling and disposal of leaking batteries see Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries publication AG 5 4 IMPORTANT When the controller s Battery Low ind
107. the power supply shuts down the system Understanding this concept is important The user program should be written to take this effect into account Other Types of Line Conditions Occasionally the power source to the system can be temporarily interrupted It is also possible that the voltage level may drop substantially below the normal line voltage range for a period of time Both of these conditions are considered to be a loss of power for the system For most applications normal convective cooling keeps the controller within the specified operating range Ensure that the specified temperature range is maintained Proper spacing of components within an enclosure is usually sufficient for heat dissipation In some applications a substantial amount of heat is produced by other equipment inside or outside the enclosure In this case place blower fans inside the enclosure to assist in air circulation and to reduce hot spots near the controller Install Your Controller 13 Master Control Relay Additional cooling provisions might be necessary when high ambient temperatures are encountered TIP Do not bring in unfiltered outside air Place the controller in an enclosure to protect it from a corrosive atmosphere Harmful contaminants or dirt could cause improper operation or damage to components In extreme cases you may need to use air conditioning to protect against heat build up within the enclosure A hard wired master contr
108. to download the program to the MicroLogix 1400 although the program is empty This problem happens only in out of box state or after clear processor memory RSLogix 500 Pro x Program could not be compiled Online Edit Error Going Offline ATTENTION PTO and PWM instructions may not be deleted during runtime online edit This is because if the PTO or PWM instructions were deleted during runtime online edit outputs could stop in an unpredictable state causing unexpected equipment operation If you attempt to insert or modify a rung with MSG PTO and PWM instruction the following error message will be generated by programming software Error Online editing of PTO PWM and MSG are not allowed on ML1400 RUN mode And the rung with MSG PTO and PWM instruction will not be accepted RSLogix 500 Pro X AN Rung Has Errors Cannot Accept In online edit during PROGRAM mode program online edit there are no restrictions For example a user can insert MSG instruction if related MG file or MG RI file is already defined in data file Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 148 Online Editing Types of Online Editing Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 ATTENTION When editing a rung that contains an MCR A instruction both the MCR start and MCR end rungs must be edited whether it be test assemble cancel at the same time We recommend that you fully understand the possible results of the edit to the system under
109. using the Up and Down keys and then press the OK key O00000 KevlIn Hode Cfg Cfg If Port Setting is selected press the OK key If not select Port Setting using the Up and Down keys and then press the OK key 000006 ENET Cfg bPort Setting Protocol setup Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 128 Using the LCD 5 The password screen is displayed Press Up Down Left and Right keys to enter Master password with maximum 10 digits In this example the current Master password is allocated as 1234 000000 ENET Setup Master Password After entering the Master password press the OK key on the LCD keypad 6 If the Master password is correct the last configuration is displayed In this example the auto negotiation function is enabled and the 10 100Mbps link configuration is shown 009000 REMOTE Auto Enable 16 166H 7 Press Up and Down key to select auto disable menu then press the OK key The fourth line on the LCD flashes Press the Up and Down keys to configure the Ethernet port to 100Mbps Full duplex forced Auto Disable Power cyclexxx Full force TIP Any change to this feature s configuration does not take effect until after the next power cycle Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Using the LCD 129 Configuring Ethernet Protoco
110. values date time and status of the RTC are written to the RTC Function File in the controller The following table indicates the accuracy of the RTC for various temperatures RTC Accuracy Ambient Temperature Accuracy 0 C 32 F 13 121 seconds month 25 C 77 F 54 5 seconds month 40 C 104 F 29 78 seconds month 55 C 131 F 43 150 seconds month 1 These numbers are maximum worst case values over a 31 day month Writing Data to the Real Time Clock When valid data is sent to the real time clock from the programming device or another controller the new values take effect immediately The real time clock does not allow you to load or store invalid date or time data Publication 1766 UM001G EN P 2012 144 Using Real Time Clock and Memory Modules RTC Battery Operation The real time clock uses the same replaceable battery that the controller uses The RTC Function File features a battery low indicator bit RTC 0 BL which shows the status of the replacement battery When the battery is low the indicator bit is set 1 This means that the battery wire connector could be disconnected if the battery is connected the battery may be ready to fail in the next two weeks In the latter case the replacement battery needs to be replaced with a new one When the battery low indicator bit is clear 0 the battery level is acceptable The Battery Low BAT LO indicator on the L
111. write automatically assigns network related parameters to the MicroLogix 1400 when it logs into a TCP IP network There must be a DHCP server on the network capable of allocating network addresses and configuring parameters to newly attached device When both BOOTP and DHCP are disabled the MicroLogix 1400 uses the locally configured network related parameters IP Address Subnet Mask Broadcast Address etc SNMP Server SNMP enable switch Check this to enable SNMP Simple Network Management 1 enabled read write Enable Protocol SMTP Client The SMTP Client service enable switch When SMTP is enabled MicroLogix 1400 is O disabled read write Enable capable of transmitting e mail messages generated by 485CIF write message with string element There must be a SMTP server on the network capable of processing e mail service This provides an extremely versatile mechanism to report alarms status and other data related functions Auto Negotiate When Auto Negotiate is disabled unchecked the Ethernet speed duplex is forced to Auto read write and Port either 10 Mbps Half duplex 10 Mbps Full duplex 100 Mbps Half duplex or 100 Negotiate Setting Mbps Full duplex as selected in the Port Setting field enabled and Port Setting When Auto Negotiate is enabled checked the Port Setting Field allows you to select the 10 100 Mbps range of speed duplex settings that the MicroLogix 1400 will negotiate Full Duplex Half Duplex Publicati
112. 0 C 140 F 4 5 30V DC 42596 at 30 C 86 F 10 30V DC 42596 at 30 C 86 F Off state voltage range 0 20 V AC 0 1 5V DC 0 5V DC Operating frequency 47 63 Hz 0 Hz 100 kHz 0 Hz 1 kHz scan time dependent On state current Mininum 9 0 mA Q 79 V AC 7 0 mA 4 5V DC 3 0 mA Q 10V DC Nominal 12 mA Q 120 V AC 9 5 mA Q 24V DC 5 0 mA Q 24V DC Maximum 16 0 132 10 0 mA 30V DC 5 5 mA Q 30V DC Off State Leakage Current 2 5 mA max 0 1 mA max 1 5 mA max Nominal Impedance 12 kQat 50 Hz 2 0 kQ 5 5 kQ 10 60 Hz Inrush Current max at 120V AC 30A Analog Inputs Description Voltage input range 1766 L32AWA A L32BWA A L32BXB A 0 10 0V DC 1 LSB Type of data 12 bit unsigned integer Input coding 0 10 0V DC 1 LSB 0 4095 Voltage input impedance gt 199 kQ Input resolution 12 bit Non linearity 0 5 of full scale Overall accurarcy 20 65 C 4 149 F 1 0 of full scale Update tim 100 20 16 67 4 ms selectable Voltage input overvoltage protection 10 5V DC Field wiring to logic isolation Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Non isolated with internal logic Analog Outputs Description Number of inputs 1766 L32AWA A L32BWA A L32BXB A 2 single ended Specifications 153 Voltage output range 0 10 V DC 1 LSB Type of data 12 bit unsigned integer Step response 2 5ms 95
113. 0 1762 14 40 50 1762 0A8 15 0 1762 0 8 15 0 1762 0816 175 0 1762 2 175 0 1762 4 40 165 1762 0V32T 175 0 1762 0W8 2 80 90 160 180 1762 0W16 140 2 18002 1762 0 6 110 110 1762 10806 110 80 Total Modules 7 maximum 4 Subtotal 260 180 1 Refer to your expansion 1 0 Installation Instructions for Current Requirements not listed in this table 2 Only applicable to Series 1 0 modules Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 System Loading and Heat Dissipation 369 Validating the System The example systems shown in the tables below are verified to be acceptable configurations The systems are valid because Calculated Current Values lt Maximum Allowable Current Values Calculated System Loading lt Maximum Allowable System Loading Validating Systems using 1766 L32AWA or 1766 L32BXB Maximum Allowable Values Current Calculated Values Current Subtotal from Table on page 368 1225 mA at 5V DC 1155 mA at 24V DC System Loading 0 mA 260 mA 260 mA at 5V DC 0 mA 180 mA 180 mA at 24V DC System Loading 33 845 W Validating Systems using 1766 L32BWA Maximum Allowable Values Current for Devices Connected to the 24 DC Sensor Supply 260 mA x 5V 180 mA x 24V 1 300 mW 4 320 mW 5 620 mW 5 62 W Calculated Values Sum of all sensor currents 250 mA at 24V DC Current for MicroLogix Accessories and Expansion 1 0 140 mA at 24V DC exa
114. 0 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Diagnostics Communication Status File Words Stop User Program If MicroLogix 1400 receives the function code FC_STOP_APPL 18 with the object Application Identifier g90v1 it changes its mode to Remote Program If the controller is in a fault mode it sends the command with the function code FC_INITIALIZE_APPL 16 before sending the command with the function code FC_STOP_APPL 18 Errors in a DNP3 Slave subsystem are logged in the Communication Status File There are 71 words for the troubleshooting This section shows the 71 words of the communication status file for each Channel 0 Channel 2 port File Element File Element Words Offset Description for Description for Description Channel 0 Channel 2 0 CS0 0 CS2 0 General Status Category Block ID 1 50 1 52 1 Length 8 bytes 4 words including format code 2 CS0 2 52 2 Format Code Always 0 3 CS0 3 CS2 3 Communications Configuration Error Code 4 CS0 4 52 4 bit 15 Reserved Always 0 bit 14 Modem Lost Bit bits 5 13 Reserved Always 0 bit 4 Communications Active Bit bit 3 Selection Status Bit bit 2 Outgoing Message Command Pending bit 1 Incoming Message Reply Pending bit 0 Incoming Command Pending 5 CS0 5 CS2 5 bits 8 15 Baud Rate that the selected link layer driver is operating at out communication channel bits 0 7 Node Address 6 CS0 6 CS2 6 Diagn
115. 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 L1 DE NST Radix Decimal Ei NU o Properties Usage Help Publication 1766 UM001G EN P 2012 102 Using the LCD The TUF element of the LCD Function File is set to 7 to specify the integer file N7 as the target integer file to monitor on the LCD as shown in the screen capture below igi xi HSC PTOX PWMX STI RTC LCD MM cso gt dus H Customized Boot Logo ASCII File 0 SCD Start with Customized Display 0 b TO Data Input Timeout of LCD Instructic 0 LCD Instruction Job Done ERR LCD Display Operation Error Bit 0 JOG Jog data u H TMIN Trimpot Low Value Trimpot High Value H POTO Trimpot 0 Data POTI Trimpot 1 Data WND Instruction Display Window HOK OK key in Customized Display SSSA ce The controller mode is set to REMOTE RUN Follow these steps to view and change the data values of the integer file N7 1 On the Main Menu screen select Monitoring by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad REHOTE 10 Status Honitor ing Hode Switch 2 Press the OK key on the LCD keypad The File Number prompt is displayed B II File Hum HH Data Press to edi 3 If Integer is selected as shown in step 2 press the OK key If not selected press the Down key to
116. 00 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Word Offset Description 20 Counter for Commands Received 21 Counter for Commands Received with Error 22 Counter for Replies Sent 23 Reserved 24 Reserved 25 Reserved 26 Error Count in sessions 27 Error Code in sessions 28 Number of Sockets in use 29 Maximum Sockets Allowed 30 Reserved 31 Reserved 32 Counter for Replies Received 33 Reserved 34 Reserved 35 Reserved 36 Reserved 37 Reserved 38 Reserved 39 Reserved Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Category UDP Datagram Link Layer Diagnostics for DNP3 UDP Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 329 Category Client Word Offset Description 40 Counter for Commands Sent 41 Reserved 42 Counter for Replies Received 43 Counter for Replies Received with Error 44 Counter for Replies Timed Out 45 Reserved 46 Error Count in sessions 47 Error Code in sessions 40 Outgoing Message Connections 49 Maximum Connections Allowed 50 Counter for Commands Received 51 Reserved 52 Counter for Replies Transmitted 53 Reserved 54 Reserved 55 Reserved 56 Reserved 57 Reserved Firmware use only 58 Reserved Firmware use only 59 Reserved Firmware use only TCP Client Link Layer Diagnostics for DNP3 TCP Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 330 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Ne
117. 00 Series A controllers you can see the following tabs Channel Confiqur ation Eg Generel Charrel0 Channel 1 Channel2 DNP3 Slave Data Link Laver Channel for Unsolciied Response fcha Application Layer Enable Unsolciled Stait Up Serd Initial Unsolicited On Start Up Eneble Unsolciled For Class Enable Unsolcited Fer Clare2 stir oe ark zoi Enable Unsolicited Fer Class3 a 2E Max Responce Size rae Time Synchicnization Interes il Corfrmetion Timeout x1 ma ino Number of Retiiee p Humber Class Events fo Held Time afte Classi Events s b Number of Class2 Events fi 0 Hold Time afte Class2 Events xl st Number Clats3 Events fi 0 Hold Time after Class3 Events x1 Select Timeout 1 s fi Obiect Data File Number DNF3 Object Corfig Fie Number 8 o Binary Inout Binery Input 0 Binary Binay Output Courter Ibis Counter 16tits 0 Courter 3261 Counter 32bits b Analog Input 16615 Analog Input 326115 Analog Inpul Short Floating Analog Output T6bils Analog Output 32615 Analog Outpul S hot Floating Double Bit Inat 5mal BCD Frozen Counter 1665 po Frozen Counter 3251 Analog Input 1655 p 32bit 0 Andog Short Floating fo Double B t Input po SmaBm D TUTTI Cancel Heb If you want
118. 00 as a slave to a DeviceNet network using the DeviceNet Interface DNI catalog number 1761 NET DNI For additional information on using the DNI refer to the DeviceNet Interface User Manual publication 1761 UM005 The following figure shows the external wiring connections of the DNI DeviceNet Node Port 1 Replacement connector gt part no 1761 RPL RTOO amp 7 9 Use this write on pam area to mark the DeviceNet node address e RS 232 Port 2 Cable Selection Guide 1761 CBL AMOO 1761 CBL HM02 44601 Cable Length Connections from to DNI 1761 CBL AMOO 45cm 17 7 in MicroLogix 1000 port 2 1761 CBL HMO2 2 m 6 5 ft MicroLogix 1100 1400 channel 0 port 2 MicroLogix 1200 port 2 MicroLogix 1500 port 2 5 Sa 761 1761 CBL PM02 Es H 44600 Series or later cables are required Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Connecting to Ethernet Communication Connections 83 Cable Length Connections from to DNI 1761 CBL APOO 45 cm 17 7 in SLC 5 03 or SLC 5 04 processors port 2 1761 CBL PM02 2 m
119. 000000000 0 36 7 00000000000 Q0 36 8 00000000000 0 36 9 00000000000 0 HE Padis Binary E Symo Cd Columns 16 gt DM ox es 2 Properties Usage Help Data File N14 dec 16bits Analog Input Object File Smd E MM IE Properts E _ Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 306 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Control Generating Event The MicroLogix 1400 checks all elements in the Object Data file for changes at the end of a scan and generates events where needed The key method to turn on and off event generating by ladder logic is to assign or un assign the Class information bits in the Object Config Files The example below shows how to control the event generation condition by ladder logic and implements Deadband for Analog Input Objects which is only necessary for Series A MicroLogix 1400 In this example for 16 bit Analog Input point 0 N11 0 if the absolute value of the difference between the present value of N11 0 and the value that was most recently queued as an event for that point exceeds the deadband value then an event is generated for that point Data File List Name Number Type Scope Debug Words Elements Last Output 0 0 Global No 18 6 0 5 Input 1 l Global No 24 8 7 Status 2 S Global No 0 66 9 65 3 Global No 1 1 B3 0 Timer 4 T Global No
120. 0000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000 E x The following table shows the structure of the DNP3 Secure Authentication User Info Configuration File An Update Key is made up of 16 bytes and must be entered in as 32 hexadecimal digits Word Offset Name Lanes EN Valid Range DEC Description 0 User Number 0 1 0 to 65535 For User 1 1 Reserved 0 0 0 For User 1 2 Update Key 0 0 0 0 to 65535 3 Update Key 1 0 0 0 to 65535 4 Update Key 2 0 0 0 to 65535 5 Update Key 3 0 0 0 to 65535 6 Update Key 4 0 0 0 to 65535 7 Update Key 5 0 0 0 to 65535 8 Update Key 6 0 0 0 to 65535 9 Update Key 7 0 0 0 to 65535 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 247 Word Offset Name Valid Range DEC Description 10 User Number 0 0 0 to 65535 For User 2 11 Reserved 0 0 0 For User 1 12 Update Key 0 0 0 0 to 65535 13 Update Key 1 0 0 0 to 65535 14 Update Key 2 0 0 0 to 65535 15 Update Key 3 0 0 0 to 65535 16 Update Key 4
121. 001G EN P 2012 jump Change in normal sequence of program execution by executing an instruction that alters the program counter sometimes called a branch In ladder programs a JUMP instruction causes execution to jump to a labeled rung ladder logic A program written in a format resembling a ladder like diagram The program is used by a programmable controller to control devices least significant bit LSB The digit or bit in a binary word code that carries the smallest value of weight LED Light Emitting Diode Used as status indicator for processor functions and inputs and outputs LIFO Last In First Out The order that data is entered into and retrieved from a file low byte Bits 0 to 7 of a word logic A process of solving complex problems through the repeated use of simple functions that can be either true or false General term for digital circuits and programmed instructions to perform required decision making and computational functions Master Control Relay MCR A mandatory hard wired relay that can be de energized by any series connected emergency stop switch Whenever the MCR is de energized its contacts open to de energize all application I O devices mnemonic A simple and easy to remember term that is used to represent a complex or lengthy set of information modem Modulator demodulator Equipment that connects data terminal equipment to a communication line modes Selec
122. 0125 0 007 0 0115 40 0 kHz 0 025 0 019 0 025 0 018 0 023 20 0 kHz 0 075 0 062 0 072 0 066 0 074 6 7 kHz 0 100 0 089 0 100 0 088 0 098 5 0 kHz 0 250 0 229 0 250 0 228 0 248 2 0 kHz 0 500 0 459 0 500 0 455 0 492 1 0 kHz 1 00 0 918 0 995 0 910 0 979 0 5 kHz 2 000 1 836 1 986 1 820 1 954 250 Hz 4 000 3 672 3 968 3 640 3 904 125 Hz 8 0001 7 312 7 868 7 280 7 804 63 Hz 16 000 14 592 15 668 14 560 15 604 31 Hz 1 This is the default setting Standard DC Input Filter Settings Inputs 4 and higher Nominal Filter Setting ms ON Delay une QPF Dela mE Frequency Hz Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum 50 Duty Cycle 0 500 0 107 0 439 0 024 0 499 1 0 kHz 1 000 0 597 0 964 0 470 0 978 0 5 kHz 2 000 1 437 1 864 1 415 1 990 250 Hz 4 000 3 397 3 964 3 095 3 790 125 Hz 3 000 6 757 7 564 6 735 7 690 63 Hz 16 000 14 597 15 964 13 455 14 890 31 Hz 1 This is the default setting Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 158 Specifications Analog Input Filter Settings Analog Input Filter Settings Filter Bandwidth 3dB Freq Hz Sampling Frequency 250 Hz 250 Hz 1 kHz 60 Hz 60 Hz 1 kHz 50 Hz 50 Hz 1 kHz 10 Hz 10 Hz 1 kHz Relay Contact Ratings Risen Units Amperes Amperes Volt Amperes Make Break Continuous Make Break 240V AC 15 0A 1 5A 5 0 2 3 0 3600 VA 360 VA 120V 30 0 3 0A 5 0 A7 3 0 A 3600 VA 360 VA 125V AC 0 22 A8 1 0A 28
123. 0600 Fax 32 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P 2012 Supersedes Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Copyright 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the U S A
124. 0V AC 12 AU 125V DC 11 5A 24V DC 30 AUI 1 Current per relay limited to 6 A at ambient temperatures above 40 C 104 F 2 24 in ambient temperatures above 40 C 104 F Limited by ambient temperature and the number of relays controlling loads below Relays Used vs Maximum Current per Relay 24V DC 1762 OX6l 9 Ambient Temperature below 40 C 104 F __ Ambient Temperature above 40 C 104 F oa Oo N CO gt Co Maximum Current per Relay Amps 1 2 3 4 5 Number of Relays Controlling Loads o Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 168 Specifications Common Specifications Specification Dimensions Analog Modules 1762 IF20F2 1762 IF4 1762 IR4 1762 IT4 and 1762 0F4 90 mm height x 87 mm depth x 40 mm width height including mounting tabs is 110 mm 3 54 in height x 3 43 in depth x 1 58 in width height including mounting tabs is 4 33 in Temperature storage 40 85 C 40 185 F Temperature operating 20 65 4 149 F Operating humidity 5 95 non condensing Operating altitude 2000 m 6561 ft Vibration Operating 10 500 Hz 5 g 0 030 in max peak to peak Shock Operating 30 g Module power LED On indicates power is applied Recommended cable Belden 8761 shielded For 1762 IT4 Shielded thermocouple extension wire for the specific t
125. 1 1762 0V32T Wiring Diagram VDC 1 0 n VDC 1 24V DC sink OUTO OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4 OUT 5 OUT 6 OUT 7 OUT 8 OUT 9 OUT 10 OUT 11 OUT 12 OUT 13 OUT 14 OUT 15 DC DC COM 1 DC Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 COM 1 VDC 2 DC VDC 2 OUT 16 OUT 17 OUT 18 OUT 19 OUT 20 OUT 21 OUT 22 24V DC OUT 23 OUT 24 OUT 25 OUT 26 OUT 27 OUT 28 OUT 29 OUT 30 OUT 31 v DC COM2 DC COM 2 DC Q EN d J 1d 1 Na fa eae N M 5 I O o T ass gt VDC 2 4DC n 24V DC sink VDC 2 OUT 16 OUT 17 OUT 18 OUT 19 OUT 20 OUT 21 OUT 22 OUT 23 OUT 24 OUT 25 OUT 26 OUT 27 OUT 28 OUT 29 OUT 30 OUT 31 DC DC COM2 DC COM 2 44925 44915 Wire Your Controller 47 1762 0W8 Wiring Diagram pem ea VAC VDC H VAG On ina L2 DC COM OUT 2 OUT3 1 VAC2 VAC VDC2 L2 DC2 COM OUT5
126. 1 Ey 5 15 14 13 12 11 10 Ofset e DoD oc pDoonmonuococococo 0050 0000550 oF DoD OI D D D D O O fe OES D D D O O 8 D oc cO r 1 D LLI n n 0 n n n n c w a tn D D D D a SB 5050500505050 D D OD D D 8S ALI Bz2 0 0 Radir Binary Symbol Colunrs 18 eee un B32 Propertes Usags For a 32 bit Counter Config File Class Level of Index 10 is 1 B33 0 0 and B33 0 1 Class Level of Index 11 is 2 B33 1 0 and B33 1 1 Class Level of Index 12 is 3 B33 2 0 and B33 2 1 and Class Level of other Indexes are 0 Data File B33 bin 32bits Counter Contig File n 33 0 Hug ng uu oe eo oe H33 1 u ga m mug g ga gu 0 6 gt tu B33 2 oparo popo o n 0L ge 833 3 0 0 n 0 0 0 n nn n 33 4 n n n n g n 33 5 Do mung D T nn n B33 6 0008008868800 8 8 8 86 33 7 533 6 oo mn png 0 ob 00 gt 33 9 n a ng 0 0 0 0 fo Oo 8 oo Oo LI BE Radix zl 5m E 833 Ercpenies Usage Help Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 274 Micrologix 1400
127. 1 bit 0 AIC Advanced Interface Converter A device that provides a communication link between various networked devices Catalog Number 1761 application 1 A machine or process monitored and controlled by a controller 2 The use of computer or processor based routines for specific purposes baud rate The speed of communication between devices All devices must communicate at the same baud rate on a network bit The smallest storage location in memory that contains either a 1 ON or a 0 OFF block diagrams A schematic drawing Boolean operators Logical operators such as AND OR NAND NOR NOT and Exclusive OR that can be used singularly or in combination to form logic statements or circuits Can have an output response of T or F branch A parallel logic path within a rung of a ladder program communication scan A part of the controller s operating cycle Communication with other devices such as software running on a personal computet takes place controller device such as a programmable controller used to monitor input devices and control output devices controller overhead An internal portion of the operating cycle used for housekeeping and set up purposes Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 374 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P 2012 control profile The means by which a controller determines which outputs turn on under what conditions counter 1 An electr
128. 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index with flag and time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 30 0 Analog Input Any Variation 1 read 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 30 1 Analog Input 32 bit with 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop flag 06 no range or all 30 2 Analog Input 16 bit with 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop flag 06 no range or all 30 3 Analog Input 32 bit without 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop flag 06 no range or all 30 4 Analog Input 16 bit without 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop flag 06 no range or all 30 5 Analog Input Single prec 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop flt pt with flag 06 no range or all 32 0 Analog Input Event Any 1 read 06 no range or all Variation 07 08 limited qty 32 1 Analog Input Event 32 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index without time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 32 2 Analog Input Event 16 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index without time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 32 3 Analog Input Event 32 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index with time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 32 4 Analog Input Event 16 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 129 resp
129. 1 s before initiating an Unsolicited Response The valid range is 0 65535 Default value is 5 The value of 0 indicates that responses are not delayed due to this parameter Note that parameters Number of Class1 Events and Hold Time after Class1 Events x1 s are used together so that if either one of the criteria are met an Unsolicited Response is transmitted Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 241 Number of Class2 Events If the MicroLogix 1400 is configured not to initiate Unsolicited Response this parameter used to limit the maximum number of events which is generated and logged into the event buffer for Class 2 events In this case value 0 will disable to generate the event If the MicroLogix 1400 is configured to generate Unsolicited Response and the number of queued Class 2 events is reached to this value Unsolicited Response is initiated The valid range is 0 to 6013 Default value is 10 Hold Time after Class2 Events x1 s This parameter is only for Unsolicited Response The MicroLogix 1400 holds the events during Hold Time after Class2 Events x1 s before initiating an Unsolicited Response The valid range is 0 to 65535 Default value is 5 The value of 0 indicates that responses are not delayed due to this parameter Note that parameters Number of Class2 Events and Hold Time after Class2 Events x1 s are used together so that if either one of the criteria are met an Unsolicited Response is
130. 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Implementation Table for Series A controllers DNP Object Group amp Variation Request DNP3 Master may issue MicroLogix 1400 must parse Response DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Group Var Descrintion Function Qualifier Codes Function Qualifier Codes Num Num Codes dec hex Codes dec hex 20 1 Counter 32 bit with 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop flag 7 freeze 8 freeze noack 9 freeze clear 10 frz cl noack 20 2 Counter 16 bit with 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop flag 7 freeze 8 freeze noack 9 freeze clear 10 frz cl noack 20 5 Counter 32 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop without flag 7 freeze 8 freeze noack 9 freeze clear 10 frz cl noack 20 6 Counter 16 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop without flag 7 freeze 8 freeze noack 9 freeze clear 10 frz cl noack 21 0 Frozen Counter Any 1 read 06 no range or all Variation 21 1 Frozen Counter 32 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop with flag 21 2 Frozen Counter 16 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop with flag 21 5 Frozen Counter 32 bit 1 read 06
131. 143 RTC Battery Opetatlonas s eerta bee eter 144 Memory Module Operation ie 144 User Program User Data Datalog and Recipe 145 Program Compare 145 Data File Download Protection 145 Memory Module Write 145 Removal Insertion Under 146 Memory Module Information File 0 0 0 0 00 cee eee 146 Program Data Download 4 cx 146 Program Data Upload patos SS uero Sene ieee whegs poate 146 Chapter 7 Directions and Cautions for MicroLogix 1400 Online Editing eeedrxe deum nep pr qua e denne E 147 A Download is Required Before Starting Online Editing 147 Types of Online Editing 2 diii ceni EE AUS 148 Edit Functions in Runtime Online Editing 149 Edit Functions in Program Online Editing 149 Appendix A Specifications for D Se a 152 Specifications for Outputs in Hazardous Locations Class 1 Division 2 Groups 154 Specifications for Outputs Non Hazardous Locations only 155 Working Voltage 158 Expansion I eee Ea 159 Digital I O Modules eet cedet tte pi weld i a deste tet ed a 159 Replacement Parts Troubleshooting Your System Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System
132. 17 28 index 129 response echo of request relay output block CROB 4 operate 5 direct op 6 dir op no ack 20 0 Counter Any Variation 1 read 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 20 1 Counter 32 bit with flag 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 20 1 Counter 32 bit with flag 7 freeze 06 no range or all 8 freeze noack 9 freeze clear 10 frz cl noack 20 2 Counter 16 bit with flag 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 20 2 Counter 16 bit with flag 7 freeze 06 no range or all 8 freeze noack 9 freeze clear 10 frz cl noack 20 5 Counter 32 bit without flag 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 346 Implementation Table for Series controllers DNP Object Group amp Variation Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Request DNP3 Master may issue MicroLogix 1400 must parse Response DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Group Description Function Codes Qualifier Codes Function Qualifier Codes Num Num hex Codes dec hex 20 5 Counter 32 bit without flag 7 freeze 06 no range or all 8 freeze noack 9 freeze cle
133. 1762 0X61 wiring diagram 48 5 05 processors Ethernet communications 351 A address 373 Advanced Interface Converter See AIC advanced LCD configuration 117 agency certifications 7 AIC applying power to 81 80 connecting 74 definition 373 installing 80 recommended user supplied components 79 safety consideration 80 77 analog cable grounding 42 analog channel wiring guidelines 40 analog expansion 1 0 188 diagnostics 188 module operation vs channel operation 188 power up diagnostics 188 system wiring guidelines 49 troubleshooting 188 analog inputs analog channel wiring guidelines 40 application 373 Index battery 144 processor battery life expectancy 177 baud rate 373 before calling for assistance 192 bit 573 bit file monitoring 96 block diagrams 373 Boolean operators 373 BOOTP configuring SLC 5 05 360 363 using the Rockwell Utility 361 branch 373 buttons 91 C cable pinout MicroLogix controller channel 0 to modem cable 64 74 cables planning routes for DH485 connections 216 selection guide for the 77 82 calling for assistance 192 CE mark 7 8 changing communication configuration 59 changing mode switch position 113 collision avoidance 310 common mode rejection ratio specification 172 common techniques used in this manual xiv communication DeviceNet 82 83 Ethernet 83 communication connections 57 communication options 5 communication protocols ASCII 221 DF1 Full Duplex 209 210 213 221 Ethernet
134. 2 bit Counter Object were configured the index number will be as below 16 bit Counter Object From 0 to 9 32 bit Counter Object From 10 to 19 Let s suppose you configured both 16 bit and 32 bit Counter Object Files as below Data File N12 has 10 elements and L13 has 10 elements accordingly In total 20 Counter Object indexes are configured Index 0 of the Counter Object is N12 0 Index 1 is N12 1 Index 10 is L13 0 and Index 19 is L13 9 Data File N12 dec 1Gbits Counter Object File Radic Decimal 7 10 Dose v 2 Properties Usage Hep _ x ema Desc EK Biopsies Usage Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 273 As an example a Counter Config File is shown below These files have 10 elements for each B32 0 0 and B32 0 1 can be configured for Class Level 0 1 2 or 3 for DNP3 Index 0 of the 16 bits Counter Object File B32 1 0 and B32 1 1 can be configured for Class Level for DNP3 Index 1 of the Counter Object File Default Class Level is 0 Any other bits are reserved So in the example below for 16 bit Counter Config File Class Level of Index 0 is 1 B32 0 0 and B32 0 1 Class Level of Index 1 is 2 B32 1 0 and B32 1 1 Class Level of Index 2 is 3 B32 2 0 and B32 2 1 and Class Level of other Indexes are 0 Data File B32 1 5 Counter Contig File C
135. 20v2 Counter 16 bit with flag g20v5 Counter 32 bit without flag default g20v6 Counter 16 bit without flag default Counter Event Objects g22v0 Counter Event Any Variation g22v1 Counter Event 32 bit with flag default g22v2 Counter Event 16 bit with flag default Related Object File Number Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 272 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 16 bit Counter Object File Number 32 bit Counter Object File Number Related Configuration File Number 16 bit Counter Config File Number 32 bit Counter Config File Number To generate a Counter Object from the DNP3 Subsystem in the controller you should configure Counter Object File Numbers in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file When only one Counter Object File is configured the Index number starts from 0 for the configured object One word is used for one Index of a 16 bit Counter Object and one double word is used for one Index of a 32 bit Counter Object If both the 16 bit Counter Object File Number and 32 bit Counter Object File Number were configured in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file the starting index number of 16 bit Counter Object is 0 and the starting index number of 32 bit Counter Object starts from the ending index number of the 16 bit Counter Object For example if 10 elements of a 16 bit Counter Object were configured and 10 elements of a 3
136. 24m 50 ft with a 25 pin or 9 pin connector Refer to the following typical pinout Optical Isolator Modem 9 Pin 25 Pin 9 Pin 3 TXD gt 2 3 2 RXD RXD 3 2 5 GND l gt GND 7 5 1 CD CD 8 1 4 DTR DTR 20 4 gt 6 DSR DSR 6 6 8 CTS CTS 5 8 7 RTS t gt RIS 4 7 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 66 Communication Connections Connecting to a DF1 Half Duplex Network When a communication port is configured for DF1 Half Duplex Slave available parameters include the following DF1 Half Duplex Configuration Parameters Parameter Options Baud Rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2 KBps 38 4 KBps Parity none even Node Address 0 254 decimal Control Line no handshaking half duplex modem RTS CTS handshaking no handshaking 485 network Error Detection CRC BCC EOT Suppression enabled disabled When Suppression is enabled the slave does not respond when polled if no message is queued This saves modem transmission power and time when there is no message to transmit Duplicate Packet Message Detect enabled disabled Detects and eliminates duplicate responses to a message Duplicate packets may be sent under noisy communication conditions if the sender s Message Retries are not set to 0 Poll Timeout x20 ms 0 65 535 can be set in 20 ms in
137. 255 256 32 bit Counter Object File Only L file 9 to 255 Frozen Counter Object 21 23 reflection of reflection of 16 bit Counter Object File osea reflection of 32 bit Counter Object File Was configured Analog Input Object 30 32 256 16 bit Analog Input Object File Only N file 7 9 to 255 256 32 bit Analog Input Object File Only L file 9 to 255 Short Floating Point Analog Input Only F file 8 9 to 255 Object File Analog Output Object 40 41 256 16 bit Analog Output Object File Only N file 256 32 bit Analog Output Object File Only L file 9 to 255 Short Floating Point Analog Output Only F file 8 9 to 255 Object File BCD Object 101 256 Small BCD Object File Only N file 7 9 to 255 256 Data Set Object In 85 87 88 10 Data Set Prototypes Object File Only N file 7 9 to 255 10 Soles BI 06 87 88 Data Set Descriptors Object File Basically the index number of DNP objects of each type is evaluated by the firmware automatically per the number of elements For example if a Binary Input object file was configured as an element the highest index number of the Binary Input object is 15 The index number can only be increased by 16 If a Double Bit Binary Input object file was configured as an element the highest index number of the Double Bit Binary Input object is 7 The index number can only be increased by 8 As another example if a 16 bit Analog Input object file was configured as an element
138. 3 T4 0 Counter 5 C Global No 3 C5 0 Control 6 R Global No 3 R6 0 Integer 7 N Global No 1 1 N7 0 Float 8 F Global No 2 1 F8 0 16 bit Analog Input Object File 11 N Global No 10 10 N11 9 Binary Output Object File 12 B Global No 10 10 B12 0 16 bit32 bit Analog Input Config File 21 B Global No 10 10 B21 9 A16l OLD 30 N Global No 10 10 N30 9 16 DEADB 31 N Global No 10 10 N31 9 A16l Temp 32 N Global No 10 10 32 9 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P 2012 0000 0001 0002 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 307 LAD 2 Total Rungs in File 3 CLR Clear Dest B21 0 0000000000000000 SUB Subtract Source A Source B Dest ABS Absolute Value Source N32 0 0 lt Dest N32 0 0 RT TOR Greater Than A gt B Bitwise Inclusive OR Source A N32 0 Source A 0 lt 1 lt Source N31 0 Source B B210 3 lt 0000h lt Dest B21 0 0000h lt MOV Move Source N11 0 0 lt Dest 30 0 In the MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers new configuration files are defined for the Deadband for Analog Input Objects and the Threshold for Counter Objects The feature of the configuration files replaces the ladder program in this section For more details see DNP3 Configuration Files Reporting Event By Polled Response When a DNP3 Master sends a poll to read Class events any events logged to the event buffer will be reported in the polled response When us
139. 32AWAA 1766 L32BXBA Wiring Diagrams TIP In the following diagrams lower case alphabetic subscripts are appended to common terminal connections to indicate that different power sources may be used for different isolated groups if desired 1766 L32AWA L32AWAA Input Wiring Diagram 1 NOT USED terminals not intended for use as connection points Wire Your Controller 37 Lia Lib Lic L2a L2b L2c COMO INO IN1 IN2 INS COM 1 INA INS ING IN7 COM2 IN8 INQ IN10 IN11 1766 L32AWAA only COM COM3 12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16 IN17 IN18 IN19 ANA IVO IV1 1 2 1 3 1766 L32BWA L32BWAA Sinking Input Wiring Diagram DCa DCb DOG 24V DC Sensor po pc DCa DOb DCc DC OUT 24 1 DC DC DC COMO INO INi IN2 INS COM 1 INA IN5 ING IN7 COM2 IN8 INQ IN10 IN11 DCd DCd 1766 L32BWAA only COM ANA DC COM 3 IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16 IN17 IN18 IN19 1 0 1 1 IV2 4 1 3 1766 L32BWA L32BWAA Sourcing Input Wiring Diagram 24V DC DCa DCb DCc Sensor Power C DC DCa DCb DCc DC OUT 24V 1 DC DC DC COMO INO IN1 IN2 IN3 COM 1 INA INS ING IN7 COM 2 IN8 IN9 IN10 IN11 1766 L32BWAA only DC COM COM3 IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16 IN17 IN18 IN19 ANA IVO IVi 1 2 1 3 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P 2012 38 Wire Your Controller 1766 L32BXB L32BXBA Sinking Input Wiring Diagram DCa DCb DCc DCa DCb
140. 5 OUT ovo VAC VAC VAC VAC JL JL 44526 Wire Your Controller 35 Wire Types and Sizes Wire Type Wire Size Solid wire Cu 90 194 F 14 22 AWG Stranded wire Cu 90 194 F 16 22 AWG Wiring torque 0 791Nm 7 in lb rated Output Terminal Grouping Outputs Output Terminal Controllers Output Group Description Voltage Terminal 1766 L32BWA Group 0 Isolated relay output VAC DCO OUT 0 Group 1 Isolated relay output VAC DC1 OUT 1 Group 2 Isolated relay output VAC DC2 OUT 2 Group 3 Isolated relay output VAC DC3 OUT 3 Group 4 Isolated relay output VAC DC4 OUT 4 OUT 5 Group 5 Isolated relay output VAC DC5 OUT 6 OUT 7 Group 6 Isolated relay output VAC DC6 OUT8 11 1766 L32AWA Group 0 Isolated relay output VAC DCO OUT 0 Group 1 Isolated relay output VAC DC1 OUT 1 Group 2 Isolated relay output VAC DC2 OUT 2 Group 3 Isolated relay output VAC DC3 OUT 3 Group 4 Isolated relay output VAC DC4 OUT 4 OUT 5 Group 5 Isolated relay output VAC DC5 OUT 6 OUT 7 Group 6 Isolated relay output VAC DC6 OUT8 11 1766 L32BXB Group 0 Isolated relay output VAC DCO OUT 0 pene Group 1 Isolated relay output VAC DC1 OUT 1 Group 2 FET output VDC2 COM 2 OUT 2 7 Group 3 Isolated relay output VAC DC3 OUT 8 Group 4 Isolated relay output VAC DC4 OUT 9 Group 5 Isolated relay output VAC DC5 OUT 10 OUT 11
141. 568A and 568B are to be terminated There are four pairs of wires contained in a CAT5 UTP cable These pairs of cables are Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface 355 color coded white blue blue white orange orange white green green white brown brown they are also numbered one to four in the order shown 1WiOrange 2 Orange rz 1WiGreen P3 EIAITIA 568B tee 2 2584 sSWiBue P1 5 Green 7 WiBrown 8 Brown P4 EIA TIA 568A preferred RJ 45 Jack Front View RJ 45 Jack Front View EIAITIA Direct 5688 some as gt 1 8 AT amp T 258A R45 Jack Front View Cross UTP 1 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P 2012 356 Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface Ethernet Connections Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 TIP The most common wiring for RJ45 cables is the straight through cable which means that pin 1 of the plug on one end is connected to pin 1 of the plug on the other end The straight through RJ45 cable is commonly used to connect network cards with hubs on 10Base T and 100Base Tx networks On network cards pair 1 2 is the transmitter and pair 3 6 is the receiver The other two pairs are not used On hubs pair 1 2 is the receiver and 3 6 the transmitter It may be best to wire your cables with the same color sequence In this cable layout all pins are wired one to one to the other side The pins on the RJ45 connector are assigned i
142. 5B free format file 70 3 File Control file command 25 open file 5B free format Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Implementation Table for Series controllers DNP Object Group amp Variation Request Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 DNP3 Master may issue MicroLogix 1400 must parse Response DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue 349 Group Function Codes Qualifier Codes Function Qualifier Codes Num Num p dec hex Codes dec hex 70 3 File Control file command 27 delete file 5B free format 70 4 File Control file command 26 close file 5B free format 129 response 5B free format status 70 4 File Control file command 30 abort file 5B free format 129 response 5B free format status 70 5 File Control file transport 1 read file 5B free format 129 response 5B free format 70 5 File Control file transport 2 write file 5B free format 129 response 5B free format 70 6 File Control file transport 129 response 5B free format status 70 7 File Control file descriptor 28 get file info 5B free format 129 response 5B free format 70 8 File Control file 31 activate config 5B free format specification string 80 1 Internal Indications Packed 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start
143. 6 CS2 56 Application Layer Error Count 57 CS0 57 CS2 57 Function Code that caused the last error 58 CS0 58 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 CS2 58 Last Transmitted IIN in the response Communication Status File Words Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 323 File Element File Element Words Offset Description for Description for Description Channel 0 Channel 2 59 50 59 52 59 Data file number of last error request 60 50 60 52 60 Data element number of last error request 61 50 61 52 61 Received Confirm Function Code Counter 62 CS0 62 CS2 62 Received Read Function Code Counter 63 CS0 63 52 63 Received Write Function Code Counter 64 50 64 52 64 Received Etc Function Code Counter 65 50 65 52 65 Transmitted Solicited Response Function Code Counter 66 50 66 52 66 Transmitted Unsolicited Response Function Code Counter 67 50 67 52 67 Number of events to be reported 68 50 68 52 68 Transport Function Layer Error Codes 0 NO_ERROR No error found in the Transport Layer 1 DISCARD_NOT_FIRST_SEG The received packet was discarded since it was not a first segment 2 DISCARD_DUPLICATED_AND_MORE_SEG The received packet was discarded since it had the same sequence number as previous more segments are expected 3 DISCARD_DUPLICATED_AND_FINAL_SEG The received packet was discarded since it had the same sequence number as
144. 6 5 ft channel 0 PC COM port port 2 1764 LRP processor channel 1 port 2 MicroLogix 1400 channel 2 port 2 You can connect directly a MicroLogix 1400 to an Ethernet network via the Ethernet port Channel 1 You do not need to use an Ethernet interface card such as the Ethernet Interface ENT and ENIW catalog number 1761 and 1761 NET ENIW to connect your MicroLogix 1400 controller to an Ethernet network For additional information on connecting to an Ethernet network see Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface on page 351 44606 RS 232 485 Port Channel 0 Ethernet Port Channel 1 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 84 Communication Connections Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Ethernet Connections The Ethernet connector Channel 1 is an RJ45 10 100Base T connector The pin out for the connector is shown below Pin Pin Name Tx used by 10 100Base T not used by 10 100Base T Rx not used by 10 100Base T co NI OD oy A Ww N not used by 10 100Base T End view of RJ 45 Plug Looking into a RJ45 Jack 12345678 87654321 TIP For more information on using ethernet cables with MicroLogix 1400 see MicroLogix 1400 and PC Connections to the Ethernet Network on page 353 Chapter 5 Using the LCD This chapter describes how to use th
145. 762 1A8 wiring diagram 42 50 53 43 44 43 48 44 45 46 45 46 47 48 analog wiring guidelines 49 extended error information field 190 5 F false 375 FIFO First In First Out 375 file 575 file authentication rules 315 full duplex 62 375 G general considerations 8 generating DNP3 events 302 grounding the controller 31 H half duplex 67 375 hard disk 375 hardware errors 190 hardware features 1 heat dissipation calculating 371 heat protection 12 high byte 375 1 0 Inputs and Outputs 375 1 0 status indicators 93 implementation table 338 initialize user program 319 input device 375 input states on power down 12 inrush current 375 installing battery wire connector 19 ControlFLASH software 193 memory module 17 your controller 7 instruction 375 instruction set 375 Index 383 isolated link coupler installing 71 isolation transformers power considerations 11 J jump 376 L ladder logic 376 LCD configuring advanced settings 117 1 0 status indicators 93 185 loading communication EEPROM 137 main menu 89 86 saving communication EEPROM 137 139 184 user defined screen 115 viewing fault code 135 134 least significant bit LSB 376 LED Light Emitting Diode 376 LIFO Last In First Out 376 link layer configuration parameters 230 lithium battery 1747 BA disposing 181 handling 179 installing 177 manufacturer 181 storing 179 transporting 179 loading communication EEPROM 137 logic 376 lo
146. 8 1 F 40 1009 C C 0 1009 F F 50 mV 15 uV 25 uV 0 44uV C 0 80uV F 100 mV 20 uV 30 uV 0 69uV C 01 25uV F 1 The module uses the National Institute of Standards and Technology NIST ITS 90 standard for thermocouple linearization 2 Accuracy and temperature drift information does not include the affects of errors or drift in the cold junction compensation circuit 3 Accuracy is dependent upon the analog digital converter output rate selection data format and input noise 4 Temperature drift with autocalibration is slightly better than without autocalibration Output Specifications Specification Number of outputs TIP For more detailed 1762 IT4 accuracy information see publication 1762 UM002 1762 IF20F2 2 single ended unipolar 1762 0F4 4 single ended unipolar Update time typical 45 ms D A converter type Resistor string R 2R Ladder Voltage Switching Resistive load on current output 0 500 includes wire resistance 0 500 includes wire resistance Load range on voltage output gt gt 1KQ Reactive load current output 0 1 mH 0 1 mH Reactive load voltage output T1yuF lt 1 Typical overall accuracy 1 17 full scale at 20 65 2 0 5 full scale at 25 1 17 full scale at 20 65 2 0 5 full scale at 25 Output ripple l
147. 80 x 87 mm 3 5 x 7 08 x 3 43 in Appendix A 1766 L32BWA A 1766 L32BXB A Shipping weight 0 9 kg 2 0 Ibs Number of 1 0 24 inputs 20 digital and 4 analog and 14 outputs 12 digital and 2 analog Power supply voltage 100 240V 15 10 at 47 63 Hz 24V DC 15 10 Class 2 SELV Heat dissipation See System Loading and Heat Dissipation on page 367 Power supply inrush 120V AC 25 A for 8 ms 24V DC current 240V AC 40 A for 4 ms 15 A for 20 ms Power consumption 100 VA 120 VA 7 5 53W 24V DC sensor power none 24V DC at 250 mA none 400 uF max Input circuit type Digital 120V AC Digital 24V DC sink source Digital 24V DC standard and high speed Analog 0 10V DC Analog 0 0V DC sink source standard and high speed Analog 0 10V DC Output circuit type Relay Relay FET Relay life Electrical 2x 10 operations min 2 5 A 250V AC 30V DC Enclosure type rating None open style Terminal screw torque 0 791 Nm 7 0 Ib in rated Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 152 Specifications Specifications for Inputs 1766 L32BWA A 1766 L32BXB A Description 1766 L32AWA A Inputs 0 through 11 Inputs 12 and higher 12 high speed DC inputs 8 standard DC inputs On state voltage range 79 132 V AC 4 5 24V DC 10 24V DC 4 5 26 4V DC 41096 at 10 26 4V DC 10 at 60 C 140 F 6
148. 82 2 oll oo 0o 0 0000 eof oo O 0000 OI 2 Ff _ ol B37 0 0 Binary X Smet 0 0 E Columns 16 e Desc SS M uQM B37 a Properties Usage Help For Short Floating Point Analog Input Config File Class Level of Index 20 is 1 B38 0 0 and B38 0 1 Class Level of Index 21 is 2 B38 1 0 and B38 1 1 Class Level of Index 22 is 3 B38 2 0 and B38 2 1 and Class Level of other Indexes are 0 Data File B38 bin Short Floating Point Analog Input Confi E3 OEESeED 15 14 13 12 11 10 0 Pry e e e e e E a 3m 9a a Gao Ga Gao Gao an OO h UNEB a a a a a 0 D BD 3 oo 82 02 oo D 8 UU ORS ccc oll oo O O O O co 8 O ol 8 SKS o cO00050077 0007055 Ff ol a s 6 8 6 ooo D a 4 rf B380 0 Radix Binary Columns fie gt TCC Ee Properties Usage Help Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 280 Micrologix 1400 Distribu
149. 82 752 F 1 C 1 8 F 1 5 C 62 7 F 0 0349 C C 0 0349 F F Thermocouple T 270 230 C 454 382 F 5 4 C 9 8 F 7 0 C 12 6 F 0 3500 C C 0 3500 F F Thermocouple 230 1370 C 382 2498 F 1 C 1 8 F 1 5 C 62 7 F 0 4995 C C 0 4995 F F Thermocouple 270 225 C 454 373 F 7 5 C 13 5 F 10 C 18 F 0 0378 C C 0 0378 F F Thermocouple E 210 1000 C 346 1832 F 30 5 C 0 9 F 0 8 1 5 F 0 0199 C C 0 0199 F F ublication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 174 Specifications 1762 IT4 Accuracy With Autocalibration Enabled Accuracy 3 for 10 Hz 50 Hz and 60 Without Autocalibration Maximum Temperature Drift 4 Input Hz Filters max at 25 C 77 F at 0 60 at 0 60 C 32 140 F 32 140 F Ambient Ambient Ambient Thermocouple E 270 210 C 454 346 F 4 2 C 7 6 F 6 3 C 411 4 F 0 2698 C C 0 2698 F F Thermocouple R 1 7 C 3 1 F 2 6 C 4 7 F 0 0613 C C 0 0613 F F Thermocouple S 1 7 C 3 1 F 2 6 C 4 7 F 0 0600 C C 0 0600 F F Thermocouple C 1 8 C 3 3 F 3 5 C 6 3 F 0 0899 C 0 0899 F F Thermocouple B 3 0 C 5 4 F 45 C
150. 85 DF1 or ASCII 10 100 MicroLogix 1400 Actual performance of an MicroLogix 1400 controller varies according to Performance size of Ethernet messages Considerations frequency of Ethernet messages network loading the implementation of and performance of your processor application program Optimal Performance Micrologix 1400 controller to Micrologix 1100 Series B OS FRN 4 controller 2 node Ethernet network Operation Words MSG per Second Words per Second SingeTypdRead 2 20 Single Typed Reads 20 20 400 Single Typed Reads 100 20 2000 Optimal Performance MicroLogix 1400 controller to RSLinx Operation Words MSG per Second Words per Second SingeTypdRead 25 15 Single Typed Reads 20 25 500 Single Typed Reads 100 25 2 500 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 MicroLogix 1400 and Connections to the Ethernet Network Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface 353 Optimal Performance MicroLogix 1400 to MicroLogix 1400 controller Operation Words MSG per Second Words per Second SingleTypedRead o Single Typed Reads 20 20 400 Single Typed Reads 100 20 2 000 The MicroLogix 1400 Ethernet connector conforms to ISO IEC 8802 3 STD 802 3 and utilizes 10 100Base T media Connections are made directly from the MicroLogix 1400 to an Ethernet hub or switch The network setup is simple and c
151. 9 Read Only INT 1 1 Support for analog output 0 0 events 220 Read Only UINT 4 2 Max analog output index 256 3 221 Read Only UINT 4 2 Number of analog outputs 0 256 3 222 Read Only INT 1 1 Support for binary output 0 events 223 Read Only UINT 4 2 Max binary output index 256 16 224 Read Only UINT 4 2 Number of binary outputs 0 256 16 225 Read Only INT 1 1 Support for frozen counter 1 events 226 Read Only INT 1 1 Support for frozen 1 counters 227 Read Only INT 1 1 Support for counter 1 events Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 300 Object Group 0 Variations for Attribute Set 0 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Attribute Length in Max ET Read Length in av Variation Data Bytes Description Value Series A Value Series B Write T Bytes ype Series A Series B 228 Read Only UINT 4 2 Max counter index 256 2 229 Read Only UINT 4 2 Number of counter points 0 256 2 230 Read Only INT 1 1 Support for frozen analog 0 inputs 231 Read Only INT 1 1 Support for analog input 1 events 232 Read Only UINT 4 2 Maximum analog input 256 3 index 233 Read Only UINT 4 2 Number of analog input 0 256 3 points 234 Read Only INT 1 1 Support for double bit 1 binary input events 235 Read Only UINT 4 2 Maximum double bit 256 8 binary input index 236 Read Only UINT 4 2 Number of double bit 0
152. CD display of the controller also shows the status of the replaceable battery When the battery is low the indicator is displayed as a solid rectangle When the battery level is acceptable the indicator is displayed as an empty rectangle as shown below 000000 AU I BBOQOOOOOO0000 LILILILILIE 1423456789612 456789 0 0000000090 2 8 If the RTC battery is low and the controller is powered the RTC operates normally If the controller power is removed and the RTC battery is low RTC data is lost ATTENTION Operating with a low battery indication for more A than 2 weeks may result in invalid RTC data unless power is on continuously Memory Module Operation The memory module supports the following features User Program User Data Datalog and Recipe Back up User Program Compare Data File Download Protection Memory Module Write Protection Removal Insertion Under Power ATTENTION Electrostatic discharge can damage the Memory Module Do not touch the connector pins or other sensitive areas Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Using Real Time Clock and Memory Modules 145 User Program User Data Datalog and Recipe Back up The memory module provides a simple and flexible program data DataLog and Recipe transport mechanism allowing the user to transfer the program data DataLog and Recipe to the controller without the use of a personal computer and programming software
153. Clear field Off Complementary two output model 0x61 Pulse On Close Clear field On Complementary two output model 0x81 Pulse On Trip Clear field Off Complementary two output model OxA1 Pulse On Trip Clear field On Complementary two output model When the MicroLogix 1400 is in Non Executing mode the controller will not accept a Binary Command The MicroLogix 1400 returns a Control Status Code 7 in response To access objects 12 the controller should be in Executing mode Note that Executing mode includes Run Remote Run Test Continuous Scan and Test Single Scan modes Any others are Non Executing modes DNP3 Double Bit Binary Input Object The supported object group and variations are listed in this section The MicroLogix 1400 responds with the default group and variation when the DNP3 Master requests to read an object with Any variation Double bit Binary Input Static Objects g3v0 Double bit Binary Input All Variations g3v1 Double bit Binary Input Packed format default g3v2 Double bit Binary Input With flags Double bit Binary Input Event Objects g4v0 Double bit Binary Input Event All Variations g4v1 Double bit Binary Input Event Without time Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 270 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 g4v2 Double bit Binary Input Event With absolute time g4v3 Double bit Bina
154. Connecting to Networks via RS 232 RS 485 Interface Table of Contents Analog Modules 168 Appendix B MicroLogix 1400 Replacement 177 Lithium Battery 1747 soup Dee cete tien 177 Cd ctus scholae 177 Battery 179 mach E 179 Transport tion a Maen N cane 179 Disposals 181 Appendix Understanding the Controller Status Indicators 183 Controller Status LED 183 Status Indicators on the LCD 1 exorto 184 I O Status Indicators on the 1 185 Normal Operation iu n e i Rete Ei 185 cts creada ba tee eR Uie Pius 186 Controller Error Recovery 186 Analog Expansion I O Diagnostics and Troubleshooting 188 Module Operation and Channel Operation 188 Powertip dec EP NER ED ET 188 Critical and Non Critical oor sre oor E nde 189 Module Error Definition Table is aerae den on eed 189 Error 191 Calling Rockwell Automation for 192 Appendix D Preparing for Firmware Upgrade aetas 193 Install ControlFLASH 193 Prepare the Controller for Firmware Upgrade 194 Using Contr
155. D connector 6 E TN oe 5 3 8 Ke sj 4 3 oH 5 B COM 3 SHLD 9 O 5 4 a 2 CHS GND 12 1 2 RS Pin 1 0 9 85 232 Port2 1761 CBL PMO2 Fort 3 RS 485 cable Connector 1 received line signal detector 24V dc chassis ground DCD 2 received data RxD ground GND cable shield 3 transmitted data TxD request to send RTS signal ground DTE ready pray received data RxD DH 485 data B 5 signal common GND received line signal detector DH 485 data DCD 6 DCE ready DSR clear to send CTS termination 7 request to send RTS transmitted data TxD not applicable 8 clear to send CTS ground GND not applicable 9 notapplicable not applicable not applicable state of pin 6 2 available If you are making a cable to connect to port Allen Bradley cable shown above 3 On port 1 pin 4 is electronically jumpered to pin 6 Whenever the AIC is powered on pin 4 will match the An 8 pin mini DIN connector is used for making connections to port 2 This connector is not commercially 2 you must configure your cable to connect to the In the 1761 CBL PM02 cable pins 4 and 6 are jumpered together within the DB 9 connector Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 80 Communication Connections Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Safety Considerations This equipment is suitable for use in Class I Division 2 Groups A B C D or non hazardous locations only
156. DC 110 mA at 5V DC 0 25W 0 25W 0 35W 9 0 mA at 24V DC 80 mA at 24V DC Heat dissipation max 2 0 W 3 7 W 4 3 W at 26 4V 5 4Wat26 4V DC 5 0 W at 30V DC 54 W at 30 3 6 8 W at 30V DC 4 4 W at 26 4V DC The Watts per point plus the minimum W with all points energized Signal delay max On delay 20 0 ms Off delay 20 0 ms On delay 8 0 ms Off delay 8 0 ms On delay 8 0 ms Off delay 8 0 ms On delay 8 0 ms Off delay 8 0 ms On delay 8 0 ms Off delay 8 0 ms Off state voltage max 20V AC 5V DC 5V DC 5V DC 5V DC Off state current max 2 5 mA 1 5 mA 1 5 mA 1 0mA 1 5 mA On state voltage min 79V AC min 10V DC 10V DC 10V DC 10V DC 132V AC max On state current 5 0 mA min at 2 0 mA min at 2 0 mA min at 1 6 mA min at 10 mA at 5V DC 79V AC 47 Hz 10V DC 10V DC 10V DC 12 0 mA nominal 8 0mA nominal at 8 0mA nominalat 2 0 mA min at at 120V AC 60 Hz 24V DC 24V DC 15V DC 16 0 mA max at 12 0 mA max at 12 0 mA max at 5 7 mA max at 132V AC 63 Hz 30V DC 30V DC 26 4V DC 6 5 mA max at 30 0V DC Inrush current max 250 mA Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable 250 mA Nominal impedance 12K Qat 50 Hz KQ 3K o KA 10K Qat 60 Hz IEC input compatibility Type 1 Type 1 Type 1 Type 1 Type 1 Isolated groups Group 1 inputs Group 1 inputs Group 1 inputs Group 1 Inputs Group 1 inputs 0 7 internally 0 7 internally 0 7 Group 2 0 7 Group 2
157. Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 DNP3 Frozen Counter Object The supported object group and variations are listed in this section The MicroLogix 1400 responds with the default group and variation when the DNP3 Master requests to read the object with all variations Frozen Counter Static Objects g21v0 Frozen Counter All Variations e g21v1 Frozen Counter 32 bit with flag g21v2 Frozen Counter 16 bit with flag g21v5 Frozen Counter 32 bit with flag and time g21v6 Frozen Counter 16 bit with flag and time g21v9 Frozen Counter 32 bit without flag default g21v10 Frozen Counter 16 bit without flag default Frozen Change Event Objects 923v0 Frozen Counter Event All Variations e g23v1 Frozen Counter Event 32 bit with flag default 023 2 Frozen Counter Event 16 bit with flag default g23v5 Frozen Counter Event 32 bit with flag and time g23v6 Frozen Counter Event 16 bit with flag and time Related Object File Number 16 bit Counter Object File Number 32 bit Counter Object File Number Related Configuration File Number 16 bit Frozen Counter Config File Number 32 bit Frozen Counter Config File Number To generate a Frozen Counter Object from the DNP3 Subsystem in the controller you should configure Counter Object File Number in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file The number of
158. EASE Firmware use only 19 29 Reserved 30 ERR_CONN_REJECTED Incoming Connection is rejected by the IP address validation 31 ERR_INVALID_HEADER_CRC Received packet header has invalid CRC 32 ERR INVALID HEADER Received packet header has invalid packet format 33 ERR INVALID PACKET CRC Received packet has invalid CRC 34 ERR BAD PACKET RECEIVED Received packet is unknown 35 ERR PACKET REJECTED Received packet is rejected 36 ERR CONNECTION BROKEN The connection has been broken for some reason 37 49 Reserved 50 ERR INVALID IP ADDRESS Target IP Address is invalid 51 ERR INVALID PORT Target Port Number is invalid 52 Reserved For the elements of the DNP3 Slave Application Layer diagnostic counter element offset 60 to 74 the counter values available with the structured display in RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro software as below Channel 0 Channel 1 ft 3 Channel 2 DNP3 Slave Application Layer Application Layer Error Code 0 __ Received Confirm FC Counter 0 Application Layer Error Count Received Read FC Counter lasterror 0 Received Write FC Counter 0 Last Trans IIN in response 0 Received Etc FC Counter I Data file Num last error request Trans Solicited Res FC Counter Data element Num last error request Trans Unsolicited Res FC Counter Transport Layer Error Code J Number of events to be reported 0 Transport Layer Error Count 0 FC Function C
159. F UnProtected You can identify this change of data value is reflected to your RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro programming software Data File bin BINARY ioj xl Eset 15 14 13112211710 6980916 0 0 0010000000 B3 1 3 2 0 0H HK 000000 B3 3 000020202002 020502 02 0 0090 3 4 000202002 002 02 m2 02000 00 B3 5 0000000000000000 B3 6 0002020202002 020 50200000 3 7 000202002002 020 02 0 0000 B3 8 000020202002 00 02 02D0000 p3 9 000020202002 00 02 0 00090 B3 10 0002020202020202002002020 33 0 z TIP When the cursor is at the data value position press the Down key to change the data value of a bit from ON 1 to OFF 0 Press the Up key to change from OFF 0 to ON 1 After changing the data value of a target bit press the OK key to apply the changes or press the ESC key to discard the changes Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 100 Using the LCD Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 8 Now we will view an example of the data value of a protected property If LCD Edit Disable is set to checked enable the Protected message will be displayed and this data file cannot be edited from the LCD 9 Try to move the cursor to the data value position by pressing the OK key Because the B3 0 0 bit is a protected bit you will find that the cursor does not move to the data value position 10
160. F1 Full Duplex communication takes place in one direction at a time You can use the RS 232 485 port on the MicroLogix as both a Half Duplex programming port and a Half Duplex peer to peer messaging port DF1 Half Duplex Operation A DF1 Half Duplex master device initiates all communication by polling each slave device The slave device may only transmit when it is polled by the master It is the master s responsibility to poll each slave on a regular and sequential basis to allow slave devices an opportunity to communicate An additional feature of the DF1 Half Duplex protocol is that it is possible for a slave device to enable a MSG write or read to from another slave When the initiating slave is polled the MSG is sent to the master The master recognizes that the message is not intended for it but for another slave so the master immediately forwards the message Rockwell Software RSLinx 2 0 or later SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC um DF1 Half Duplex Protocol 5 05 PLC 5 MicroLogix 1400 or Connecting to Networks via RS 232 RS 485 Interface 211 to the intended slave The master does this automatically you do not need to program the master to move data between slave nodes This slave to slave transfer can also be used by programming software to allow slave to slave upload and download of programs to processors including the master on the DF1 Half Duplex link MicroLogix 1400 can act as the master or as a slave on a Ha
161. G EN P May 2012 358 Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface Configuring the Ethernet There are three ways to configure the MicroLogix 1400 Ethernet channel 1 Channel on the MicroLogix viaa BOOTP or DHCP request at controller powerup 1400 manually setting the configuration parameters using RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro Programming Software via LCD display see Configuring the Ethernet Port on page 126 and Configuring Ethernet Protocol Setup on page 129 The configuration parameters are shown on the following page and the configuration procedures follow Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface 359 Configuration Parameters Parameter Description Default Status Hardware The MicroLogix 1400 Ethernet hardware address Ethernet read only Address hardware address IP Address The MicroLogix 1400 internet address in network byte order The internet address must 0 undefined read write be specified to connect to the TCP IP network Subnet Mask The MicroLogix 1400 subnet mask in network byte order The Subnet Mask is used to 0 undefined read write interpret IP addresses when the internet is divided into subnets A Subnet Mask of all zeros indicates that no subnet mask has been configured In this case the controller assumes a Subnet Mask of 255 255 255 0 Gateway The address of a gateway in network byte order that provides conne
162. GED CIL cuor CLD Cama Cc c Com C CIL enan Ga CSE Coe orp E Qd CU 44515 44514 r4 13 12 11 10 9 8 Left side view Top view Description Comm port 2 9 pin D Shell RS 232C connector Memory module refer to MicroLogix 1400 Memory Module Installation Instructions publication 1766 INO10A for instructions on installing the memory module User 24V for 1766 BWA and 1766 BWAA only Input terminal block LCD Display Keypad ESC OK Up Down Left Right Battery compartment 1762 expansion bus connector Battery connector Output terminal block LCD Display Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 2 Hardware Overview Description Indicator LED panel Comm port 1 RJ45 connector Comm port 0 8 pin mini DIN RS 232C RS 485 connector Controller Input and Output Description Catalog Number 1766 L32BWA Description 1766 L32AWA Input Power 100 240V AC User Embedded Embedded Power Discrete 1 0 Analog 1 0 Comm Ports 24V DC 12 Fast 24V DC Inputs None 1 RS232 RS495 8 Normal 24V DC Inputs 1 Ethernet 12 Relay Outputs 1RS23212 1766 L32BXB 24V DC None 20 120V AC Inputs 12 Relay Outputs 12 Fast 24V DC Inputs 8 Normal 24V DC Inputs 6 Relay Outputs 3 Fast DC Outputs 3 Normal DC Outputs 1766 L32BWAA 1766 L32AWAA 100
163. H Cfg ENET Cfg RU The DCOMM Configuration screen is displayed In this example the curtent status is Disable The DCOMM status indicator which is the fourth of the six indicators at the top left of the LED display is displayed as an empty rectangle It means that the communication configuration is set to a user defined communication mode at present Communication Connections 61 5 Use the up arrow to change the indicator position so that it is pointing to Enable Press the OK key to change to the default communication mode LS 020807 Cfg bEnable Disable RU The DCOMM Mode Change Notification screen is displayed It indicates that the communication configuration is changed to the default communication mode The DCOMM status indicator is displayed in solid rectangle RU Comms contig se DFI default If you change to the user defined configuration from the default configuration mode by selecting Disable and pressing the OK key the DCOMM Mode Change Notification will be displayed 000000 Comms contig is restored 6 Press the ESC key to return to the Advanced Set Menu screen as shown in step 3 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 62 Communication Connections Connecting to the RS 232 Port There are two ways to connect the MicroLogix 1400 programmable controller to your personal computer using the DF1 protocol using a point to point
164. ISABLE UNSOLICITED Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 22 0x16 FC ASSIGN CLASS No Request 23 0x17 FC DELAY MEASURE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Used for non LAN Request 24 0x18 FC RECORD CURRENT TIME Used for LAN Request 25 0x19 FC OPEN FILE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 26 0x1A FC CLOSE FILE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 27 0x1B FC DELETE FILE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 28 0x1C FC GET FILE INFO No Request 29 0x1D FC AUTHENTICATE FILE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 30 Ox1E FC ABORT FILE No Request 31 Ox1F FC ACTIVATE CONFIG No Request 32 0x20 FC AUTHENTICATE No Request 33 0x21 FC AUTHENTICATE ERR No 34 0x22 to No Reserved 128 0x80 Response 129 0x81 FC RESPONSE Yes MicroLogix 1400 sends Response 130 0x82 FC UNSOLICITED RESPONSE Yes MicroLogix 1400 sends Response 131 0x83 FC AUTHENTICATE RESP No 132 0x84 to No Reserved 255 OxFF Function Codes for MicroLogix 1400 Series B Controllers cm Function Name MicroLogix Description ype Code 1400 Support Confirmation 0 0x00 FC CONFIRM Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses sends Request 1 0x01 FC READ Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 2 0x02 FC WRITE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 3 0x03 FC SELECT Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 4 0x04 FC OPERATE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Function Codes for MicroLogix 1400 Series Controllers Micrologix 1400 Distribut
165. Load from EEPROM TIP With MicroLogix 1400 you can also use the LCD and the LCD buttons on the module to transfer applications to or from the controller For more information on program data download refer to your RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro programming software documentation Program Data Upload To upload the program and data from the controller s memory to a memory module on the Comms menu in your RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro programming software point EEPROM and then click Store to EEPROM TIP With MicroLogix 1400 you can also use the LCD and the LCD buttons on the module to transfer applications to or from the controller For more information on program data upload refer to your RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro programming software documentation Directions and Cautions for MicroLogix 1400 Online Editing User Chapter 7 Online Editing A Download is Required Before Starting Online Editing At least one download is required before you can start online editing If you are using a MicroLogix 1400 from out of box state or after clearing processor memory or a firmware upgrade at least one download is required before starting online edits If not an error occurs and programming software will go offline due to a default image mismatch between programming software RSLogix500 and the MicroLogix 1400 You can also see the fault code 1Fh which is a user defined fault code In otder to prevent this error you need
166. O status file Refer to the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 001 for more information Module Error Types Module Error Field Value Error Type Bits 11 through 09 Description Binary No Errors 000 No error is present The extended error field holds no additional information Hardware Errors 001 General and specific hardware error codes are specified in the extended error information field Configuration Errors 010 Module specific error codes are indicated in the extended error field These error codes correspond to options that you can change directly For example the input range or input filter selection Extended Error Information Field Check the extended error information field when a non zero value is present in the module error field See Extended Error Codes for 1762 IF2OF2 on page 191 TIP If no errors are present in the module error field the extended error information field is set to zero Hardware Errors General or module specific hardware errors are indicated by module error code 2 Configuration Errors If you set the fields in the configuration file to invalid or unsupported values the module ignores the invalid configuration generates a non critical error and keeps operating with the previous configuration The table below lists the configuration error codes defined for the module Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Troubl
167. ONSE Yes MicroLogix 1400 sends Response 131 0x83 FC AUTHENTICATE RESP No MicroLogix 1400 sends 132 0x84 to No Reserved 255 OxFF Implementation Table MicroLogix 1400 supports DNP3 Certification Subset Level 2 The implementation table in this section identifies which object groups and variations function codes and qualifiers the device supports in both requests and responses The Request and Response columns identify all requests and responses that may be sent parsed by a DNP3 Master or must be parsed sent by the MicroLogix 1400 The implementation table lists all functionality required by either DINP3 Master or MicroLogix 1400 as defined within the DNP3 IED Conformance Test Procedures Any functionality beyond the highest subset level supported is indicated by grayed table cells Implementation Table for Series A controllers Request Response DNP Object Group amp Variation DNP3 Master may issue DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Group Var Descrintion Function Qualifier Codes Function Qualifier Codes Num Num p Codes dec hex Codes dec hex 0 211 239 Device Attribute 1 read 00 start stop 129 response 00 start stop 241 243 248 250 252 0 240 Device Attribute 1 read 00 start stop 129 response 00 start stop XEM 2 write 00 start stop 0 254 Device Attribute 1 read 00 01 start stop Non specific all 06 no range or all attribu
168. Outside United States or Use the Worldwide Locator at http www rockwellautomation com support americas phone en html Canada or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative New Product Satisfaction Return Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility Howevet if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number call the phone number above to obtain one to your distributor to complete the return process Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure Documentation Feedback Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA DU002 available at http www rockwellautomation com literature Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret 5 Kar Plaza Is Merkezi E Blok Kat 6 34752 erenk y stanbul Tel 90 216 5698400 www rockwellautomation com Power Control and Information Solutions Headquarters Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 2496 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Europe Middle East Africa Rockwell Automation NV Pegasus Park De Kleetlaan 12a 1831 Diegem Belgium Tel 32 2 663
169. P3 Index 0 of the Small BCD Object File B40 1 0 and B40 1 1 can be configured for Class Level for DNP3 Index 1 of the Small BCD Object File Default Class Level is 0 Any other bits are reserved Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 283 In the example below for Small BCD Config File Class Level of Index 0 is 1 B40 0 0 and B40 0 1 Class Level of Index 1 is 2 B40 1 0 and B40 1 1 Class Level of Index 2 is 3 B40 2 0 and B40 2 1 and Class Level of other Indexes are 0 Data File B40 bin Small BED Config File 5 US 14 13 12 11 10 e e 3 3a 393 33 0 33 Gao 0 G3 33 3 6 s De A U NEB bo fo 8 6 O aoe BD o 6 2 4 6 a amp 8 oo 0 oo 82 02 oo 00 0 eh cO ccc 05050050 82 2 2 o 0000006 Oll cc _ EPE ol oo 8 8 4 Ld B40 0 0 Radin Binary gt coms 18 E Desc oo po 2 Properties Usage Help DNP3 Data Set Object This feature is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers These object groups and variations are supported Data Set Objects g85v0 Data Set P
170. R W property is writable the value which was written by DNP3 master device is stored to non volatile memory The object group of the Device Attribute is 0 The supported range of the variation is 211 255 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 299 Object Group 0 Variations for Attribute Set 0 Attribute Length in Max Read Length in Variation Data Bytes Description Value Series A Value Series B Mite Type Series A Bytes Series B 211 Read Only VSTR 27 for DNP3 Identifier of support for Returns the Returns the user specific attributes identifier for identifier for user specific user specific attributes attributes Rockwell NULL for DNP3 Automation Inc 1 212 Read Only UINT 4 2 Number of master defined 0 0 data set prototypes 213 Read Only UINT 4 2 Number of 0 The configured outstation defined data number in the set prototypes DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file 10 max 214 Read Only UINT 4 2 Number of master defined 0 0 data sets 215 Read Only UINT 4 2 Number of 0 The configured outstation defined data number in the sets DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file 10 max 216 Read Only UINT 4 2 Max number of binary 10 10 outputs per request 217 Read Only UINT 4 2 Local timing accuracy 10 000 in microseconds 218 Read Only UINT 4 2 Duration of timing 0 in seconds accuracy 21
171. Reserved 4 54 104 Security Idle Wait for Reply Reserved 5 55 105 Security Idle Wait for Reply Reserved 6 56 106 Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Unsolicited Non Critical ASDU 7 57 107 Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Non Critical ASDU 8 58 108 Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Critical ASDU Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 334 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Word Offset CHi ai Current State Description 9 59 109 Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Critical ASDU 10 60 110 Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Valid Reply 11 61 111 Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Invalid Reply 12 62 112 Security Idle Event Counter for Reply Timeout 13 63 113 Security Idle Event Counter for Max Invalid Replies Or Comm Failure Detected 14 64 114 Security Idle Event Counter for Max Invalid Replies Or Comm Failure Detected 15 65 115 Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Error Message 16 66 116 Security Idle Event Counter for Key Change Timeout 17 67 117 Security Idle Event Counter for Expected Key Change Timeout 18 68 118 Security Idle Event Counter for Expected Key Change Timeout 19 69 119 Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Key Status Request 20 70 120 Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Valid Aggressive Mode Request 21 71 121 Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Valid Aggr
172. Switch Required 1 q Setting SLC 5 03 or SLC 5 04 processors ch 0 port 2 yes external MicroLogix 1000 1200 or 1500 ch 0 port 1 yes external MicroLogix 1400 ch 2 port 2 yes external PanelView 550 through NULL modem port 2 yes external adapter DTAM Plus DTAM Micro port 2 yes external PC COM port port 2 yes external External power supply required unless the AIC is powered by the device connected to port 2 then the selection switch should be set to cable 2 Series C or later cables are required Cable 1761 CBL AMoo 2 1761 CBL HM02U Length 45 cm 17 7 in 2 m 6 5 ft Bi 761 CBL AMOO 1761 CBL HM02U 44601 External power supply required unless the AIC is powered by the device connected to port 2 then the select 2 Series C or later cables are required Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 External Power Connections from to AIC Power Supply Selection Required Switch Setting MicroLogix 1000 1200 or 1500 ch 0 port2 cable to port 2 on another AlC port2 yes external ion switch should be set to cable Cable 1747 CP3 1761 CBL Acoo Length 3 m 9 8 ft 45 cm 17 7 in Communication Connections 71 1761 CBL
173. The cursor is moved automatically to the target word position You can identify this change of data value is reflected to your RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro programming software as shown below 151 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 IN7 0 1300 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 a 17 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 17 20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 41 0 Columns 10 HG I o NT Properties Usage Help TIP After changing the data value of a target word press the OK key to apply the changes or press the ESC key to discard the changes Using the LCD 105 10 Now we will view an example of the data value of a protected property If LCD Edit Disable is set to checked enable the Protected message will be displayed and this data file cannot be edited by the LCD Data File Properties E General File 7 Type N Name INTEGER Desc Elements 256 Last 7 255 Attributes F Debug Skip When Deleting Unused Memory Scope Global Local To File LAD 2 MAIN_PROG Protection Constant C Static None Memory Module Download Web View Disable LCD Ec 11 Try to move the cursor to the data value position by pressing the OK key Because the N7 0 word is protected you will find that the cursor even does not move to the data value position IMPORTANT The maximum range of words you can monitor with the Integer File
174. The memory module can store one user program at a time During program transfers to or from the memory module the controller s RUN LED flashes Program Compare The memory module can also provide application security allowing you to specify that if the program stored in the memory module does not match the program in the controller the controller will not enter an executing run or test mode To enable this feature set the S 2 9 bit in the system status file See Status System File in the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual Publication 1766 001 for more information Data File Download Protection The memory module supports data file download protection This allows user data to be saved not overwritten during a download TIP Data file download protection is only functional if the processor does not have a fault size of all protected data files in the memory module exactly match the size of protected data files within the controller and all protected data files are of the same type See Protecting Data Files During Download in the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual Publication 1766 01 Memory Module Write Protection The memory module supports write once read many behavior Write protection is enabled using your programming software IMPORTANT Once set write protection cannot be removed A change cannot be made to the contr
175. UM001G EN P May 2012 258 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 For the MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers Channel Configuration E xi General Channel 0 Channel 1 Chan 1 DNP3 Channel2 DNP3 Slave DNP3 Slave r Application Layer Enable Confirmation Max Response Size 2048 Confirmation Timeout 1 ms 0000 Number of 0 Select Timeout x1 sf 0 Time Sync Interval 1 mins 0 Enable Time Sync On Start Up Only Channel for Unsolicited Responses Send Init Unsol Null Resp on Restart Enable Unsolicited On Start Up Class Class2 Class3 Enable Unsolicited for Class r r Number of Events 10 fio fio Hold Time after Events x1 Default Variation m DNP3 Object File Numbers Binary Output 11 Counter 16bits 1 2 2 Counter 32bits 1 3 E Frozen Counter 16bits Frozen Counter 32bits Analog Input 16bits 14 Analog Input 32bits 1 s Analog Input Short Floating 1 fie 5 Analog Output 165its 17 Analog Output 32bits fie Analog Output Short Floating Double Bit Input 20 Small BCD jo 35 Data Files Config Files Class Flag OL T D Binary Input o fo T D Threshold Deadband Contig File Number o a a Numbers of Files Prototypes fo Descriptors o o Secure Authentication Enable Secu
176. User Manual Allen Bradley MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Catalog Numbers 1766 L32BWA 1766 L32AWA 1766 L32BXB 1766 L32BWAA 1766 L32AWAA 1766 L32BXBA i 42 4 4 j 5 3 H fi hi EN p la x a Allen Bradley Rockwell Software Automation Important User Information Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls publication SGI 1 1 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at http www rockwellautomation com literature describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams
177. W8 228 g 0 50 Ibs 1762 0W16 285 g 0 63 Ibs 1762 0X6l 220 g 0 485 Ibs 1762 1080W6 280 g 0 62 Ibs Voltage category AC DC normally AC DC normally AC DC Type C Relay AC DC normally open relay open relay open relay Operating voltage 5 265V AC 5 265V AC 5 265V AC 5 265V AC range 5 125V DC 5 125V DC 5 125V DC 5 125V DC Number of outputs 8 16 6 6 Bus current draw max 80 mA at 5V DC 140 mA at 5V DC 110 mA at 5V DC 110 mA at 5V DC 0 40W 0 70w 0 55W 80 mA at 24V DC 90 mA at 24V DC 180 mA at24V DC 110 mA at 24V DC 2 16W 4 32w 2 64W Heat dissipation 2 9 W e1w 28W 5 0 W at 30V DC 4 4 W at 26 4V DC The Watts per point plus the minimum W with all points energized Signal delay max resistive load On Delay 10 ms Off Delay 10 ms On Delay 10 ms Off Delay 10 ms On Delay 10 ms max 6 ms typical Off Delay 20 ms max On delay 10 ms max Off delay 10 ms max 12 ms typical Off state leakage max 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA On state current min 10mA 10 mA 100 mA 10 mA On state voltage drop Not Applicable max Continuous current 2 5 A Also see Relay Contact Ratings on 7 A Also see Relay 2 5 A Also see point max page 165 Contact Ratings on Relay Contact page 166 Ratings on page 165 Continuous current per 8A 8A 7 A Also see Relay 8A common max Contact Ra
178. Wire without Spade Lugs When wiring without spade lugs it is recommended to keep the finger safe covers in place Loosen the terminal screw and route the wires through the opening in the finger safe cover Tighten the terminal screw making sure the pressure plate secures the wire 7 1 Finger safe cover 44527 Wire with Spade Lugs The diameter of the terminal screw head is 5 5 mm 0 220 in The input and output terminals of the MicroLogix 1400 controller are designed for a 6 35 mm 0 25 in wide spade standard for 6 screw for up to 14 AWG or a 4 mm metric 4 fork terminal Wire Your Controller 29 Using Surge Suppressors When using spade lugs use a small flat blade screwdriver to pry the finger safe cover from the terminal blocks as shown below Then loosen the terminal screw Finger safe cover Because of the potentially high current surges that occur when switching inductive load devices such as motor starters and solenoids the use of some type of surge suppression to protect and extend the operating life of the controllers output contacts is required Switching inductive loads without surge suppression can significantly reduce the life expectancy of relay contacts By adding a suppression device directly across the coil of an inductive device you prolong the life of the output or relay contacts You also reduce the effects of voltage transients and electrical noise from radiating into adjacent sy
179. all points enabled Normal mode rejection ratio 70 dB minimum at 50 Hz with the 10 or 50 Hz filter selected 70 dB minimum at 60 Hz with the 10 or 60 Hz filter selected Typical accuracy Autocalibration enabled at 25 C 77 F ambient with module operating temperature at 25 77 F 1 0 5 C F for Pt 385 0 15 Qfor 150 Qrange 0 4 C F for Pt 3916 0 5 Qfor 500 Qrange 0 2 C F for Ni 1 0 Qfor 1 000 Qrange 0 3 C F for NiFe 1 5 Qfor 3 000 Qrange 0 6 C F for Cu Typical accuracy Autocalibration enabled at 0 55 C 32 131 F 0 9 C F for Pt 385 0 25 Qfor 150 Qrange 0 8 C F for Pt 3916 0 8 Qfor 500 Qrange 0 4 C F for Ni 1 5 Qfor 1 000 Qrange 0 5 C F for NiFe 2 5 Qfor 3 000 Qrange 1 1 C F for Cu Accuracy drift at 0 55 32 131 F 0 026 C C 0 026 F F for Pt 385 0 023 C C 0 023 F F for Pt 3916 0 012 C C 0 012 F F for Ni 0 015 C C 0 015 F F for NiFe 0 032 C C 0 032 F F for Cu 0 007 Q C 0 012 Q F for 150 Qrange 0 023 Q C 0 041 Q F for 500 Q range 0 043 0 077 Q F for 1 000 Q range 0 07 20 0 130 F for 3 000 Q range Excitation current source 0 5 mA and 1 0 mA selectable per channel Open circuit detection 6 1212 ms Input channel configuration Via configuration software screen or the user progr
180. am by writing a unique bit pattern into the module s configuration file Refer to your controller s user manual to determine if user program configuration is supported Calibration The module performs autocalibration on channel enable and on a configuration change between channels You can also program the module to calibrate every five minutes Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 172 Specifications Input Specifications 1762 IR4 Specification Maximum overload at input terminals 1762 IR4 35V DC continuous Cable impedance max 25 Q Operating with gt 25 Q will reduce accuracy Channel to channel isolation 10V DC 1 Accuracy is dependent upon the Analog Digital converter filter rate selection excitation current selection data format and input noise 2 Open circuit detection time is equal to channel update time Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Input Specifications 1762 IT4 Specification Heat dissipation Value 1 5 Total Watts The Watts per point plus the minimum Watts with all points energized Response speed per channel Input filter and configuration dependent Rated working voltage 30V AC 30V DC Normal mode rejection ratio 85 dB minimum at 50 Hz with 10 Hz or 50 Hz filter 85 dB minimum at 60 Hz with 10 Hz or 60 Hz filter Cable impedance max 25 Q for specified accuracy Open circuit detection time 7 ms 1 515 502
181. amage United States Only f the controller is installed within a potentially hazardous environment all wiring must comply with the requirements stated in the National Electrical Code 501 10 b Allow for at least 50 mm 2 in between I O wiring ducts or terminal strips and the controller Route incoming power to the controller by a path separate from the device wiring Where paths must cross their intersection should be perpendicular TIP Do not run signal or communications wiring and power wiring in the same conduit Wires with different signal characteristics should be routed by separate paths Publication 1766 UM001G EN P 2012 28 Wire Your Controller Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Separate wiring by signal type Bundle wiring with similar electrical characteristics together Separate input wiring from output wiring Label wiring to all devices in the system Use tape shrink tubing or other dependable means for labeling purposes In addition to labeling use colored insulation to identify wiring based on signal characteristics For example you may use blue for DC wiring and red for AC wiring Wire Requirements Wire Size 2 wire maximum per terminal screw Wire Type z 1 wire per terminal 2 wire per terminal Solid Cu 90 C 194 F 412 to 20 AWG 16 to 20 AWG Stranded Cu 90 C 194 F 14 to 20 AWG 18 to 20 AWG Wiring torque 0 56 Nm 5 0 in Ib rated
182. ame connection The MicroLogix 1400 firmware supports duplicate IP address detection In Series duplicate IP address detection can be disabled in the Channel 1 configuration in order to eliminate this source of broadcast traffic for low bandwidth applications When you change the IP address or connect one of the MicroLogix to an EtherNet IP network the MicroLogix 1400 controller checks to make sure that the IP address assigned to this device does not match the address of any other network device The MicroLogix 1400 will check every 2 minutes for a duplicate IP address on the network If the MicroLogix 1400 determines that there is a conflict another device on the network with a matching IP address the following message gets posted on the LCD display 090000 RU IP CONFLI CT To correct this conflict use the instructions in this chapter to change the IP address of the Ethernet IP device Then cycle power to the device or reset the device such as disconnecting the ethernet cable and reconnecting the cable There is also the possibility that two Ethernet IP device can detect a conflict simultaneously If this occurs remove the device with the incorrect IP address correct its conflict To get the second device out of conflict mode cycle power to the module or disconnect its ethernet cable and reconnect the cable The MicroLogix 1400 will check every 2 minutes for a duplicate IP address on the network Publication 1766 UM001
183. ange or all 129 response 17 28 index 32 bit with flag 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 23 2 Frozen Counter Event 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index 16 bit with flag 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 23 5 Frozen Counter Event 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index 32 bit with flag and 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp time 23 6 Frozen Counter Event 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index 16 bit with flag and 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp time 30 0 Analog Input Any 1 read 06 no range or all Variation 30 1 Analog Input 32 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop with flag 30 2 Analog Input 16 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop with flag 30 3 Analog Input 32 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop without flag 30 4 Analog Input 16 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop without flag 30 5 Analog Input 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop Single prec flt pt with flag 32 0 Analog Input Event 1 read 06 no range or all Any Variation 07 08 limited qty 32 1 Analog Input Event 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index 32 bit without time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 32 2 Analog Input Event 1 read 06 no range
184. ange is 9 252 or 0 for disable Number of The number of User Provided Web Pages provided the Starting Data File Number is 1 read write Pages non zero The range is 1 8 DNP3 over IP When DNP3 over IP is enabled checked the MicroLogix 1400 enables DNP3 over IP 0 disable read write Enable feature on Ethernet channel Power cycle is required for changes to take effect Modbus TCP When Modbus TCP is enabled checked the MicroLogix 1400 enables Modbus TCP 0 disable read write Enable feature on Ethernet channel Power cycle is required for changes to take effect Disable When EtherNet IP Incoming Connections is disabled checked the MicroLogix 1400 does 0 disable read write EtherNet IP not allow the incoming EtherNet IP connection However MicroLogix 1400 can send the Incoming outgoing EtherNet IP commands to other EtherNet IP devices Power cycle is required for Connections changes to take effect Disable When Duplicate IP Address Detection is disabled checked the MicroLogix 1400 does not 0 disable read write Duplicate IP send any packets to the network to detect Duplicate IP on the same network Address Detection Configuration Using Refer to the online documentation provided with your programming software RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro Programming Software Configuration Via BOOTP BOOTP bootstrap protocol is a low level protocol that TCP IP nodes use to obtain start up information By default the MicroLogix 1400 broadcasts BOOTP
185. ansfer Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 206 Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System Invalid Catalog Number Invalid Catalog Number The catalog number of the selected device does not match the catalog number selected in the Catalog Number dialog Press F1 For more information Lx This error message is displayed if the ControlFLASH tool is unable to match the processor to the catalog number that was selected in the Catalog Number dialog box To clear this error 1 Click the OK button to go to the Catalog Number dialog box 2 Select the correct catalog number in the dialog box and proceed with the update 3 Restart the firmware upgrade procedure as described in the section Using ControlFLASH for Firmware Upgrade on page 195 Target Module Not in Proper State for Programming Q Target module not in proper state for programming OK This error message is displayed when the target module is not in a proper state for programming To clear this error 1 Put the controller in the PROGRAM mode 2 Restart the firmware upgrade procedure as described in the section Using ControlFLASH for Firmware Upgrade on page 195 If the error occurs again cycle power and restart the firmware upgrade process Failed to Receive Initial TFTP Request from Target 9 Fated to receive niti TFTP requost from target Module will need to be reset I this problem persists may moan that a router gateway between t
186. ar 10 frz cl noack 20 6 Counter 16 bit without flag 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 20 6 Counter 16 bit without flag 7 freeze 06 no range or all 8 freeze noack 9 freeze clear 10 frz cl noack 21 0 Frozen Counter Any 1 read 00 01 start stop Variation 06 no range or all 21 1 Frozen Counter 32 bit with 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop flag 21 2 Frozen Counter 16 bit with 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop flag 06 no range or all 21 5 Frozen Counter 32 bit with 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop flag and time 06 no range or all 21 6 Frozen Counter 16 bit with 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop flag and time 06 no range or all 21 9 Frozen Counter 32 bit 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop without flag 06 no range or all 21 10 Frozen Counter 16 bit 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop without flag 06 no range or all 22 0 Counter Event Any 1 read 06 no range or all Variation 07 08 limited qty 22 1 Counter Event 32 bit with 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index flag 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 22 2 Counter Event 16 bit with 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index flag 07 08
187. aracteristics for serial binary communication circuits A single ended serial communication interface run mode This is an executing mode during which the controller scans or executes the ladder program monitors input devices energizes output devices and acts on enabled I O forces rung Ladder logic is comprised of a set of rungs A rung contains input and output instructions During Run mode the inputs on a rung are evaluated to be true false If a path of true logic exists the outputs are made true If all paths are false the outputs are made false save To upload transfer a program stored in memory from a controller to a personal computer OR to save a program to a computer hard disk scan time The time required for the controller to execute the instructions in the program The scan time may vary depending on the instructions and each instruction s status during the scan Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 380 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P 2012 sinking A term used to describe current flow between an I O device and controller I O circuit typically a sinking device or circuit provides a path to ground low or negative side of power supply sourcing A term used to describe current flow between an I O device and controller I O circuit typically a sourcing device or circuit provides a path to the soutce high or positive side of power supply status The condition of a circuit o
188. as AIC catalog number 1761 NET AIC because Channel 0 is isolated However you need to use an AIC to connect your PC or other MicroLogix Family products such as MicroLogix 1200 to a DH 485 network Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Communication Connections 75 The following figure shows the external wiring connections and specifications of the AIC 3 2 AIC Advanced Interface Converter 1761 NET AIC e 4 1 2e lo C 80 3 5 Item Description 1 Port 1 DB 9 RS 232 DTE 2 Port 2 mini DIN 8 RS 232 DTE 3 Port 3 RS 485 Phoenix plug 4 DC Power Source selector switch cable port 2 power source external external power source connected to item 5 5 Terminals for external 24V DC power supply and chassis ground For additional information on connecting the AIC refer to the Advanced Interface Converter AIC User Manual publication 1761 UM001 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 76 Communication Connections Cable Selection Guide 761 CBL APOO 1761 02 2 44600 Cable 1761 CBL APoo 2 1761 2 Length 45 cm 17 7 in 2 m 6 5 ft Power Extemal Selection Connections from to AIC Power Supply
189. ask field at the default If you are Then manually configuring channel 1 ebe sure the BOOTP enable field is disabled and have a network with subnets use your programming software to enter the subnet mask and gateway address using BOOTP to configure channel ebe sure BOOTP is enabled 1 and have a network with einclude the subnet mask s and gateway address es subnets Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface 365 Manually Configuring Channel 1 for Controllers on Subnets If you are manually configuring channel 1 for a MicroLogix 1400 controller located on a subnet deselect both of the BOOTP Enable and DHCP Enable options by clicking on the checked box as shown in the figure below Channel Configuration General Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Driver Hardware Address 999295953 Dijo IP Address 192 168 0 10 Subnet 255 255 255 0 Gateway Address 0 0 0 0 User Provided Web Pages Default Domain Name 3 Starting Data File Number Primary Name Server Number of Pages Secondary Name Server Protocol Control BOOTP Enable DHCP Enable Msg Connection Timeout x 1118 1150007 SNMP Server Enable 7 SMTP Client Enable Msg Reply Timeout 1mS 3000 HTTP Server Enable Auto Negotiate Port Setting 10 100 Mbps Full Duplex Half Duplex gt Inactivity Timeout Min 30 Contact Location See t
190. at 25 C Input impedance Voltage Terminal 200 KQ Voltage Terminal 200 KO gt 10 MQ gt 10 MQ Current Terminal 250 Q Current Terminal 275 Current input protection 32 mA 32 mA NA NA Voltage input protection 30V 30V NA NA Channel diagnostics Over or under range or open circuit condition by bit reporting for analog inputs Over or under range or open circuit condition by bit reporting for analog inputs Over or under range or open circuit condition by bit reporting for analog inputs 1 For proper operation both the plus and minus input terminals must be within 27V 10V for 1762 IT4 of analog common 2 Vem 1 Vpkepk AC 3 Vom 0 includes offset gain non linearity and repeatability error terms 4 Only applicable to Series 1 0 modules Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Over or under range or open circuit condition by bit reporting for analog inputs Input Specifications 1762 IR4 Specification Input types Specifications 171 1762 IR4 e 100 Platinum 385 e 200 Q Platinum 385 500 Q Platinum 385 e 1 000 Q Platinum 385 e 100 Q Platinum 3916 e 200 Q Platinum 3916 e500 Q Platinum 3916 e 1 000 2 Platinum 3916 e 10 Q Copper 426 e 120 Q Nickel 672 e 120 Q Nickel 618 604 Q Nickel Iron 518 0 150 Q e 0 500 Q e 1 000 Q e 0 3 000 Q Heat dissipation 1 5 Total Watts The Watts per point plus the minimum Watts with
191. at least one unconfirmed event is lost IIN2 4 ALREADY EXECUTING Not supported TIN2 5 CONFIG_CORRUPT This bit is set when a bad file type and bad file number are detected IN2 6 Reserved IN2 7 Reserved You can access the last transmitted IIN bits in the response through accessing the element of Communication Status file CS0 58 or CS2 58 For more details see Diagnostics All of the DNP3 Objects which are supported in the MicroLogix 1400 are summarized in Implementation Table on page 338 Data file types used in DNP3 Objects are not the same as that used in the MicroLogix controller but are similar Mapping is required between DNP3 data files and MicroLogix 1400 data files Overview DNP3 Data objects that are implemented in the MicroLogix 1400 controller are listed below DNP3 Binary Input Object NP3 Double Bit Binary Input Object NP3 Binary Output Object NP3 Counter Object NP3 Frozen Counter Object NP3 Analog Input Object NP3 Analog Output Object NP3 BCD Object DNP3 Data Set Object Series B controllers only J 0 109 Some of objects are divided into several Object files to map data files in the MicroLogix 1400 controller Counter Object 16bit and 32bit Counter Object File Analog Input Object 16bit and 32bit Analog Input Object File and Short Floating Point Analog Input Object File Analog Output Object 16bit and 32bit Analog Output Object File a
192. ated Object File Number Binary Output Object File Number Related Configuration File Number Binary Output Config File Number Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 267 To generate a Binary Output Object from the DNP3 Subsystem in the controller you should configure Binary Output Object File Number in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file When the Binary Output Object File is configured Index number starts from 0 1 bit is used for 1 Index As an example a Binary Output Object File is configured as shown below This file has 10 elements and 160 Binary Output points Index 0 of the Binary Output Object is B11 0 0 Index 1 is B11 0 1 and Index 159 is B11 9 15 File 811 bin Binary Output Object File a o oo cac 9 oo Oo O O oO oO c e ES e m c ce oo o E e 7 817 070 Padi D ner 5 0 Colunns 16 7 Er Properties Usage Help As an example a Binary Output Config File shown below has 10 elements
193. ational Standards Institute ANSI X3 28 1976 specification subcategory D1 and 2 way simultaneous transmission with embedded responses subcategory 1 The MicroLogix controller supports the DF1 Full Duplex protocol via RS 232 connection to external devices such as computers or other controllers that support DF1 Full Duplex Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 210 Connecting to Networks via RS 232 RS 485 Interface DF1 Half Duplex Protocol Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 DF1 is an open protocol Refer to DF1 Protocol and Command Set Reference Manual publication 1770 6 5 16 for more information DF1 Full Duplex protocol also referred to as DF1 point to point protocol is useful where RS 232 point to point communication is required DF1 protocol controls message flow detects and signals errors and retries if errors are detected Example Full Duplex Connections For information about required network connecting equipment see Chapter 4 Communication Connections Personal Computer Personal Computer 4 cans 1761 CBL PM02 Null modem adapter 44608 Half Duplex protocol is multi drop single master multiple slave network DF1 Half Duplex protocol supports data transparency American National Standards Institute ANSI X3 28 1976 specification subcategory D1 In contrast to D
194. atus The Ethernet configuration screen of the LCD displays the MAC and IP addresses assigned to the controller Follow these steps to view the Ethernet configuration for your controller 1 N 4A Using the LCD 121 On the Main Menu screen select Advanced Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad as shown below If the menu items shown in the figure below are not displayed on the Main Menu screen you need to scroll down the screen by pressing the Down key 000000 REMOTE User Display b dvanced Set Press the OK key on the LCD keypad The Advanced Set Menu screen is displayed as shown below 000000 KeyIn Mode DCOHH Cfg Cfg If ENET Cfg is selected press the OK key Otherwise select ENET Cfg using the Up and Down keys and then press the OK key The Ethernet Configuration screen is displayed Press the OK key on the LCD Status menu 000000 HEHUTE ENET Cfg Status IP Address Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 122 Using the LCD Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 5 When an IP address is not yet assigned to your controller only the MAC address that is assigned to your controller represented as XXXXXXXXXXXX below is displayed MAC address is 12 digit hexadecimal number Your controller ships with a unique MAC address assigned in the factory You can identify the MAC address of your controller by opening the e
195. bTrimPot Set System Info Fault Code Trim pot data is updated continuously whenever the controller is powered up Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 132 Using the LCD Changing Data Value of a Trim Pot Follow these steps to change the data value of a trim pot either POTO or 1 On the Main Menu screen select TrimPot Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad 000000 bTrimPot Set System Info Fault Code 2 Then press the OK key on the LCD keypad The Trim Pot Select screen is displayed as shown below 000000 Trimpot Set LCD LCD B The last trim pot whose data value you changed is selected by default If you ate accessing to this screen for the first time is selected by default RU RU Select a ttim pot either POTO or POT1 whose data value you want to change using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad In this example we will select POTO 4 Then press the OK key on the LCD keypad The Trim Pot 0 screen is displayed as shown below 000000 THIN THAK POTH Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Using the LCD 133 TMIN and TMAX indicate the range of data value for the trim pots both and POT1 The factory default for TMIN TMAX and POTO values are 0 250 and 0 in decimal respectively TMIN and TMAX on this screen are read only but you can change them using the LCD Function File in
196. be mounted horizontally as illustrated TIP For environments with greater vibration and shock concerns use the panel mounting method described below instead of DIN rail mounting Panel Mounting Use the dimensional template shown below to mount the module The preferred mounting method is to use two M4 or 8 panhead screws per module Mounting screws ate required on every module For more than 2 modules number of modules 1 x 40 mm 1 59 in SR dy 100 06 90 MicroLogix 3 939 3 54 1400 E E E viv i d ll J 7 D NOTE All dimensions are in mm A 40 4 inches Hole spacing tolerance 165 mm 6 497 in 15 44568 0 4 mm 0 016 in Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 26 Install Your Controller Connecting Expansion 1 0 The expansion I O module is attached to the controller or another I O module by means of a flat ribbon cable after mounting as shown below TIP TIP Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 SS v 44975 Use the pull loop on the connector to disconnect modules Do not pull on the ribbon cable Up to seven expansion 1 0 modules can be connected to a controller ATTENTION Remove power before removing or inserting an 1 0 module When you remove or insert a module with power applied an electrical arc may occur An electrical arc can cause personal injury or property
197. be required to supply high inrush current Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 12 Install Your Controller Preventing Excessive Heat Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 The power up sequence of devices in a system The amount of the power source voltage sag if the inrush current cannot be supplied The effect of voltage sag on other equipment in the system If the entire system is powered up at the same time a brief sag in the power source voltage typically will not affect any equipment Loss of Power Source The power supply is designed to withstand brief power losses without affecting the operation of the system The time the system is operational during power loss is called program scan hold up time after loss of power The duration of the power supply hold up time depends on the type and state of the I O but is typically between 10 milliseconds and 3 seconds When the duration of power loss reaches this limit the power supply signals the processor that it can no longer provide adequate DC power to the system This is referred to as a power supply shutdown The processor then performs an orderly shutdown of the controller Input States on Power Down The power supply hold up time as described above is generally longer than the turn on and turn off times of the inputs Because of this the input state change from to Off that occurs when power is removed may be recorded by the processor before
198. before installing a netwotk are discussed in the following sections Hardware Considerations You need to decide the length of the communication cable where you route it and how to protect it from the environment where it will be installed When the communication cable is installed you need to know how many devices are to be connected during installation and how many devices will be added in the future The following sections help you understand and plan the network Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 216 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P 2012 Connecting to Networks via RS 232 RS 485 Interface Number of Devices and Length of Communication Cable The maximum length of the communication cable is 1219 m 4000 ft This is the total cable distance from the first node to the last node in a segment However two segments can be used to extend the DH 485 network to 2438 m 8000 ft For additional information on connections using the AIC refer to the Advanced Interface Converter AIC User Manual publication 1761 6 4 Planning Cable Routes Follow these guidelines to help protect the communication cable from electrical interference Keep the communication cable at least 1 52 m 5 ft from any electric motors transformers rectifiers generators arc welders induction furnaces of sources of microwave radiation If you must run the cable across power feed lines run the cable at right angles to the lines
199. buffer DNP3 Master should poll for Class 2 events When the selection is Enabled Checked Unsolicited Response is enabled for Class 2 events Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 239 Enable Unsolicited For Class3 Valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked When the selection is Disabled Unchecked Unsolicited Response is disabled for Class 3 events To prevent overflowing of the event buffer DNP3 Master should poll for Class 3 events When the selection is Enabled Checked Unsolicited Response is enabled for Class 3 events Send Initial Unsolicited Null Response On Start Up Valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked When the selection is Disabled Unchecked the MicroLogix 1400 does not send Unsolicited NULL Response with RESTART IIN bit on startup When the selection is Enabled Checked the MicroLogix 1400 sends Unsolicited NULL Response with RESTART bit on startup Enable Confirmation Valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked When the selection is Disabled Unchecked the MicroLogix 1400 sends Response packets with CON bit set in its header under the following conditions only When the response has Event data When the response is multi fragment response When the Unsolicited Response is sent When t
200. by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad 000000 10 Status Monitoring Switch 2 Then press the OK key on the LCD keypad The Mode Switch screen is displayed as shown below 000000 I O Status Monitoring Switch The arrow indicates current Mode Switch position RU RU 3 When the Up or Down key is pressed the mode indicated by the arrow starts to blink if the mode is different from the current mode of controller Press OK key to set the controller to the mode indicated by the arrow Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Using the LCD 115 Using a User Defined LCD Screen 4 If you have finished changing mode switch position press the ESC key to return to the Main Menu screen as shown in step 1 The MicroLogix 1400 controller allows you to use user defined LCD screens instead of the default built in screens To use a user defined screen you need to create a group of appropriate instructions using the LCD instruction in your application program For more information on how to create a user defined LCD screen refer to the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 001 By using the User Display menu item you can change from the default built in screens to a user defined screen and back on the LCD Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 116 Using the LCD User Defined LCD Screen Follow these steps t
201. c FC Counterz 0 Data file Num lasterrorrequest 0 Trans Solicited Res FC Counterz 0 Data element Num lasterrorrequest 0 Trans Unsolicited Res FC Counter 0 Transport Layer Error Code D Number of events to be reported Transport Layer Error Count 0 FC Function Code Res Response Trans Transmitted Diagnostics for Ethernet Channel Channel 1 This feature is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 327 Diagnostic Counters and Errors in DNP3 Slave subsystem for the Ethernet channel are logged in the Data File The data file is configured in the parameter Diagnostic File Number This table shows the 80 words of the data file for the troubleshooting Category TCP Server Link Layer Diagnostics for DNP3 TCP Server Word Offset Description 0 Counter for Commands Received 1 Counter for Commands Received with Error 2 Counter for Replies Sent 3 Reserved 4 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Error Count in sessions 7 Error Code in sessions 8 Incoming Message Connections 9 Maximum Connections Allowed 10 Counter for Commands Transmitted 11 Reserved 12 Counter for Replies Received 13 Reserved 14 Reserved 15 Reserved 16 Reserved 17 Reserved 18 Reserved 19 Reserved Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 328 Micrologix 14
202. cation Layer Error Count 62 Function Code that caused the last error 63 Last Transmitted IIN in the response 64 Data file number of last error request 65 Data element number of last error request 66 Received Confirm Function Code Counter 67 Received Read Function Code Counter 68 Received Write Function Code Counter 69 Received Function Code Counter other than Confirm Read and Write Function Codes 70 Transmitted Solicited Response Function Code Counter 7 Transmitted Unsolicited Response Function Code Counter 72 Number of events to be reported Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Category DNP3 Slave Application Layer Diagnostics for DNP3 Slave Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 331 Word Offset Description Category 73 Transport Function Layer Error Codes 0 NO_ERROR No error found in the Transport Layer 1 DISCARD_NOT_FIRST_SEG The received packet was discarded since it was not a first segment 2 DISCARD_DUPLICATED_AND_MORE_SEG The received packet was discarded since it had the same sequence number as previous more segments are expected 3 DISCARD_DUPLICATED_AND_FINAL_SEG The received packet was discarded since it had the same sequence number as previous final segment received 4 DISCARD_OUT_OF_ORDER_SEG The received packet was discarded since the sequence number was out of order 74 Transport Layer Error Count 75 Reserved 76 Reserved 7 Re
203. changes to the ladder program We recommend developing your program offline since ladder rung logic changes take effect immediately after testing your edits Improper machine operation may occur causing personnel injury or equipment damage Online Editing 149 Edit Functions in Runtime Online Editing During a runtime online editing session the processor s executing ladder logic The edit zone markers tell the processor that changes exist but the changes are not executed until you test the edits Deleted and replaced modified rungs are not removed from the program and inserted rungs are not executed until you assemble or test the edits Edit Functions in Program Online Editing During a program online editing session the processor 27 not executing ladder logic This mode is like the offline editing mode Note that if a runtime online editing session was performed prior to entering the offline editing mode edit marked rungs I R and D appear in the program If you perform a program online edit once you accept or delete the rung the edits take effect immediately and the power rail is displayed as a solid line If you edit a rung with edit zone markers the markers are removed when the rung is accepted Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 150 Online Editing Notes Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 General Specifications Description Dimensions HxWxD Specifications 1766 L32AWA A 90 x 1
204. controllers the VDC NEUT or common terminal of the power supply is also connected to chassis ground internally Wiring Diagrams Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 This product is intended to be mounted to a well grounded mounting surface such as a metal panel Refer to the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 for additional information Additional grounding connections from the mounting tab or DIN rail if used are not required unless the mounting surface cannot be grounded TIP Use all four mounting positions for panel mounting installation 44519 Grounding stamping ATTENTION Remove the protective debris strip before applying power to the controller Failure to remove the strip may cause the controller to overheat The following illustrations show the wiring diagrams for the MicroLogix 1400 controllers Controllers with DC inputs can be wired as either sinking or sourcing inputs Sinking and sourcing does not apply to AC inputs Refer to Sinking and Sourcing Wiring Diagrams on page 36 The controller terminal block layouts are shown below The shading on the labels indicates how the terminals are grouped TIP Wire Your Controller 33 This symbol denotes a protective earth ground terminal which provides a low impedance path between electrical circuits and earth for safety purposes and provides noise immu
205. crements Poll Timeout only applies when a slave device initiates a MSG instruction It is the amount of time that the slave device waits for a poll from the master device If the slave device does not receive a poll within the Poll Timeout a MSG instruction error is generated and the ladder program needs to requeue the MSG instruction If you are using a MSG instruction it is recommended that a Poll Timeout value of zero not be used Poll Timeout is disabled when set to zero RTS Off Delay x20 ms 0 65 535 can be set in 20 ms increments Specifies the delay time between when the last serial character is sent to the modem and when RTS is deactivated Gives the modem extra time to transmit the last character of a packet RTS Send Delay x20 ms 0 65 535 can be set in 20 ms increments Specifies the time delay between setting RTS until checking for the CTS response For use with modems that are not ready to respond with CTS immediately upon receipt of RTS Message Retries 0 255 Specifies the number of times a slave device attempts to resend a message packet when it does not receive an ACK from the master device For use in noisy environments where message packets may become corrupted in transmission Pre Transmit Delay x1 ms 0 65 535 can be set in 1 ms increments e When the Control Line is set to no handshaking this is the delay time before transmission Required for 1761 NET AIC physical Half Duplex ne
206. cription 0 ONLINE 0 when the controller is or was in Non Executing mode 1 when the controller is or was in Executing mode 1 RESTART Always 0 Not used 2 COMM_LOST Always 0 Not used 3 REMOTE_FORCED Always 0 Not used 4 LOCAL_FORCED Always 0 Not used 5 reserved Always 0 Not used 6 reserved Always 0 Not used 7 reserved Always 0 Not used Object Flags for Analog Output for Series B controllers Bit Offset Name Description 0 ONLINE 0 when the controller is or was in Non Executing mode 1 when the controller is or was in Executing mode and the configuration file does not exist May be 1 when the controller is in Executing mode and the configuration file exists 1 0 when the controller is or was in Non Executing mode 0 when the controller is or was in Executing mode and the configuration file 2 COMM_LOST does not exist 3 REMOTE_FORCED May be 1 when the controller is in Executing mode and the configuration file 4 LOCAL FORCED SMS 5 reserved 6 reserved 7 reserved DNP3 Device Attribute Object Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 The Device Attribute object can be used to identify DNP3 Slave devices With the MicroLogix 1400 some of the vatiations are written so that you can read or wtite yout own strings in your application The object group of the Device Attribute object is 0 The supported range of the variation is 211 255 The R W property shows if the object is Read Only Read or Write If the
207. croLogix 1500 MicroLogix dicar Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 44598 Modbus Communication Protocol ASCII Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Connecting to Networks RS 232 RS 485 Interface 221 Typical 3 Node Network PanelView 550 PanelView M MicroLogix 1400 a RJ45 port 1761 CBL ASO9 or 1761 CBL AS03 TS OUO 1761 CBL AMOO Jp TT 1761 CBL ACOO or 1761 CBL HMO2 B ELL I LJ g Ti TIP This 3 node network is not expandable Modbus is a Half Duplex master slave communications protocol The Modbus network master reads and writes coils and registers Modbus protocol allows a single master to communicate with a maximum of 247 slave devices MicroLogix 1400 controllers support Modbus RTU Master and Modbus RTU Slave protocol For more information on configuring your MicroLogix 1400 controller for Modbus protocol refer to the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 RM001 For more information about the Modbus protocol see the Modbus Protocol Specifica
208. croLogix 1400 controllers support various protocols on the RS 485 network including DH 485 DF1 Half Duplex Master Slave Modbus RTU Master Slave ASCII and DNP3 Slave protocols In this section DH 485 protocol is used as an example Any physical connection should be the same as other protocols Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Communication Connections 69 DH 485 Configuration Parameters When MicroLogix communications are configured for DH 485 the following parameters can be changed DH 485 Configuration Parameters Parameter Options Baud Rate 9600 19 2 KBps Node Address 1 31 decimal Token Hold Factor 1 4 See Software Considerations on page 217 for tips on setting the parameters listed above Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 70 Communication Connections DH 485 Network with a MicroLogix 1400 Controller AIC AIC 25 z amp PanelView e j Seo n T L1 Ld SLC 5 04 PanelView 550 DH 485 Network AIC AIC AIC AIC a Ee 2 ele B m D d MicroLogix MicroLogix 1400 LM MicroLogix MicroLogix 1000 1500 DH 485 Ne
209. ct File is configured Index number starts from 0 1 bit is used for 1 Index As an example a Binary Input Object File is configured as shown below This file has 10 elements and 160 Binary Input points Index 0 of the Binary Input Object is B10 0 0 Index 1 is B10 0 1 and Index 159 is B10 9 15 Data File B10 bin Binary Input Object File 0 m 8 8 2 2 B O 65 O O0 O O O omg oO 2 2 E oO O E61 B A amp O0 988 OF cc 8 2 or Spee O 988 oo 8 8 e e ce 4 Rade es Dew B10 Properties Usage Help Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 266 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 As an example a Binary Input Config File shown below has 10 elements B30 0 0 and B30 0 1 can be configured for Class Level 0 1 2 or 3 for DNP3 Index 0 to 15 of the Binary Input Object File B30 1 0 and B30 1 1 can be configured for Class Level for DNP3 Index 16 to 31 of the Binary Input Object File D
210. ct throughout the upgrade process IMPORTANT If you are connecting to the controller through a hub you can use a standard Ethernet patch cable If you are connecting to the controller directly from your computer you need to use an Fthernet crossover cable Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 196 Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System The Welcome to ControIFLASH dialog box is displayed Welcome to ControlFLASH Welcome to ControlFLASH the firmware update tool ControlFLASH needs the following information from you before it can gt begin updating device Control is Catalog Number of the target device 2 The Network Configuration parameters optional 3 The Network Path to the target device 4 The Firmware Revision for this update ee 2 Click the Next button 3 Select the appropriate catalog number from the Catalog Number dialog box and click the Next button Catalog Number Enter the catalog number of the target device 1766LEC Control Bisco Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System 197 The AB_SNMP DLL Enter IP Address dialog box is displayed AB SNMP DLL Enter IP Address Enter the address of the target module name or dot notation 10 116 38 20 Device Identification Get Info Cancel 4 Type in the IP address for the processor IMPORTANT Use the IP addr
211. ction Set Reference Manual 1766 001 Description Information on the MicroLogix 1400 Controllers instruction set MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Installation Instructions 1766 IN001 Information on mounting and wiring the MicroLogix 1400 Controllers including a mounting template for easy installation Advanced Interface Converter User Manual 1761 UM004 A description on how to install and connect an AIC This manual also contains information on network wiring DeviceNet Interface User Manual 1761 UM005 Information on how to install configure and commission a DNI DF1 Protocol and Command Set Reference Manual 1770 6 5 16 Information on DF1 open protocol Modbus Protocol Specifications Available from www modbus org Information about the Modbus protocol Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Specifications Available from www dnp org Information about the Distributed Network Protocol Allen Bradley Programmable Controller Grounding and Wiring Guidelines 1770 4 1 In depth information on grounding and wiring Allen Bradley programmable controllers Application Considerations for Solid State Controls 961 11 description of important differences between solid state programmable controller products and hard wired electromechanical devices National Electrical Code Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA An article on wire sizes and t
212. ction that does not provide a continuous logical path on a ladder rung FIFO First In First Out The order that data is entered into and retrieved from a file file A collection of information organized into one group full duplex A bidirectional mode of communication where data may be transmitted and received simultaneously contrast with half duplex half duplex A communication link in which data transmission is limited to one direction at a time hard disk A storage atea in a personal computer that may be used to save processor files and reports for future use high byte Bits 8 to 15 of a word input device A device such as a push button or a switch that supplies signals to the input circuits of the controller inrush current The temporary surge current produced when a device or circuit is initially energized instruction A mnemonic and data address defining an operation to be performed by the processor A rung in a program consists of a set of input and output instructions The input instructions are evaluated by the controller as being true or false In turn the controller sets the output instructions to true or false instruction set The set of general purpose instructions available with a given controller I O Inputs and Outputs Consists of input and output devices that provide and or receive data from the controller Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 376 Publication 1766 UM
213. ction to another IP 0 undefined read write Address network A Gateway Address of all zeros indicates that no gateway has been configured In this case the controller assumes a Gateway Address of aaa bbb ccc 001 where aaa bbb ccc are the first three octets of the configured IP Address Default The default domain name can have the following formats NULL read write Domain Name a b c a b or a where a b c must start with a letter end with a letter or digit and undefined have as interior characters only letters digits or hyphens Maximum length is 63 characters Primary Name This is the IP address of the computer acting as the local Ethernet network Primary 0 undefined read write Server Domain Name System DNS server Secondary This is the IP address of the computer acting as the local Ethernet network Secondary 0 undefined read write Name Server Domain Name System DNS server BOOTP Enable The BOOTP enable switch When BOOTP is enabled the MicroLogix 1400 attempts to 1 enabled read write learn its network related parameters at powerup via a BOOTP request There must be a BOOTP server on the network capable of responding to this BOOTP request When both BOOTP and DHCP are disabled the MicroLogix 1400 uses the locally configured network related parameters IP Address Subnet Mask Broadcast Address etc DHCP Enable The DHCP auto configuration enable switch When DHCP is enabled a DHCP server O disabled read
214. ctive companies Summary of Changes To help you find new and updated information in this release of the manual we have included change bars as shown to the right of this paragraph Publication 1766 UM001G EN P 2012 Summary of Changes iv Firmware Revision History Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Features are added to the controllers through firmware upgrades See the latest release notes 1766 01 to be sure that your controller s firmware is at the level you need Firmware upgrades are not required except to allow you access to the new features You can only upgrade firmware within the same series of controller Table of Contents Summary of Changes Firmware Revision History iv Preface Who Should Use this Manuales seabed liu Ba a oru DS EE RR IHE xiii Purpose of this xiii Related Documentation xiv Common Techniques Used in this xiv Chapter 1 Hardware Overview Hardware 1 Component Descriptions bates ses 2 MicroLogix 1400 Memory Module and Built in Real Time Clock 2 1762 Expansion 3 Communication Cables pas obras ORE Mie Rc eco d 4 IESU s de desserts utu dU QN 5 Communication Options bx ich ne reader eee Rene 5 Chapter 2 Install Your Controller Agency Corti Cations eese cei ee toni e eas 7 Compliance to European Union Directives
215. current read write operation and close the file without saving This applies only to MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers FC ACTIVATE CONHG FC Byte Ox1F 31 Activate Config This function code is used to begin using the configuration or executable code specified by the objects included in the request This applies only to MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers FC_AUTHENTICATION_REQUEST FC Byte 0x20 32 Authentication Request The master uses this function code when sending authentication messages to the MicroLogix 1400 that require a response This applies only to MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers FC AUTHENTICATION REQUEST FC Byte 0x21 33 Authentication Request No Resp This function code is used by the master to send authentication messages when no return response is required This applies only to MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 255 FC_RESPONSE FC Byte 0x81 129 Response All responses except for Unsolicited Response messages use this function code FC UNSOLICITED RESPONSE FC Byte 0x82 130 Unsolicited Response Unsolicited Responses always use this function code regardless of which DNP3 objects are included FC AUTHENTICATION RESPONSE FC Byte 0x83 131 Authentication Response This function code is used to issue authentication messages to the master This applies only to MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers Int
216. d Init Unsol Null Resp on Restart Enable Unsolicited On Start Up Class Class2 Class3 Enable Unsolicited for Class 4 Number of Events 1 25 25 Hold Time after Events x1 sho 120 f 20 DNP3 Object File Numbers Binary Input IN Binary Output fioo Counter 16bits 102 Counter 32bits fios Frozen Counter 15bits Frozen Counter 32bits Analog Input 16bits fioe Analog Input 32bits Analog Input Short Floating ios Analog Output 16bits fios Analog Output 32bits no Analog Output Short Floating mr Double Bit Input 112 132 Small BCD 0 0 HA 23 125 EJ ir E DNP3 Slave configuration is shared by Data Files Config Files Class Flag OL T D T D Threshold Deadband OL OnLine OffLine Default Variation Config File Number 17 Data Set E A iss Object File Max Number Numbers of Files Prototypes o fj Descriptors 0 0 Enable Secure Authentication Enable Aggressive Mode Critical FCs File Number Expected Session Key gt gt Change Interval x1s 1800 Expected Session Key 2000 Change Count Reply Timeout x100ms 20 Maximum Error Count HMAC Algorithm User Info Contig File Number p Diagnostic File Number fiss E fier A Channel 0 Channel 1 and Channel 2 ports if Channels 0 1 and 2 are configured for DNP3 protocol Any changes in the DNP3 Slave configuration tab wil
217. d Network Protocol DNP3 343 DNP3 Master may issue MicroLogix 1400 must parse Response DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Group Description Function Qualifier Codes Function Qualifier Codes Num Num Codes dec hex Codes dec hex 60 2 Class Objects Class 1 1 read 06 no range or all data 07 08 limited qty 20 enbl unsol 06 no range or all 21 dab unsol 60 3 Class Objects Class 2 1 read 06 no range or all data 07 08 limited qty 60 4 Class Objects Class 3 1 read 06 no range or all data 07 08 limited qty 20 enbl unsol 06 no range or all 21 dab unsol 70 2 File Control 29 authenticate 5B free format 129 response 5B free format authentication file 70 3 File Control file 25 open file 5B free format command 70 3 File Control file 27 delete file 5B free format command 70 4 File Control file 26 close file 5B free format 129 response 5B free format command status 70 5 File Control file 1 read file 5B free format transport 70 5 File Control file 2 write file 5B free format transport 70 6 File Control file 129 response 5B free format transport status 70 7 File Control file 129 response 5B free format descriptor 80 1 Internal Indications 1 read file 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop format
218. d On Start Up EnableUnsolicited Fer Class Creble Confemation Frahlal Inssliiter Frr lass Enable Time Synchronization Max Response Ske lime Synchrengation Interval x1 mins U Confirmation Timeout x1 ms 10000 Number of Number of Class Events 1000 Time after Classi Events x1 s Nunber of Class2Events i000 Time after Clas 2 Events xt 3 5 of Class3 venls fom Hold Time after Clas 3 Events x 3 B Analog Input 1 6bits Analog Input 32bits Analog Input Short Floatng Analog Output 166 Frozen Counter 18bits Frozen Counter 32bits Analog Input 1661 Analog Input 32bits Analog Output 3268 Anaog Input Short Floating Analog Dutput Sisort Flo tna Double Ditinput Double Bit Input SmallBCD Small BCD DNF3 Object Data File r DNF3 Object Config File Number Binary Input Bnaryinput Dinary Output Dinary Output Counter 15bits Counter 18bits Counter 32bits Counter 3251 H x t Channel Configuration 3 Program Files LB svso B svsi ff Lap2 Data Files ME Cross Reference 00 OUTPUT INPUT DI 52 STATUS 83 BINARY D 74 TIMER E C5 COUNTER R6 CONTROL DI N7 INTEGER F8 FLOAT i D B10 Binary Input Object File D B30 Binary Input Contig File C EAEg Data Logging
219. ddress is selected press the OK key If not select IP Address using the Up and Down keys and then press the OK key O00000 ENET Cfg Status PIP Address Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 124 Using the LCD Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 nN The password screen is displayed Press Up Down Left and Right keys to enter the Master password up to a maximum of 10 digits In this example the current Master password is allocated as 1234 ENET Setup Master Password After entering the Master password press the OK key on the LCD keypad ENET Setup Master Password Ifthe Master password is incorrect an error message will be displayed 000006 ENET Setup Password Wrong po Using the LCD 125 7 If the password is correct the Ethernet network type screen is displayed 8 9 as below Press Up or Down key to select the appropriate Ethernet 000006 ETH Mode bootp Press U D key If you press the OK key at the static mode the IP address flashes 000000 HEHUTE ENET stati IP address 192 168 1BH 201 After configuring the IP address press OK key The Subnet Mask screen is displayed 000000 REMOTE ENET stati Subnet Hask 255 255 255 HAA After configuring the Subnet Mask press the
220. e 0x04 10 Freeze and Clear No Resp See the comment for FC FREEZE CLEAR No response message is returned when this request is issued from a DNP3 master FC COLD RESTART FC Byte 0x0D 13 Cold Restart This function code forces the MicroLogix 1400 to perform a complete restart upon poweting up FC WARM RESTART FC Byte 0 0 14 Warm Restart This function code forces the MicroLogix 1400 to perform a partial reset This applies only to the MicroLogix 1400 Series B controller FC INITIALIZE APPL FC Byte 0x10 16 Initialize Application This function code is used to initialize the user program which was downloaded RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro software Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 253 FC_START_APPL FC Byte 0x11 17 Start Application This function code is used to start the user program which was downloaded by RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro software FC STOP APPL FC Byte 0x12 18 Stop Application This function code is used to stop the user program which was downloaded by RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro FC_ENABLE_UNSOLICITED FC Byte 0x14 20 Enable Unsolicited Message This function is used to dynamically enable unsolicited messages generated in the MicroLogix 1400 FC_DISABLE_UNSOLICITED FC Byte 0x15 21 Disable Unsolicited Message This function is used to dynamically disable unsolicited messages generated in the MicroLogix 1400 FC_DELAY_MEASURE
221. e DNP3 over IP subsystem in the MicroLogix 1400 supports Listening End Point TCP Dual End Point and Datagram End Point type Listening End Point type supports a single TCP connection as a Server and UDP datagram Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 234 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 TCP Dual End Point type supports a single TCP connection as a Server a single TCP connection as a Client and UDP datagram Datagram End Point type supports UDP datagram from DNP3 Masters The default TCP and UDP port numbers are 20000 and the port numbers are configurable The End Point type can be determined by the parameter End Point Type According to the parameter the MicroLogix 1400 works as different End Point types See the following table for each configuration End Point Type Connection Listening End Point A single TCP Server connection Description Any of the requests are accepted and the responses are transmitted via this connection The unsolicited responses are transmitted via this connection when this connection is available UDP datagram Accepts only broadcast packets when DNP3 destination node is one of OxFFFD OxFFFE and OxFFFF in the request Dual End Point single Server connection Any of the requests are accepted and the responses are transmitted via this connection The unsolicited responses are transmitted via this connection when this connection is available This connectio
222. e LCD mode switch position using the Mode Switch screen on the LCD as shown below In this example the mode switch position is set to REMOTE 000006 Program Remote Run All the built in LCD screens except the Boot Message screen display the current mode switch position at their top right portion as shown below In this example the mode switch position is set to RUN Current Mode Switch Position 000000 RU I g goooooooo0o000 009999 0123456789012 4567839 Controller Modes The table below shows the possible controller modes when the mode switch positions at PROGRAM REMOTE or RUN For example if the Mode Switch is at RUN and you want to test a control program with running it for a single scan you have to first change mode switch position to REMOTE before you run the control program in the remote test single scan mode with your RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro programming software Possible Controller Modes by Mode Switch Position paced the Mode Switch Possible Controller Modes are ositions at PROGRAM download in progress program mode suspend mode operation halted by execution of the SUS instruction Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Using the LCD 113 Possible Controller Modes by Mode Switch Position When the Mode Switch Possible Controller Modes are Positions at REMOTE remote download in progress remote program m
223. e LCD and keypad on the MicroLogix 1400 controller Topics include operating principles I O status display monitoring user defined target files using the mode switch using a user defined LCD screen changing key in mode using communications togele functionality configuring Ethernet port configuration using trim pots viewing system information viewing fault code using communication configuring LCD Setup The LCD and keypad are shown below 44580 LCD and Keypad Feature Description 10 LCD 5 LCD Screen Keypad ESC OK Up Down Left and Right Buttons Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 86 Using the LCD Operating Principles Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 MicroLogix 1400 LCD Menu Structure Tree Startup Screen User Defined C 5 Long Integer REMOTE 9 LO RUN S Using the LCD 87 Startup Screen The Startup screen is displayed whenever the controller is powered up LCD Default Startup Screen MicroLogix 1400 You can customize this Startup screen in your application program by defining a ASCII data file that contains the bitmap format image to display on the Startup
224. e Program See Starting and Stopping User Programs Mode Change via DNP3 Network on page 318 Request 19 0x13 FC SAVE CONFIG No Deprecated Request 20 0x14 FC ENABLE UNSOLICITED Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 21 0x15 FC DISABLE UNSOLICITED Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 22 0x16 FC ASSIGN CLASS No Request 23 0x17 FC DELAY MEASURE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Used for non LAN Request 24 0x18 FC RECORD CURRENT TIME MicroLogix 1400 parses Used for LAN Request 25 0x19 FC OPEN FILE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 26 0x1A FC CLOSE FILE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 27 0x1B FC DELETE FILE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 28 0x1C FC GET FILE INFO No MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 29 0x1D FC AUTHENTICATE FILE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 30 Ox1E FC ABORT FILE No MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 31 0x1F FC_ACTIVATE_CONFIG No MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 32 0x20 FC_AUTHENTICATE_REO No MicroLogix 1400 parses Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 338 Function Codes for MicroLogix 1400 Series Controllers Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Message Function Name MicroLogix Descrintion Type Code 1400 Support Request 33 0x21 FC_AUTHENTICATE_ERR No MicroLogix 1400 parses 34 0x22 to No Reserved 128 0x80 Response 129 0x81 FC RESPONSE Yes MicroLogix 1400 sends Response 130 0x82 FC UNSOLICITED RESP
225. e configuration for Trim Pots in the LCD Function File including trim pot low and high values for data value range is described in the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 001 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 134 Using the LCD Error Conditions Error conditions regarding the Trim Pot functionality are described in the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 01 Viewing System The System Information screen of the LCD allows you to identify the system information for your controller Information Follow these steps to view the system information for your controller 1 On the Main Menu screen select Advanced Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad as shown below If the menu items shown in the figure below are not displayed on the Main Menu screen you need to scroll down the screen by pressing the Down key 000006 RU User Display b dvanced Set 2 Then press the OK key on the LCD keypad The Advanced Set Menu screen is displayed as shown below 000006 TrimPot Set bSystem Info Fault Code 3 If System Info is selected press the OK key If not select System Info using the Up and Down keys and then press the OK key HU Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Viewing Fault Code Using the LCD 135 4 The System Information screen is displayed You can
226. e controller reset 2 verify the POWER LED is cold GREEN 3 verify the FALLT LED is turned OFF x e 16 Click the OK button 17 Enter the hardware address if prompted Otherwise the AB SNMP Server Running dialog box may appeat AB SNMP BOOTP Server Could not find the host on the network This machine wil now attempt to act as BOOTP server for this IP address Enter the hardware address ol the module below or cancel to re enter the address 00008 394 89 Cancel AB SNMP BOOTP Server Running X Wating for BOOTP request from hardware address 00008 394 9 Providing address 10 116 38 203 If the AB_SNMP BOOTP Server Running dialog box appears and if there is no response from the controller for more than 30 seconds click Cancel Publication 1766 UM001G EN P 2012 204 Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System The Update Status dialog box is displayed If the update was successful the status text box is green and has an appropriate message Update Status Catalog Number 1766LEC OK Serial Number Current Revision 2 0 View Log New Revision A 2 0 E If the update was not successful the status text box is red and has appropriate message Up date Status Catalog Number SenalNumber N A Current Revision N A NewRevisior N A If the following dialog box appears it indicates that the controller ended
227. e element to edit it Event Occurrence Condition 1 x Case ID o Point Address Type Standard DNP3Point v Point Type NONE 7 Point Index o Cancel Point Addressing under Event Occurrence Conditions Valid selections are shown below Point Address Type Point Type Point Index Event Occurence Condition Standard DNP3 Point NONE No point type is 0 No Event is generated associated Binary input 0 to 4095 When the Point Type and Point Index are Doobie 7120 Cl Counter 0 to 511 Analog input 0 to 767 BCD BCD point to 255 Reserved for others Reserved for others No Event is generated Note that a Data Set event can consume any number of event buffers depending on the Data Set configuration This is only applicable to Data Set events The event for other objects consumes a single event buffer When using Data Set events increase the number of events in the DNP3 Slave configuration Descriptor Element Configuration Each Descriptors element is configured in this here Double click each element to edit it Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 290 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Descriptor Element Configuration xj Descriptor Code NONE v Data Type Code NONE x Max Data Length bytes p Ancillary Value fo Point Address Standard DNP3 Point v Point Type Point Index 7
228. e selection is Enabled Checked the MicroLogix 1400 accepts the requests only from the DNP3 Master IP Address which is configured in the parameters Master IP Address0 to Master IP Address4 The maximum number of Master IP Address for the Access Control is 5 End Point Type The valid selections are Listening Dual and Datagram Only Default is Listening End Point Type Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 236 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Master Node0 This value is used to validate Master node address when the Enable Master Address Validation is Enabled Checked send Unsolicited Response when Unsolicited Response functionality is enabled An Unsolicited Response is sent out to the DNP3 Master having this address The valid range is 0 to 65519 Default value is 0 Master Node1 Master Node2 Master Node3 Master Node4 This value is used for validation of the Master node address when the Enable Master Address Validation is Enabled Checked This value is only valid when the Enable Master Address Validation is Enabled Checked The valid range is 0 to 65519 Default value is 0 Master IP Address This value is used to validate Master IP address when the Enable Access Control is Enabled Checked send Unsolicited Response when Unsolicited Response functionality is enabled An Unsolicited Response is sent out to the DNP3 Master having this add
229. e transient immunity For 1762 1032T 1762 2 and 1762 0V32T modules IEC61000 4 5 2 kV common mode 1 kV differential mode For all other modules IEC1000 4 5 2 kV common mode 1 kV differential mode Conducted RF immunity For 1762 1032T 1762 0B32T and 1762 0V32T modules IEC61000 4 6 10V 0 15 80 MHz For all other modules IEC1000 4 6 10V 0 15 80 MHz 1 For module specific operating temperature range refer to the Installation Instructions for the specific module 2 Conducted Immunity frequency range may be 150 kHz to 30 MHz if the Radiated Immunity frequency range is 30 1000 MHz Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Input Specifications Specifications 161 Specification 1762 1 8 1762 108 1762 1016 1762 1032T 1762 1080W6 Shipping weight 209 g 0 46 Ibs 200 g 0 44 Ibs 230 g 0 51 Ibs 200g 0 44 Ibs 280g 0 62 Ibs approx with carton Voltage category 100 120V AC 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC sink source sink source sink source sink source Operating voltage 79V AC 132V 10 30V DC at 10 30V DC 10 30V DC 10 30V DC at range at 47 Hz 63 Hz 30 C 86 F 10 26 4V DC 82 24 points at 30 C 30 C 86 F 10 26 4V DC at 86 F 10 26 4V DC at 55 C 131 F 10 26 4V DC 65 C 149 F 23 points at 60 C 140 F Number of inputs 8 8 16 32 8 Bus current draw max 50 mA at 5V DC 50 mA at 5V DC 70 mA at 5V DC 170 mA at 5V
230. ections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked When the selection is Disabled Unchecked the MicroLogix 1400 disables DNP3 Secure Authentication subsystem When the selection is Enabled Checked the MicroLogix 1400 enables DNP3 Secure Authentication subsystem Enable Aggressive Mode in Secure Authentication This parameter is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 243 The valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Enabled Checked When the selection is Disabled Unchecked the MicroLogix 1400 disables DNP3 Aggressive Mode in Secure Authentication subsystem When the selection is Enabled Checked the MicroLogix 1400 enables DNP3 Aggressive Mode in Secure Authentication subsystem Critical FCs File Number in Secure Authentication This parameter is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers This file number is used to define the list of the critical function codes in Secure Authentication A critical function code should be defined in a word element in this file The maximum number of element in this file should not exceed 32 the maximum number of the function codes that can be defined The value of this parameter is N file only Valid range is 0 7 9 to 255 Default value is 0 When this file number is configured to 0 and there is no configuration f
231. ed Network Protocol DNP3 337 Message Function Name MicroLogix Code 1400 Support Request 5 0x05 FC_DIRECT_OPERATE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 6 0x06 FC DIRECT OPERATE NR Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 7 0x07 FC IMMED FREEZE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 8 0x08 FC IMMED FREEZE NR Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 9 0x09 FC_FREEZE_CLEAR Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 10 0x0A FC FREEZE CLEAR NR Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 11 OxOB FC FREEZE AT TIME No Request 12 0x0C FC FREEZE AT TIME NR No Request 13 0x0D FC COLD RESTART Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses MicroLogix 1400 should not be in the executing mode and any program and files should not be in open state Request 14 OxOE WARM RESTART No MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 15 0xOF FC INITIALIZE DATA No Obsolete Request 16 0x10 FC INITIALIZE APPL Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Clears fault and changes the controller mode to Remote Program See Starting and Stopping User Programs Mode Change via DNP3 Network on page 318 Request 17 0x11 FC START APPL Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Clears fault and changes the controller mode to Remote Run See Starting and Stopping User Programs Mode Change via DNP3 Network on page 318 Request 18 0x12 FC STOP APPL Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Changes the controller mode to Remot
232. efault Class Level is 0 Any other bits are reserved Class Level of Index 0 to 15 is 1 B30 0 0 and B30 0 1 Class Level of Index 16 to 31 is 2 B30 1 0 and B30 1 1 Class Level of Index 32 to 47 is 3 B30 2 0 and B30 2 1 and Class Level of other Indexes are 0 Data File B30 bin Binary Input Config File gt m m ts T i E H H to um f J B Em o 0 O OP O 500005 Oo oa OF co o sam O O o l sm e ei d p Propeites Usage DNP3 Binary Output Object The supported object group and variations are listed in this section The MicroLogix 1400 responds with the default group and variation when the DNP3 Master requests to read the object with Any Variation Binary Output Static Objects e 1050 Binary Output All Variations g10v2 Binary Output Output status with flags default Binary Output Command Objects g12v1 Binary Command Control relay output block CROB Rel
233. el Configuration Project Help fg Controller i Controller Properties TS Processor Status e Function Files Au IO Configuration he Channel Configuration ibt Channel Status D DNP3 Default Variation Config File Program Files 50 SYS1 Lap2 DNP3 Default Variation Config File _ E Object Name Group Dec Variation Dec jinary Input Static Object 1 Binary Input Change Object Binary Output Static Object Double Bit Binary Input Static Object Double Bit Binary Input Change Object 16bits Counter Static Object 32bits Counter Static Object Frozen 16bits Counter Static Object Frozen 32bits Counter Static Object 16bits Counter Change Object 32bits Counter Change Object Frozen 16bits Counter Change Object Frozen 32bits Counter Change Object 16bits Analog Input Static Object 32bits Analog Input Static Object Short Floating Point Analog Input Static Object 16bits Analog Input Change Object 32bits Analog Input Change Object Short Floating Point Analog Input Change Object 16bits Analog Output Static Object 32bits Analog Output Static Object Short Floating Point Analog Output Static Object Small BCD Obiect cn oco no co 63 P3 Ul n3 C Co nO no co The following table shows the structure of the DNP3 Default Variation Configuration File Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Micrologix 1400
234. elect 17 27 28 index 129 response echo of request 4 operate 5 direct op 6 dir op no ack 41 2 Analog Output 16 bit 3 select 17 27 28 index 129 response echo of request 4 operate 5 direct op 6 dir op no ack 41 3 Analog Output Single prec 3 select 17 27 28 index 129 response echo of request flt pt 4 operate 5 direct op 6 dir op no ack 50 1 Time and Date Absolute 1 read 07 limited qty 1 129 response 07 limited qty time qty 1 2 write 07 limited qty 1 50 3 Time and Date Absolute 2 write 07 limited qty 1 time at last recorded time 51 1 Time and Date CTO 129 response 07 limited qty Absolute time synchronized 130 unsol resp qty 1 51 2 Time and Date CTO 129 response 07 limited qty Absolute time 130 unsol resp qty 1 unsynchronized 52 2 Time Delay Fine 129 response 07 limited qty qty 1 60 1 Class Objects Class 0 data 1 read 06 no range or all 60 2 Class Objects Class 1 data 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited qty 20 enbl unsol 06 no range or all 21 dab unsol 60 3 Class Objects Class 2 data 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited qty 60 4 Class Objects Class 3 data 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited qty 20 enbl unsol 06 no range or all 21 dab unsol 70 2 File Control authentication 29 authenticate 5B free format 129 response
235. element as well as the appropriate number of elements exists in the MicroLogix 1400 user program The example table below shows how the LCD uses the configuration information with integer file number 7 LCD 0 TUF 7 The data protection for its file depends on the setting for LCD Edit Disable If LCD Edit Disable is set to 1 in file properties the corresponding data file is considered read only by the LCD and the Protected message is displayed IMPORTANT Although you cannot change protected data from the LCD keypad the control program or other communication devices have access to protected data Protection bits do not provide any overwrite protection to data within the target integer file It is entirely the user s responsibility to ensure that data is not inadvertently overwritten TIP The LCD always starts at word 0 of a data file It cannot start at any other address within the file For explanations in this section we assume the following in the application program An integer file N7 which is 256 elements long 256 words is defined with the preset data as shown in the screen capture below PISTES ffse 0 i 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 17 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 17 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 17 20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 17 30 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 17 40 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 17 50 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 17 60 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 17 70 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 17 80 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 17 90 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 17 1
236. em Missing or Corrupt See Recovering from Missing or Corrupt OS State on page D 208 FORCE fault Operating System FAULT LEDs all flashing Controller Error Recovery Model Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Use the following error recovery model to help you diagnose software and hardware problems in the micro controller The model provides common questions you might ask to help troubleshoot your system Refer to the recommended pages within the model for further help Troubleshooting Your System 187 Identify the error code and description Is the error hardware related Refer to page 206 for No probable cause and Are the dem recommended action connacuons tgnt Yes Is the Power No Clear Fault RENE LED on Yes No Correct the condition causing the fault Is the RUN LED on Yes Return controller to RUN or any of the REM test modes Is the Fault LED on Tighten wire connections Does the controller have power supplied No Check power Yes Refer to page 206 for probable cause and recommended action No Is an input LED accurately showing status Yes Test and verify system operation Hefer to page 206 for probable cause and recommended action Refer to page 206 for probably cause and recommended action Publication 1766 UM001G EN P Ma
237. en bridged For point to point Full Duplex modem connections that do not requite any modem handshaking signals to operate use DF1 Full Duplex protocol with no handshaking For point to point Full Duplex modem connections that require RTS CTS handshaking use DF1 Full Duplex protocol with handshaking For radio modem connections use DF1 Radio Modem protocol especially if store and forward capability is required For general multi drop modem connections for point to point modem connections that require RTS CTS handshaking use DF1 Half Duplex slave protocol In this case one and only one of the other devices must be configured for DF1 Half Duplex master protocol IMPORTANT Never attempt to use DH 485 protocol through modems under any circumstance TIP All MicroLogix controllers support RTS CTS modem handshaking when configured for DF1 Full Duplex protocol with the control line parameter set to Full Duplex Modem Handshaking or DF1 Half Duplex slave protocol with the control line parameter set to Half Duplex Modem MicroLogix 1400 controllers also support DCD Data Carrier Detect line for DF1 Radio Modem protocol For other protocols you can only access the DCD signal from your ladder logic No other modem handshaking lines such as Data Set Ready and Data Terminal Ready are supported by MicroLogix 1400 controller The DH 485 protocol defines the communication between multiple devices that coexist on a single pair of w
238. er considerations input states on power down 12 11 loss of power source 12 other line conditions 12 11 power supply inrush 11 power distribution 10 power source loss of 12 power supply inrush power considerations 11 preparing for upgrade 193 preventing excessive heat 12 processor 378 processor file 378 program file 378 program mode 378 program scan 378 programming 5 programming device 378 protocol 378 publications related xiv purpose of this manual xiii read 379 real time clock 2 battery operation 144 operation 143 removal installation under power 143 writing data 143 related documentation xiv related publications xiv relay 379 relay logic 379 remote packet support 218 replacement battery 177 disposing 181 handling 179 installing 177 storing 179 transporting 179 replacement kits 177 replacement parts 177 reporting event by polled response 307 reporting event by unsolicited response 308 reserved bit 379 restore 379 retentive data 379 RS 232 379 RS 232 communication interface 209 RS 485 communication interface 209 rules for downloading a user program 316 rules for file authentication 315 rules for initializing a user program 318 rules for uploading a user program 317 rules for uploading communication status files 318 run mode 379 rung 379 safety circuits 10 safety considerations 9 disconnecting main power 10 hazardous location 9 master control relay circuit periodic tests 11 periodic tests of mast
239. er control relay circuit 11 10 safety circuits 10 save 379 saving communication EEPROM 137 scan time 379 sinking 380 sinking and sourcing wiring diagrams 36 sinking wiring diagram 1762 24BWA 36 sourcing 380 sourcing wiring diagram 1762 24BWA 38 39 37 specifications 151 specifications for outputs in non hazardous locations 155 specifications for outputs in hazardous locations 154 starting and stopping user programs mode change via DNP3 network 318 status 380 status indicators 183 supported communication protocols 57 surge suppressors for motor starters 30 recommended 30 using 29 system configuration DF1 Full Duplex examples 210 219 Index 385 system loading example calculations 368 limitations 367 worksheet 369 system loading and heat dissipation 367 T target user defined file number 95 terminal 380 terminal block layouts 1762 IF20F2 51 53 controllers 33 terminal groupings 36 throughput 380 time synchronization 311 trim pot information function file 132 trim pot operation 131 trim pots 131 changing values 132 133 error conditions 134 location 131 using 131 troubleshooting 183 true 380 TUF 95 U unsupported connections 5 62 upload 380 user defined LCD screen 115 using communications toggle functionality 58 using communications toggle push button 58 using emergency stop switches 14 using memory modules 143 using real time clock 143 using the battery 17 using trim pots 131 V viewing fa
240. er should send the function code DELETE FILE 27 for initializing user programs When MicroLogix 1400 receives a request with the function code DELETE FILE 27 it clears the current user program which was downloaded into the controller and restores the default user program User programs cannot be initialized while the controller is in Executing mode Before initializing programs a mode change request should be sent with the function code STOP _ 18 Rules for uploading Communication Status Files A DNP3 master should send the function code OPEN_FILE 25 READ 1 and CLOSE_FILE 26 for uploading Communication Status Files The function code WRITE 2 for downloading Communication Status Files is not supported The file name should be DIAG CHO CSF DIAG CH1 ESF and DIAG CH2 CSF for Channel 0 Channel 1 and Channel 2 respectively Starting and Stopping User Programs Mode Change via DNP3 Network This section covers how to change the controller mode via DNP3 network To change the controller mode use the function codes FC INITIALIZE _ 16 FC START APPL 17 and FC STOP APPL 18 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 319 If the qualifier code is 5Bh the Application Identifier Object should be used The Application Identifier is a string which cannot exceed 10 bytes The string of Application Identifier is taken from the name in the Properties of the ladder file 2 in RSLogix 500
241. erates to show when the controller is in the default communications mode Hold Communication Connections 59 down the OK key more than 5 seconds to toggle the communication mode on the Main Menu screen x Don RU 009092 6123456789612 456739 a rbp p iilius TIP The Communication Toggle Functionality only affects the communication configuration of Channel 0 Changing Communication Configuration Follow the procedure below to change from the user defined communication configuration to the default communications mode and back In this example we will start from the Main Menu screen of the LCD display as shown below If necessary press ESC repeatedly until you return to the Main Menu screen 1 On the Main Menu screen select Advance Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad If the menu items shown in the figure below are not displayed on the Main Menu screen you need to scroll down the screen by pressing the Down key 000000 User Display b dvanced Set RU Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 60 Communication Connections 2 A Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Press the OK key on the LCD keypad The Advanced Settings Menu screen is displayed 000000 gt Cfg ENET Cfg RU Select DCOMM Cfg using the Up and Down keys and then press the OK key 000006 DCOH
242. ernal Indications Internal Indication bits are set under the following conditions of the MicroLogix 1400 controllers IIN1 0 ALL STATIONS This bit is set when an all stations message is received IIN1 1 CLASS 1 EVENTS This bit is set when Class 1 event data is available IIN1 2 CLASS 2 EVENTS This bit is set when Class 2 event data is available IIN1 3 CLASS 3 EVENTS This bit is set when Class 3 event data is available TIN1 4 NEED TIME This bit is set when Time synchronization is required IIN1 5 LOCAL CONTROL This bit is set when the controller is in Non Executing mode IIN1 6 DEVICE TROUBLE This bit is set when the controller is in Fault mode IIN1 7 DEVICE RESTART This bit is set when the DNP3 driver is just configured in channel configuration IINZ0 NO FUNC CODE SUPPORT This bit is set when a request which has an unknown function code is received TIN2 1 OBJECT UNKNOWN This bit is set when a request which has an unknown object is received IIN2 2 PARAMETER ERROR This bit is set when a request with a qualifier range field that cannot be processed is received Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 256 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 DNP3 Objects and MicroLogix 1400 Data Files Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 TIN2 3 EVENT BUFFER OVERFLOW This bit is set when an event buffer overflow condition exists in the controller and
243. es MicroLogix 1400 may not send an Unsolicited Response even though the parameters are configured properly Normally when the parameter Enable Unsolicited On Start Up is checked the MicroLogix 1400 initiates an Unsolicited Response with the function code ENABLE UNSOLICITED 20 if there any events logged into the event buffer However when a request with the function code DISABLE_UNSOLICITED 21 is received an Unsolicited Response will not be sent When the parameter Enable Unsolicited On Start Up is unchecked the MicroLogix 1400 does not trigger the Unsolicited Response until a request with the function code ENABLE_UNSOLICITED 20 from the DNP3 Master is received Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 309 The example below shows how to initiate and send the Unsolicited Response Master Node0 in Channel 0 Configuration tab indicates that the Unsolicited Response is reported to the Master with the node address 3 Channel Configuration DNP3 Slave 1900 gt NONE No Handshaking Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 310 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Collision Avoidance Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 The parameter Channel for Unsolicited Response in the DNP3 Slave Configuration tab indicates that the Unsolicited Response is reported via Channel 0 only In this example Initial Unsolicited Response is sent on startup and all events of class 1
244. es connected to the negative side DC Common of the field power supply are sinking field devices Field devices connected to the positive side V of the field supply are sourcing field devices 2 3 Output Specifications Specification Shipping weight approx with carton Only applicable to Series 1 0 modules 1762 0A8 215 g 0 48 Ibs 1762 0B8 210 g 0 46 lbs 1762 0B16 235 g 0 52 Ibs Refer to Publication 1762 IN10 MicroLogix 1762 1016 DC Input Module Installation Instructions for the derating chart 1762 0B32T 200 g 0 44 Ibs 1762 0V32T 200 g 0 44 Ibs Voltage category 100 240V AC 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC source 24V DC sink Operating voltage 85 265V AC at 20 4 26 4V DC 20 4 26 4V DC 10 2 26 4V DC 10 2 26 4V DC range 47 63 Hz Number of outputs 8 8 16 32 32 Bus current draw max 115 mA at 5V DC 115 mA at 5V DC 175 mA at 5V DC 175 mA at 5V DC 175 mA at 5V DC 0 575 W 0 575 W 0 88 W 0 mA at 24V DC 0 mA at 24V DC Heat dissipation max 2 9 W 1 61 W 2 9 W at 30 C 3 4 W at 26 4 DC 2 7 W at 26 4V DC 86 F 2 1 Wat 55 C 131 F Signal delay max resistive load On delay 1 2 cycle Off delay 1 2 cycle On delay 0 1 ms Off delay 1 0ms On delay 0 1 ms Off delay 1 0 ms On delay 0 5 ms Off delay 4 0 ms On delay 0 5 ms Off delay 4 0 ms Off state leakage 2 mA at 132V 1 0mA 1 0mA 0 1 mA at 26 4V DC 0 1 mA at 26 4V DC curren
245. eshooting Your System 191 Error Codes Extended Error Codes for 1762 IF20F2 Hex Module Extended Error Error Type Error Code Code Error Description X000 000 0 0000 0000 No error General Common X200 001 0 0000 0000 General hardware error no additional information 11500 001 0 0000 0001 Power up reset state Hardware Specific X210 001 0 0001 0000 Reserved Error Configuration Error X400 010 0 0000 0000 General configuration error no additional information X401 010 0 0000 0001 Invalid input data format selected channel 0 X402 010 0 0000 0010 Invalid input data format selected channel 1 X403 010 0 0000 0011 Invalid output data format selected channel 0 X404 010 0 0000 0100 Invalid output data format selected channel 1 represents Don t Care Extended Error Codes for 1762 IF4 and 1762 0F4 Hex Module Extended Error Error Type Error Code Information Code Error Description TE Binary Binary No Error X000 000 0 0000 0000 No error General Common 200 001 0 0000 0000 General hardware error no additional information Hardware Error X201 001 0 0000 0001 Power up reset state Hardware X300 001 1 0000 0000 Reserved Specific Error Configuration Error X400 010 0 0000 0000 General configuration error no additional information X401 010 0 0000 0001 Invalid ran
246. ess that was configured earlier or use an available IP address assigned to by your network administrator 5 Click the Get Info button If the IP address was previously configured and the necessary information about the controller is obtained go to step 9 6 The AB SNMP BOOTP Server dialog box is displayed indicating that this IP address has not been configured into the processor AB SNMP BOOTP Server Could not find the host on the network This machine will now attempt to act as aBOOTP server for this IP address Enter the hardware address of the modue below or cancel to re enter the IP address pood ea m 7 Enter the hardware address of the controller that is being upgraded as noted in step 2 of Prepare the Controller for Firmware Upgrade on page 194 and click the OK button Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 198 Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System For the IP address to be configured using ControlFLASH BOOTP servet the BOOTP settings should be enabled in the controller see step 2 of Prepare the Controller for Firmware Upgrade on page 194 AB SNMP BOOTP Server Could not find the host on the network This machine will now attempt to act as aBOOTP server for this IP address Enter the hardware address of the module below or cancel to re enter the IP address 00008 334 em 8 The AB SNMP BOOTP Server Running dialog box may take several second
247. essive Mode Request 22 72 122 Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Invalid Aggressive Mode Request 23 73 123 Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Valid Key Change 24 74 124 Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Invalid Key Change 25 75 125 Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Challenge 26 76 126 Security Idle Reserved 27 77 127 Security Idle Counter for Ignored events 28 78 128 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Rx Unsolicited Non Critical ASDU 29 79 129 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Rx Non Critical ASDU 30 80 130 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Rx Critical ASDU 31 81 131 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Rx Critical ASDU 32 82 132 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Rx Valid Reply 33 83 133 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Rx Invalid Reply 34 84 134 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Reply Timeout 35 85 135 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Max Invalid Replies Or Comm Failure Detected 36 86 136 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Max Invalid Replies Or Comm Failure Detected 37 87 137 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Rx Error Message 38 88 138 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Key Change Timeout 39 89 139 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Expected Key Change Timeout 40 90 140 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Expected Key Change Timeout 41 91 141 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Rx Key Status Request 42 92 142 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Rx Valid Aggressive Mode Request 43 93 143 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Rx Valid Aggressive Mode Request 44
248. ey on the LCD keypad The I O Status screen is displayed as shown below 26789 a LrIb b p p uisi 3 If you have finished viewing I O status press the ESC key to return to the Main Menu screen as shown in step 1 The LCD allows you to view and change the data values of 256 bits words or double integers in a user defined file You can access to this functionality via the Monitoring screen of the LCD To monitor the bit file on the LCD you have to specify its file number in the Target User Defined File Number TUF element of the LCD Function File and download your application program to the controller The TUF element can only be changed by a program download Target User Defined File Number TUF Address Data Format LCD 0 TUF Word int User Program Access Read Only Control Target User Defined File Number The value stored in the TUF element identifies the bit file with which the LCD will interface Valid bit files are B3 and B10 through B255 When the LCD reads a valid bit file number it can access up to 256 bits 0 to 255 the LCD screen The protection bit LCD edit disable in the data file properties of target bit file are used to define the read only or read write privileges for its file The file type that the LCD interfaces with is bit integer double integer or float file specified in the TUF element IMPORTANT Use your programming software to ensure that the bit file y
249. f the controller the status indicators on the LCD the I O status indicators on the LCD Together they provide a mechanism to determine the current status of the controller if a programming device is not present or available Controller Status LED Indicators Controller LED Location Allen Bradley POWER RUN FAULT FORCE 1400 44607 Controller LED Indicators LED Color Indicates POWER off No input power or power error condition green Power on RUN off Not executing the user program green Executing the user program in run mode green flashing Memory module transfer occurring Publication 1766 UM001G EN P 2012 184 Troubleshooting Your System Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Controller LED Indicators LED Color Indicates FAULT off No fault detected red flashing Application fault detected red Controller hardware faulted FORCE off No forces installed amber Forces installed amber flashing Forces installed in force files but forcing is disabled Status Indicators on the LCD Status Indicators on the LCD S SHY Status Indicators on the LCD 000000 I g g oooo00000000 LICIEIEIEIEI 0123456789012 456789 o OOO000o000oOmm RU Indicator Color Indicates COMM 0 off Not transmitting via RS 232 485 port Channel 0 empty rectangle on Transmitting via RS 232 485 port Channel 0 solid rectangle COMM 1 off No
250. for 1second i AC o ing Voltage basic insulation 150V AC Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Specifications 159 Working Voltage for 1766 L32BWA A Description Power Supply Input to Backplane Isolation Recommendation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1836V AC for 1 second or 2596V DC for 1 second 265V AC Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Input Group to Backplane Isolation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1100V AC for 1 second or 1697V DC for 1 second 75V DC Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Output Group to Backplane Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1836V AC for 1 second or 2596V DC for 1 second isolation 265V AC Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Output Group to Output Group Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1836V AC for 1 second or 2596V DC for 1 second Isolation 265V AC Working Voltage basic insulation 150V Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Working Voltage for 1766 L16BXB A Description Input Group to Backplane Isolation and Input Group to Input Group Isolation Verified by one of Recommendation the following dielectric tests 1100V AC for 1 second or 1697V DC for 1 second 75V DC Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation FET Output Gro
251. ge select Channel 0 X402 010 0 0000 0010 Invalid range select Channel 1 X403 010 0 0000 0011 Invalid range select Channel 2 X404 010 0 0000 0100 Invalid range select Channel 3 X405 010 0 0000 0101 Invalid filter select Channel 0 1762 IF4 only X406 010 0 0000 0110 Invalid filter select Channel 1 1762 IF4 only X407 010 0 0000 0111 Invalid filter select Channel 2 1762 IF4 only X408 010 0 0000 1000 Invalid filter select Channel 3 1762 IF4 only X409 010 0 0000 1001 Invalid format select Channel 0 X40A 010 0 0000 1010 Invalid format select Channel 1 X40B 010 0 0000 1011 Invalid format select Channel 2 X40C 010 0 0000 1400 Invalid format select Channel 3 represents Don t Care Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 192 Troubleshooting Your System Calling Rockwell If you need to contact Rockwell Automation or local distributor for assistance it is P helpful to obtain the following prior to calling Automation for Assistance controller type series letter revision letter and firmware FRN number of the controller controller indicator status controller error codes Refer to MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual Publication 1766 001 for error code information Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Appendix D Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System The operating system OS can be u
252. gged is 6013 regardless of the Event data type With Series B controllers a Data Set event can consume multiple numbers of the event buffers If the number of the generated events reaches this value the MicroLogix 1400 sets IIN2 3 EVENT BUFFER OVERFLOWI Further events are not logged until the logged events are reported to DNP3 Master and the buffer is available The elements CS0 67 CS2 67 in the Communication status file show how many events are logged to the event buffer The logged events are not removed until they are reported to DNP3 Master successfully Logged event can also be cleared when one of the following events occur New OS firmware upgrade New user program download Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 The example below shows how to generate events for a Binary Input Object and a 303 16 bit Analog Input Object In the DNP3 Slave configuration Binary Input Object Data File Number was configured to 10 and its Configuration File Number was configured to 30 16 bit Analog Input Object Data File Number was configured to 14 and its Configuration File Number was configured to 36 Channel Configuration General 1 Chanrct 1 Channel2 DNP3 Slave Data Link Layer EnableUnsolicited Fer Class2 On Start Up Ony Select Tineout xis fO Channel fu Response T Application Layer Enable Unsolicited On Stat Up Send Iniial Unsolicite
253. guring the maximum error count The valid range is 0 10 Default value is 2 HMAC Algorithm in Secure Authentication This parameter is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers This parameter is used for configuring the HMAC Algorithm 1 HMAC SHA 1 truncated to 4 octets serial 2 HMAC SHA 1 truncated to 10 octets networked 3 HMAC SHA 256 truncated to 8 octets serial 4 HMAC SHA 256 truncated to 16 octets networked The valid range is 1 4 Default value is 2 User Info Config File Number in Secure Authentication This parameter is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers This file number is used to define user information Secure Authentication The value of this parameter is N file only Valid range is 0 7 9 255 Default value is 0 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 246 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 In RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro software when this parameter is configured properly you can see a DNP3 Auth User Info Config File tree in Channel Configuration Eg Project H Help 1 28 Controller i Controller Properties eS Processor Status D Function Files ALl IO Configuration He Channel Configuration he Channel Status 7 28 Program Files 50 SYS1 Lap 2 ML1400B_UM RSS 1 5 Auth User Info Contig File x DNP3 Authentication User Info Config File SS aa 0000000000000000
254. hannel errors over range or under range errors ate non critical Non critical error conditions are indicated in the module input data table Non critical configuration errors are indicated by the extended error code See Extended Error Codes for 1762 IF2OF2 on page 191 Critical module errors are conditions that prevent normal or recoverable operation of the system When these types of errors occur the system leaves the run mode of operation Critical module errors are indicated in Extended Error Codes for 1762 IF2OF2 on page 191 Module Error Definition Table Analog module errors are expressed in two fields as four digit Hex format with the most significant digit as don t care and irrelevant The two fields are Module Error and Extended Error Information The structure of the module error data is shown below Module Error Extended Error Information 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Hex Digit 4 Hex Digit 3 Hex Digit 2 Hex Digit 1 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 190 Troubleshooting Your System Module Error Field The purpose of the module error field is to classify module errors into three distinct groups as described in the table below The type of error determines what kind of information exists in the extended error information field These types of module errors ate typically reported in the controller s I
255. he PC and target is not passing the TFTP request throug Lx Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System 207 Update Failed reset module This error message is displayed when the initial TFTP request is not received To clear this error 1 Connect the controller s Ethernet port directly to the computet s Ethernet port using a crossover cable or disable or uninstall any firewall VPN or virus protection software running on the computer 2 Cycle power to the processor 3 Restart the firmware upgrade procedure as described in the section Using ControlFLASH for Firmware Upgrade on page 195 Communication error during TFTP transfer AB SNMP DLL eo Communications error during TFTP transfer This error message is displayed when there is a communication error during TFTP transfer To clear this error 1 Check your Ethernet connections are intact 2 Cycle power to the processor 3 Restart the firmware upgrade procedure as described in the section Using ControIFLASH for Firmware Upgrade on page 195 4 If the error still persists connect the controller s Ethernet port directly to the computer s Ethernet port using a crossover cable and then repeat from step 2 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 208 Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System Missing or Corrupt 0 state The Boot Firmware runs the controller in this state ATTENTION Do
256. he selection is Enabled Checked the MicroLogix 1400 always sends Response packets with the CON bit set in its header which causes the DNP3 Master to send replies confirming that it received each Response packet without error Enable Time Synchronization On Start Up Only Valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked This parameter used with Time Synchronization Interval x1 mins When the selection is Disabled Unchecked the MicroLogix 1400 sets IIN1 4 bit on power up and every interval configured in Time Synchronization Interval x1 mins When the selection is Enabled Checked the MicroLogix 1400 only sets the NEED_TIME Internal Indication bit IIN1 4 upon startup Time Synchronization Interval x1 mins This parameter used with Enable Time Synchronization On Start Up Only Only valid when Enable Time Synchronization On Start Up Only is Disabled Unchecked Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 240 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 The valid range is 0 32767 Default value is 0 As long as it is set for greater than 0 the NEED TIME Internal Indication IIN1 4 bit will be set at startup and then after every Time Synchronization Interval minutes When the parameter Enable Time Synchronization On Start Up Only is Disabled Unchecked and the parameter Time Synchronization Interval x1 mins is configu
257. he table below to configure the subnet mask and gateway address fields for each controller via your programming software This field Specifies Configure by doing the following Subnet Mask The controllers subnet mask Enter an address of the following form The subnet mask is used to interpret IP a b c d Where a b c d are between 0 255 decimal addresses when the internet is divided into subnets If your network is not divided into subnets then leave the subnet mask field at the default If you change the default and need to reset it type 0 0 0 0 Gateway Address The IP address of the gateway that Enter an address of the following form provides a connection to another IP network a b c d Where a b c d are between 0 255 decimal This field is required when you The default address is No Gateway communicate with other devices not on a local subnet Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 366 Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface MicroLogix 1400 Embedded Web Server Capability Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 MicroLogix 1400 controllers include not only the embedded web server which allows viewing of module information TCP IP configuration and diagnostic information but the capabilities that also allow viewing of the data file via Ethernet using a standard web browser For more information on MicroLogix 1400 embedded web server capability refer to the MicroLogix 1400 Embedded Web Server Use
258. ication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 IMPORTANT When connecting the MicroLogix 1400 Ethernet port to a 10 100Base T Ethernet switch note the following recommendations e Use the auto negotiation function for both the switch port and the MicroLogix 1400 Ethernet port e f you want to force to a specific speed duplex mode you must force both the MicroLogix 1400 Ethernet port and the switch port to the same setting Cables Shielded and non shielded twisted pair 10 100Base T cables with RJ45 connectors are supported The maximum cable length between an MicroLogix 1400 Ethernet port and a 10 100Base T port on an Ethernet hub or switch without repeaters or fiber is 100 m 323 ft However in an industrial application cable length should be kept to a minimum TIP The Ethernet cabling with straight through method is recommended as below Do not make the incorrect connection Straight through cabling Pin Pin Name Cable color 1 Orange White 2 Tx Orange 3 RX Green White 4 No used by 10 100Base T Blue 5 No used by 10 100Base T Blue White 6 Rx Green 7 No used by 10 100Base T Brown White 8 No used by 10 100Base T Brown The standard Ethernet cable is terminated in accordance with EIA TIA 568B on both ends The crossover cable is terminated to EIA TIA 568B at one end and EIA TIA 568A at the other exactly as shown in the two color coded plugs below The following figures show how the TIA EIA
259. ications Toggle 120 Ethernet Network Configuration 120 Viewing Ethernet Status A oeuvre Eee epe sn 120 Configuring the IP Address oleas corde vog ana 122 Configuring the Ethernet Port ec Dee en en 126 Configuring Ethernet Protocol 129 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 12 Table of Contents Using Real Time Clock and Memory Modules Online Editing Specifications Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Using Trim sed bonne rame d ad Ea d Rede ude 131 Trim Pot Operation 131 Changing Data Value ofa Trim 132 Trim Pot Configuration in LCD Function File 133 Error Conditions oir 134 Viewing System Information i252 11e ette terree ee ro dad 134 Viewing Fault Coden eter ERU M dE 135 Saving Loading Communication EEPROM 137 Saving communication 137 Loading communication EEPROM 139 UEM 139 Configuring contrast value ti La ep le 140 Configuring the backlight ore sinew eee ER PRATER ECHO NE 141 Chapter 6 Real Time Clock Operation 143 Operation at Power up and Entering a Run or Test Mode 143 Writing Data to the Real Time Clock
260. icator is set displayed as a solid rectangle with the battery wire connector connected you should install a new battery immediately Install Your Controller 19 Connecting the Battery Wire Connector Follow the procedure below to connect the battery wire connector to the battery connector 1 Insert the replaceable battery wire connector into the controller s battery connector 2 Secure the battery connector wires so that it does not block the 1762 expansion bus connector as shown below Battery compartment Battery 000000000000 ED EDI ED 1762 1 0 expansion bus connector Ej SALLI Battery wire connector If off Battery connector Battery wires S twisted pair Ee ala inland in 44522 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 20 Install Your Controller Controller Mounting Dimensions C 44516 1766 L32BWA 1766 L32AWA 1766 L32BXB 1766 L32BWAA 1766 L32AWAA 1766 L32BXBA Dimension Measurement 90 mm 3 5
261. identify the catalog number operating system firmware revision number and boot firmware revision number of your controller 5 Press the ESC key to return to the Advanced Set Menu screen as shown in step 3 The Fault Code screen of the LCD displays the fault code when a fault occurs When a fault occurs the Fault Code screen is not displayed automatically Only the FAULT LED on the controller flashes in red light Therefore you need to navigate into the Fault Code screen to identify the fault code on the LCD Follow these steps to view the fault code when a fault occurs 1 On the Main Menu screen select Advanced Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad as shown below If the menu items shown in the figure below are not displayed on the Main Menu screen you need to scroll down the screen by pressing the Down key 000000 User Display bAcvanced Set Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 136 Using the LCD 2 Then press the OK key on the LCD keypad The Advanced Set Menu screen is displayed as shown below O00000 TrimPot Set System Info bFault Code 3 If Fault Code is selected press the OK key If not select Fault Code using the Up and Down keys and then press the OK key RU 4 The Fault Code screen is displayed If no fault occurred 0000 is displayed as shown below 000006 RU Major Error ode BBBBh If a fault is occurred its fault code is disp
262. ikely cause an open circuit which would be a safe power off failure However if one of these switches shorts out it no longer provides any safety protection These switches should be tested periodically to assure they will stop machine motion when needed The following explains power considerations for the micro controllers Isolation Transformers You may want to use an isolation transformer in the AC line to the controller This type of transformer provides isolation from your power distribution system to reduce the electrical noise that enters the controller and is often used as a step down transformer to reduce line voltage Any transformer used with the controller must have a sufficient power rating for its load The power rating is expressed in volt amperes VA Power Supply Inrush During power up the MicroLogix 1400 power supply allows a brief inrush current to charge internal capacitors Many power lines and control transformers can supply inrush current for a brief time If the power source cannot supply this inrush current the source voltage may sag momentarily The only effect of limited inrush current and voltage sag on the MicroLogix 1400 is that the power supply capacitors charge more slowly However the effect of a voltage sag on other equipment should be considered For example a deep voltage sag may reset a computer connected to the same power source The following considerations determine whether the power source must
263. ile assigned some function codes are considered as critical by default See the table below for the critical function codes When this file number of this parameter is not 0 and it is a valid data file all function codes are considered as non critical In this case you must define all critical function codes in this file Note that the function code 0 FC CONFIRM is considered as critical once the file number is configured newly If you don t want the function code 0 to be considered as critical the number of elements in the file should be adjusted and the element value 0 should not be in any elements 0 0x00 optional 1 0x01 optional 2 0x02 critical optional 3 0x04 critical optional 4 0x04 critical optional 5 0x05 critical optional 6 0x06 critical optional 7 0x07 optional 8 0x08 optional 9 0x09 optional 10 0x0A optional 11 0x0B 12 0x0C 13 0x0D critical optional 14 0 0 critical optional 15 0x0F N A N A Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 244 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 17 0x11 Critical optional 18 0x12 Critical optional 19 0x13 N A N A 20 0x14 Critical optional 21 0x15 Critical optional 22 0x16 23 0x17 optional 24 0x18 Critical optional 25 0x19 optional 26
264. imited qty 130 unsol resp 3 0 Double bit Binary Input 1 read 06 no range or all Any Variation 3 1 Double bit Binary Input 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop Packed format 3 2 Double bit Binary Input 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop With flags 4 0 Double bit Binary Input 1 read 06 no range or all Event Any Variation 07 08 limited qty 4 1 Double bit Binary Input 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index Event Without time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 4 2 Double bit Binary Input 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index Event With absolute 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp time 4 3 Double bit Binary Input 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index Event With relative 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp time 10 0 Binary Output Any 1 read 06 no range or all Variation 10 2 Binary Output Output 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop status with flags 12 1 Binary Command 3 select 17 28 index 129 response echo of request Control relay output 4 operate block CROB 5 direct op 6 dir op no ack 20 0 Counter Any Variation 1 read 06 no range or all 7 freeze 8 freeze noack 9 freeze clear 10 frz cl noack Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 340 Micrologix
265. in B 180 mm 7 087 in C 8 mm 3 43 in Controller and Exp ansion The controller mounts horizontally with the expansion I O extending to the right of the controller Allow 50 mm 2 in of space all sides of the controller system for 0 Spacing adequate ventilation Maintain spacing from enclosure walls wireways adjacent equipment and so on as shown below Top B3 Ld side EJ TE Ver Cry Bottom 44517 Mounting the Controller MicroLogix 1400 controllers are suitable for use in an industrial environment when installed in accordance with these instructions Specifically this equipment is intended Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Install Your Controller 21 for use in clean dry environments Pollution degree 2 and to circuits not exceeding Over Voltage Category IEC 60664 1 9 ATTENTION Do not remove the protective debris shield until after the controller and all other equipment in the panel near the controller are mounted and wiring is complete Once wiring is complete remove protective debris shield Failure to remove shield before operating can cause overheating debris strip ATTENTION Electrostatic discharge can damage semiconductor devices inside the controller Do not touch the connector pins or other sensitive areas TIP For environments with greate
266. ing both Channel 0 and Channel 2 Serial ports for DNP3 communication event polling requests should be sent to one Channel at a time This avoids mis reporting of events to different DNP3 Masters on different Channels For example Master A and Master B are connected to Channel 0 and Channel 2 respectively and 5000 events are logged in the event buffer Master A sends an event polling request and only 50 events can be fit in an application layer fragment The first 50 events are sent to Master A and the next 50 events may be sent to Master B instead Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 308 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Reporting Event By Unsolicited Response To initiate and send Unsolicited Responses to a DNP3 Master the parameters below should be configured correctly For more details see DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration Parameters on page 238 Master 4 0 Channel for Unsolicited Response Enable Unsolicited On Start Up Enable Unsolicited For Class1 Enable Unsolicited For Class2 Enable Unsolicited For Class3 Send Initial Unsolicited On Start Up Number of Class1 Events Hold Time after Class1 Events x1s Number of Class2 Events Hold Time after Class2 Events x1s Number of Class3 Events Hold Time after Class3 Events x1s DNP3 Object Data File Number DNP3 Object Config File Number content of the Config File In some cas
267. ing panel earth ground Keep the shield connection to earth ground as short as possible To ensure optimum accuracy for voltage type inputs limit overall cable impedance by keeping all analog cables as short as possible Locate the I O system as close to your voltage type sensors or actuators as possible The module does not provide loop power for analog inputs Use a power supply that matches the input transmitter specifications 1762 IF20F2 Input Type Selection Select the input type current or voltage using the switches located on the module s circuit board and the input type range selection bits in the Configuration Data File Refer to MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 RM001 You can access the switches through the ventilation slots on the top of the module Switch 1 controls channel 0 switch 2 controls channel 1 The factory default setting for both switch 1 and switch 2 is Current Switch positions are shown below Cho Chi Za Location 4 Voltage OFF ole ee Default Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 50 Wire Your Controller Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 1762 IF20F2 Output Type Selection The output type selection current or voltage is made by wiring to the appropriate terminals Iout or Vout and by the type range selection bits in the Configuration Data File Refer to MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruct
268. ink Layer Eror Count 0 Messages Link Layer Error Code Modem Lines RATS CTs DCD Ce Publication 1766 UM001G EN P 2012 326 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 For the elements of the DNP3 Slave Application Layer diagnostic counter CS0 55 to CS0 69 and CS2 55 to CS2 69 the counter values are available with the structured display in RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro software as below Channel States OOE Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 2 Ext DNP3 Slave Application Layer Application Layer Error Code Received Confirm FC Counter Application Layer Error Count I Received Read FC Counter J FC lasterror 0 Received Write FC Counter 0 Last Trans in response Received Etc FC Counter Data file Num last error request 0 Trans Solicited Res FC B Data element Num lasterrorrequest I Trans Unsolicited Res FC Counterz 0 Transport Layer Error Code 0 Number of events to be reported J Transport Layer Error Count 0 FC Function Code Res Response Trans Transmitted Li ox Channel 0 Channel 0 Ext Channel 1 Channel 2 DNP3 Slave Application Layer Application Layer Error Code 0 Received Confirm FC Counter D Application Layer Error Count 0 Received Read FC Counterz J FClasterorz UI Received Write FC Counter z J Last Trans IIN in response J 1 Received Et
269. int NONE 0 0 2 Standard DNP3 Point NONE 0 0 Event Class 3 Standard DNP3 Point 0 0 Event Class jo Trigger Event Disable Change of State Event PT Point Type PI Point Index FN File Number FE File Element FSE File Sub Element Descriptor Element Configuration Index Descriptor Code DataType Code Data Length bytes Ancillary Value Lenath bytes Ancillary Value 0 NONE NONE 0 0 2 0 0 0 3 NONE NONE 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 3 NONE NONE 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 Cancel i Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 DNP3 Data Set Prototype 0 1 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 287 Data Set Prototypes Configuration Parameters These parameters are used to construct Data Set Prototypes object le umber of Prototype Elements 0 Prototype Elemen x onfiguration DataType Code Max Data Length butes Ancillary Value Length bytes Ancillary Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 en Hep Number of Prototypes Elements 0 10 This must the same as the number of the Prototype elements that are configured Prototype Element Configuration Each Prototypes element is configured in this configuration Double click an element to edit it xi Index
270. ion Set Reference Manual publication 1766 001 ATTENTION Analog outputs may fluctuate for less than a second A when power is applied or removed This characteristic is common to most analog outputs While the majority of loads will not recognize this short signal it is recommended that preventive measures be taken to ensure that connected equipment is not affected 1762 IF20F2 Wiring The following illustration shows the 1762 IF2OF2 analog expansion I O terminal block Wire Your Controller 51 1762 IF20F2 Terminal Block Layout Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 52 Wire Your Controller Single ended Sensor Transmitter Types 2 Wire Transmitter Transmitter Module Transmitter Signal ransmitter Signal 1 All power supplies rated N E C Class 2 1762 IF4 Input Type Selection Select the input type current or voltage using the switches located on the module s circuit board and the input type range selection bits in the Configuration Data File Refer to MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 RM001 You can access the switches through the ventilation slots on the top of the module Chi Ch2 Ch3 id i E 4 Voltage OFF Y Current ON Default Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Wire Your Controller 53 1762 IF4 Terminal Block Layout TIP Grounding the cable shield at the module end only u
271. ion shall be expected 2 Overvoltage Category Il is the load level section of the electrical distribution system At this level transient voltages are controlled and do not exceed the impulse voltage capability of the products insulation Safety Considerations Install Your Controller 9 ATTENTION Be careful of metal chips when drilling mounting A holes for your controller or other equipment within the enclosure or panel Drilled fragments that fall into the controller or O modules could cause damage Do not drill holes above a mounted controller if the protective debris shields are removed or the processor is installed WARNING Do not place the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controller in direct sunlight Prolonged exposure to direct sunlight could degrade the LCD display and have adverse effects on the controller The controller is not designed for outdoor use Safety considerations are an important element of proper system installation Actively thinking about the safety of yourself and others as well as the condition of your equipment is of primary importance We recommend reviewing the following safety considerations Hazardous Location Considerations This equipment is suitable for use in Class I Division 2 Groups A B C D or non hazardous locations only The following WARNING statement applies to use in hazardous locations WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD A e Substitution of components may impair suitability for
272. ires DH 485 protocol uses RS 485 Half Duplex as its physical interface RS 485 is a definition of electrical characteristics it is nota protocol RS 485 uses devices that are capable of co existing on a common data circuit thus allowing data to be easily shared between devices The DH 485 network offers interconnection of 32 devices multi master peer to peer capability token passing access control the ability to add or remove nodes without disrupting the network Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 214 Connecting to Networks via RS 232 RS 485 Interface maximum network segment of 1 219 m 4 000 ft The DH 485 protocol supports two classes of devices initiators and responders All initiators on the network get a chance to initiate message transfers determine which initiator has the right to transmit a token passing algorithm is used Control of message transfers on the DH 485 network is performed by rotating the token along the nodes on the network A node holding the token can send a message onto the network Each node is allowed a fixed number of transmissions based on the Token Hold Factor each time it receives the token After a node sends a message it passes the token to the next device The allowable range of node addresses is 1 31 There must be at least one initiator on the network such as a MicroLogix controller or an SLC 5 02 or later processor DH 485 Configuration Parameters When MicroL
273. ition B IE 9 8 BHBBHBHBBH UnProtected 5 We will change the data value of the L9 0 word to the negative decimal value 1300 First press OK to move the cursor to the data value position Then the last digit of 0000000000 will be flashing which means the cursor is at the data value position 6 Press the Left key twice Then the cursor will position at the third digit Press the Up key three times to change the third digit to 3 B II HEHUTE 9 8 BHBBHBBH3BH UnProtected 7 Press the Left key once Then press the Up key once The second digit will change to 1 Note that 1 is still flashing which means the cursor is still at the data value position Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Using the LCD 109 8 Press the Left key once Then press the Down key once The sign digit will change to as shown below Note that is still flashing which means the cursor is still at the data value position B I ITI 9 8 1 UnProtected 9 Press OK to apply the changes The new value 1300 is applied Note that the target word 0 which is to the right of L9 is flashing The cursor is moved automatically to the target word position REMOTE 9 8 1 UnProtected 10 You can identify this change of data value is reflected to your RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro programming software 2 Data Fi
274. k If you want to send an ASCII string via a serial channel which is configured to DNP3 Slave protocol use AWA and AWT instructions to control the Modem For Cabling and Connections see Communication Connections on page 57 For AWA and AWT instructions refer to the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual 1766 RMO001 Hequest LL Confirmation Valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked When the selection is Disabled Unchecked Primary Frames from the MicroLogix 1400 are sent out with the function code FC UNCONFIRMED USER DATA 4 When the selection is Enabled Checked Primary Frames from the MicroLogix 1400 are sent out with the function code FC CONFIRMED USER DATA 3 In this case the MicroLogix 1400 waits for the confirmation and may retry the Frame if it did not receive the confirmation from DNP3 Master within the time Confirmation Timeout x1 ms Send LL Confirmation Valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked When the selection is Disabled Unchecked the optional Secondary Frame is not sent out with the function code FC_NACK 1 or FC NOT SUPPORTED 15 When the selection is Enabled Checked the optional Secondary Frame is sent out with the function code FC 1 or FC NOT SUPPORTED 15 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 233 C
275. l store your entry apply the changes 44612 ESC Previous menu level cancel your entry Using Menus to Choose Values Press To e Go to next menu level e Store your entry OKJ e Apply the changes e Go to previous menu level ESC e Cancel your entry since the last Ok 44614 e Press repeatedly to go to the main menu e Change menu item e Change value e Change position 44615 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 92 Using the LCD Selecting Between Menu Items to be 44612 44613 44614 Cursor up or down RU PISO Status dd Honitoring Made Switch The symbol f is used as the cursor Cursor Display There are two different cursor types 000000 10 Status bHonitoring Mode Switch Data File bin BINARY Selection cursor the symbol is displayed left to the selected item Move cursor with the up down arrows Full block navigation is shown as a flashing block Change position with left right arrows Change values with up down arrows E HE 63 00 Radix Binary Symbol Columns 16 x Desc B3 E Properties Usage Help Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Usingthe LCD 93 Setting Values 5 ok D o o Change value up down arrows Move cursor between digits left right arrows Stores Entries co eve o eva oo
276. l Setup The Ethernet Protocol Setup screen of the LCD displays Ethernet Protocol settings assigned to the controller Follow these steps to edit the Ethernet Protocol settings for your controller 1 On the Main Menu screen select Advanced Set by using the Up and m Down keys on the LCD keypad as shown below If the menu items shown in the figure below are not displayed on the Main Menu screen you need to scroll down the screen by pressing the Down key O00000 User Display b dvanced Set Press the OK key on the LCD keypad The Advanced Settings Menu screen is displayed as shown below KeyIn DCDHM Cfg Cfg If ENET Cfg is selected press the OK key If not select ENET Cfg using the Up and Down keys and then press the OK key 000000 KeyIn Mode DCOHH Cfg Cfg Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 130 Using the LCD Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 4 nN If Protocol setup is selected press the OK key If not select Protocol setup using the Up and Down keys and then press the OK key 00000 Cfq Port Setting Protocol setup The password screen is displayed Press Up Down Left and Right keys to enter a Master password up to a maximum of 10 digits In this example the current Master password is allocated as 1234
277. l affect all channels Channel 0 and Channel 2 Link Driver This selection should be set to DNP3 Slave to communicate with DNP3 protocol Node Address Layer Configuration Parameters This value is a node address of this DNP3 Slave The valid range is 0 to 65519 Default value is 1 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 231 Baud The selections can be 38 4 19200 9600 4800 2400 1200 600 and 300 Default selection is 19200 Parity The selections can be NONE EVEN and ODD Default selection is NONE Stop Bits The selections can be 1 1 5 and 2 Default selection is 1 Enable Master Address Validation Valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked When the selection is Disabled Unchecked the MicroLogix 1400 accepts the requests from any DNP3 Master When the selection is Enabled Checked the MicroLogix 1400 accepts the requests only from the DNP3 Master which is configured in the Master 4 0 to Master Node4 The maximum number of Master Node Addresses for the Master Address Validation is 5 Enable Self Address Valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked When this bit is Disabled Unchecked any packets which contain the destination address 65532 FFFCh are ignored When this bit is Enabled Checked any packets which contain
278. layed as shown below 000000 Major Error L ade BB828h TIP For more information on a specific fault code refer to the Online Help of your RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro programming software 5 Press the ESC key to return to the Advanced Set Menu screen as shown in step 2 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Saving Loading Communication EEPROM Using the LCD 137 At the communication EEPROM screen you can load save user programs and data to from the Memory module Saving communication EEPROM Follow these steps to save user program and data from controller s memory to memory module 1 On the Main Menu screen select Advanced Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad If the menu items shown are not displayed on the Main Menu screen scroll down by pressing the Down key User Display b dvanced Set N Press the OK key on the LCD keypad Select Comms EEPROM using Down key and then press the OK key Comms EEPROM LED Setup 4A Select Store to MM to save user program and data and then press the OK key LIBET ETE Comms to HH Load from HH Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 138 Using the LCD 5 If your controller is in a non executing mode skip to the next step Otherwise switch your controller to a non executing mode LIBET ETE REMOTE
279. ld send the request with the function code FC_OPERATE 4 within this configured time DNP3 Object Data File Number The DNP3 Object Data File Numbers define the mapping of the listed DNP3 objects to MicroLogix 1400 data table files The number of elements defined for each of those data table files also defines the number of corresponding DNP3 objects See DNP3 Objects and MicroLogix 1400 Data Files on page 256 for more details DNP3 Object Config File Number The DNP3 Object Config File Numbers define the mapping of the listed DNP3 object properties class number online offline status object quality flags deadbands and or thresholds to MicroLogix 1400 data table files See DNP3 Objects and MicroLogix 1400 Data Files on page 256 for more details DNP3 Secure Authentication This section is applicable only to MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers The MicroLogix 1400 implements the DNP3 Secure Authentication based on the DNP3 Specification Supplement to Volume 2 Secure Authentication Version 2 00 DNP3 Secure Authentication has been implemented in the DNP3 Application Layer of the MicroLogix 1400 system If you configure any parameters regarding DNP3 Secure Authentication in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer configuration it affects all ports which are configured for DNP3 protocol in the MicroLogix 1400 controller Enable Secure Authentication This parameter is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers The valid sel
280. le 19 dec il 2 3 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 3 Jnadi Decima Symboli Dese CT E Properties Usage Help TIP After changing the data value of a target double word press the OK key to apply the changes or press the ESC key to discard the changes Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 110 Using the LCD 11 Now we will view an example of the data value of a protected property If LCD Edit Disable is set to checked enable the Protected message will be displayed and this data file cannot be edited by the LCD Data File Properties x General File 9 Type L Name Desc Elements 256 Last L9 255 Attributes Debug Skip When Deleting Unused Memory Scope Global C Local To File LAD 2 MAIN_PROG Protection Constant C Static None Memory Module Download Web View Disable CCD Edit BHBBBH138H Protected 12 Try to move the cursor to the data value position by pressing the OK key Because this double integer file is protected you will find that the cursor even does not move to the data value position 13 If you have finished monitoring the double integer file L9 press the ESC key to return to the File Number question screen as shown in step 2 Monitor Floating point Files In this section this assumption regarding the a
281. lement 1 r r r r r r r r r C1 CO Element 2 r r r r r r r C1 CO Element 3 r r r r r r r r r r r r r C1 CO Element 4 r r r r r r r r C1 CO Element 5 r r r r r r r r r r C1 CO C1 CO reserved C1 CO Class level 0 to 3 For Small BCD Element 0 for data index 0 PO 0 for including Small BCD Data to Class 0 poll response DNP3 Binary Input Object The supported object group and variations are listed in this section The MicroLogix 1400 responds with the default group and variation when the DNP3 Master requests to read the object with all variations Binary Input Static Objects glv0 Binary Input All Variations Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 265 g1v1 Binary Input Packed format default glv2 Binary Input With flags Binary Input Event Objects g2v0 Binary Input Event All Variations g2v1 Binary Input Event Without time g2v2 Binary Input Event With absolute time g2v3 Binary Input Event With relative time default Related Object File Number Binary Input Object File Number Related Configuration File Number Binary Input Config File Number To generate a Binary Input Object from the DNP3 Subsystem in the controller you should configure Binary Input Object File Number in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file When the Binary Input Obje
282. lf Duplex network When the MicroLogix 1400 is a slave device a master device is required to the network Several other Allen Bradley products support DF1 Half Duplex master protocol They include the SLC 5 03 and higher processors enhanced PLC 5 processors MicroLogix 1200 1500 and Rockwell Software RSLinx version 2 x and higher DF1 Half Duplex supports up to 255 devices address 0 to 254 with address 255 reserved for master broadcasts As a DF1 Half Duplex slave device the MicroLogix supports broadcast reception a DF1 Half Duplex master the MicroLogix 1400 supports both the reception and initiation of broadcast write commands via the MSG instruction The MicroLogix also supports Half Duplex modems using RTS CTS hardware handshaking Example DF1 Half Duplex Connections RS 232 44596 MicroLogix 1000 1200 1500 processors configured for DF1 Half Duplex Master MicroLogix MicroLogix 1000 Slave 1400 Slave MicroLogix MicroLogix SLC 5 04 SLC 5 03 with 1200 Slave 1500 Slave Slave 1747 KE Interface Module Slave Considerations When Communicating as a DF1 Slave on a Multi drop Link When communication is between either your programming software and a MicroLogi
283. licable codes and environmental specifications Connecting to Networks RS 232 RS 485 Interface 217 For more information on planning cable routes see Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 Software Considerations Software considerations include the configuration of the network and the parameters that can be set to the specific requirements of the network The following are major configuration factors that have a significant effect on network performance number of nodes on the network addresses of those nodes baud rate The following sections explain network considerations and describe ways to select parameters for optimum network performance speed See your programming software s user manual for more information Number of Nodes The number of nodes on the network directly affects the data transfer time between nodes Unnecessary nodes such as a second programming terminal that is not being used slow the data transfer rate The maximum number of nodes on the network is 32 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 218 Connecting to Networks via RS 232 RS 485 Interface Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Setting Node Addresses The best network performance occurs when node addresses are assigned in sequential order Initiators such as personal computers should be assigned the lowest numbered addresses to minimize the time required to initialize the network The
284. ller has powered up e When the user enters the 1 0 Status screen from other screen using the LCD menu If you are at other screen and want to view 1 0 status you have to enter the 1 0 Status screen manually using the menu Otherwise the current screen will be displayed continuously IMPORTANT If a user defined LCD screen is used the 1 0 S sctatus sreen is displayed e When the user holds down the ESC key for more than 3 seconds e When time out is enabled i e the time out period is set to a positive value and the time out period is passed You can enable and disable time out and set the time out period using the TO element in the LCD Function File For more information refer to the LCD Function File described in the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Heference Manual publication 1766 RM001 If time out is disabled i e the time out period is set to zero 0 and a custom LCD screen is displayed it will be displayed continuously until the user gives an input to change to other screen For more information see Using a User Defined LCD Screen on page 115 Viewing 1 0 Status Follow these steps to view the status of inputs and outputs on the LCD 1 On the Main Menu screen select I O Status by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad as shown below 000000 PIO Status Monitoring Made Switch HU Monitor User Defined Target Files Using the LCD 95 2 Then press the OK k
285. llisecond in the DNP3 Slave subsystem serves to provide appropriate resolution These two timers are synchronized by the following conditions power up request for time synchronization from DNP3 Master At power up the DNP3 subsystem gets the time from an RTC function file in the MicroLogix 1400 For the RTC function file to acquire the correct time the RTC module should be enabled before a power cycle to acquire the correct time from the function file In this example RTC function file the RTC module is disabled To enable it click Set Date amp Time while it is online Function Files x HSC PTOX PwMx sti Jen ATC 160 ww cso 1 cele Day of Week Sunday DD MM T YR Year D Date p o B MON Month D HH MM 55 DAY Day 0 8 1 H HR Hour 0 Time 0 0 0 E MIN Minute D SEC Second 0 H DOW Day Of The Week 0 LDS Disabled 0 BL Battery is Low 0 Disable Clock When there is a write request for time synchronization from a DNP3 Master DNP3 subsystem synchronizes its timer with the time from DNP3 Master and the time in RTC module is synchronized with the time from DNP3 Master This table shows Accuracy Configure the NEED TIME bit according to this table so that a DNP3 Master can send the time synchronization request for more accurate times in the controller RTC Accuracy
286. llowing table for use with relays contactors and starters Recommended Surge Suppressors Device Coil Voltage Suppressor Catalog Number Type Bulletin 100 104K 700K 24 48V AC 100 KFSC50 RC 10 28VAC 380 480V AC 100 KFSC480 12 55 12 77V DC 100 KFSV55 MOV 56 136 78 180VDC 137 277 AC 181 250 V DC 100 KFSV277 12 250V DC 100 KFSD250 Diode Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Recommended Surge Suppressors Wire Your Controller 31 Device Coil Voltage Suppressor Catalog Number Type Bulletin 100C C09 C97 24 48V AC 100 48 1 110 280V AC 100 FSC280 380 480V AC 100 480 1 12 55 12 77V DC 100 6 55 1 MOV 56 136V 78 180V DC 100 136 1 137 277 181 250V DC 100 6 277 1 278 575V AC 100 FSV575 1 12 250V DC 100 FSD250 Diode Bulletin 509 Motor Starter Size 0 5 12 120V AC 599 K04 MOV 240 264V AC 599 KA04 Bulletin 509 Motor Starter Size 6 12 120V AC 199 5 1 2 RC 12 120V AC 199 GSMA1 MOV Bulletin 700 R RM Relay AC coil Not Required 24 48V DC 199 FSMA9 MOV 50 120V DC 199 FSMA10 130 250V DC 199 FSMA11 Bulletin 700 Type P PK or PH Relay 6 150V AC DC 700 N24 RC 24 48 AC DC 199 FSMA9 MOV 50 120V AC DC 199 FSMA10 130 250V AC DC 199 FSMA11 6 300V DC 199 FSMZ 1 Diode Miscellaneous electro
287. loading Communication EEPROM changing LCD contrast and backlight Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 118 Using the LCD You can access to the Advanced Set Menu screen as shown below by selecting Advanced Set on the Main Menu screen 000000 bKeyIn Hode Cfg ENET Cfg RU Changing Key In Mode Key In Modes There are two Key In modes Continuous and Discrete TIP The Key In mode has an effect only when you change the data value of a trim pot ona Trim Pot screen either Trim Pot 0 or Trim Pot 1 screen For more information on how to change the data value of a trim pot see Changing Data Value of a Trim Pot on page 132 The current Key In mode determines how the value changes are applied when you press the Up and Down keys to change the data value for a trim pot When set to Continuous the changes are applied immediately whenever you press the Up and Down keys When set to Discrete the changes are applied only when you press the OK key after you have changed the value using the Up and Down keys By using the Key In Mode screen as shown below you can change the Key In mode O00000 RU KevIn Hode Continuous Discrete Changing Key In Mode Follow these steps to change the current Key In mode Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 N A Using the LCD 119 On the Main Menu screen select Advance Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad If the menu items sho
288. ly controller such as MicroLogix 1000 MicroLogix 1200 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 MicroLogix 1500 or to the 1747 DPS1 Network port using a 1761 CBL AMOO 8 pin mini DIN to 8 pin mini DIN cable or equivalent This type of connection will cause damage to the RS 232 485 communication port Channel 0 of the MicroLogix 1400 and or the controller itself Communication pins used for RS 485 communications are alternately used for 24V power on the other MicroLogix controllers and the 1747 DPS1 network port Making a DF1 Point to Point Connection You can connect the MicroLogix 1400 programmable controller to your personal computer using a serial cable 1761 CBL PM02 from your personal computer s serial port to the controller s Channel 0 The recommended protocol for this configuration is DF1 Full Duplex Communication Connections 63 You can connect a MicroLogix 1400 controller to your personal computer directly without using an external optical isolator such as Advanced Interface Converter AIC catalog number 1761 NET AIC as shown in the illustration below because Channel 0 is isolated within the controller MicroLogix 1400 Channel 0 Ie 1761 or 1761 CBL PM02 44593 1 Series C or later cables are required for Class Div 2 applications
289. ly req ired unless the AIC is powered by the device connected to port 2 then the selec ion switch should be set to cable Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 78 Communication Connections Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 1761 02 Series or equivalent Cable Wiring Diagram C CO CO E H H Programming Device 9 Pin D Shell 9 RI CTS 44605 Controller 8 Pin Mini Din B 1 GND RTS RTS DSR gt GND r 9 DCD DTR CIS TXD TXD om N RXD DCD co NM DI oy A wt N Communication Connections 79 Recommended User Supplied Components These components can be purchased from your local electronics supplier User Supplied Components Component external power supply and chassis ground Recommended Model power supply rated for 20 4 28 8V dc NULL modem adapter standard AT straight 9 25 pin RS 232 cable see table below for port information if making own cables 1761 or 1761 CBL PM02 Dn Port 3 PE Port 2 RS 485 connector DB 9 RS 232 6 1 cable straight
290. magnetic devices 6 150V AC DC 700 N24 RC limted to 35 sealed VA 1 Catalog numbers for screwless terminals include the string CR after 100 For example Cat No 100 FSC48 becomes Cat No 100 CRFSC48 Cat No 100 FSV55 becomes 100 CRFSV55 and so on V For use on the interposing relay B For use on the contactor or starter M RC Type not to be used with Triac outputs Varistor is not recommended for use on the relay outputs Grounding the Controller In solid state control systems grounding and wire routing helps limit the effects of noise due to electromagnetic interference EMI Run the ground connection from the ground screw of the controller to the ground bus prior to connecting any devices Use AWG 14 wire For AC powered controllers this connection must be made for safety purposes Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 32 Wire Your Controller ground or be floating not referenced to a potential other than ground Failure to follow this procedure may result ATTENTION All devices connected to the RS 232 485 communication port must be referenced to controller in property damage or personal injury e For 1766 L32BWA and 1766 L32BWAA controllers the COM of the sensor supply is also connected to chassis ground internally The 24V DC sensor power source should not be used to power output circuits It should only be used to power input devices e For 1766 L32BXB and 1766 L32BXBA
291. me Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 271 Related Object File Number 16 bit Analog Input Object File Number 32 bit Analog Input Object File Number Short Floating Point Analog Input Object File Number Related Configuration File Number 16 bit Analog Input Config File Number 32 bit Analog Input Config File Number Short Floating Point Analog Input Config File Number To generate an Analog Input Object from the DNP3 Subsystem in the controller you should configure Analog Input Object File Number in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file When only one Analog Input Object File is configured the Index number starts from 0 for the configured object 1 word is used for 1 Index of 16 bit Analog Input Object 1 double word is used for 1 Index of 32 bit Analog Input Object and 1 short float is used for 1 Index of Short Floating Point Analog Input Object If 16 bit Analog Input Object File Number 32 bit Analog Input Object File Number and Short Floating Point Analog Input Object File Number were configured in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file the starting index number of 16 bit Analog Input Object is 0 and the starting index number of 32 bit Analog Input Object starts from the ending index number of 16 bit Analog Input Object For example if 10 elements of 16 bit Analog Input Object were configured 10 elements of 32 bit Analog Input Object and
292. moved by input filters To help reduce the effects of environmental noise install the MicroLogix 1400 system in a properly rated for example NEMA enclosure Make sure that the MicroLogix 1400 system is properly grounded A system may malfunction due to a change in the operating environment after a period of time We recommend periodically checking system operation particularly when new machinery or other noise sources are installed near the MicroLogix 1400 system Wiring Your An alog Analog input circuits can monitor voltage signals and convert them to serial digital data Channels Input Terminal Block 1 D 1 8 1 10 COM 3 1 13 1 15 117 1 19 1 I II IVO IV2 4 com2 19 111 112 114 116 118 1 3 44529 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 40 Wire Your Controller Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 The controller does not provide loop power for analog inputs Use a power supply that matches the transmitter specifications as shown The analog output can support a voltage function as shown in the following illustration Analog Output Voltage Load VAC 0 3 0 4 065 0 7 0 8 0 10 ovi C COM DC4 0 5 0 6 066 0 9 0 11 VAC VAC Output Terminal Block Voltage Load rer 44680 Analog Channel Wiring Guidelines Consider the following when wiring your analog channels The analog common COM
293. mple sensor value Current Values Subtotal from Table 1225 mA at 5V DC 1155 mA at 24V DC System Loading 0 mA 260 mA 260 mA at 5V DC 0 mA 180 mA 180 mA at 24V DC System Loading 39 845 W 140 mA x 24V 260 mA x 5V 180 mA x 24V 3 360 mW 1 300 mW 4 320 mW 8 980 mW 8 98W System Loading Worksheet The tables below are provided for system loading validation See System Loading Example Calculations on page 368 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 370 System Loading and Heat Dissipation Current Loading Calculating the Current for Expansion 1 0 n A B nxA nxB Catalog Number Number of Device Current Requirements Calculated Current Modules at 5VDC mA at24VDC mA at5VDC mA at 24V DC mA 1762 1 8 50 0 1762 IFA 40 50 1762 IF20F2 40 105 1762 108 50 0 1762 1016 70 0 1762 1032T 170 0 1762 IR4 40 50 1762 14 40 50 1762 0A8 115 0 1762 0 8 115 0 1762 0816 175 0 1762 2 175 0 1762 4 40 165 1762 0V32T 175 0 1762 0W8 80 90 1762 0W16 140 2 180 2 1762 0 6 110 110 1762 10806 110 80 Total Modules 7 maximum Subtotal 1 Refer to your expansion 1 0 Installation Instructions for Current Requirements not listed in this table 2 Only applicable to Series 1 0 modules Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 System Loading and Heat Dissipation 371 Validating Systems
294. n concerning who should use this manual the purpose of this manual related documentation conventions used in this manual Rockwell Automation support Use this manual if you are responsible for designing installing programming or troubleshooting control systems that use MicroLogix 1400 controllers You should have a basic understanding of electrical circuitry and familiarity with relay logic If you do not obtain the proper training before using this product This manual is a reference guide for MicroLogix 1400 controllers and expansion I O It describes the procedures you use to install wire and troubleshoot your controller This manual explains how to install and wire your controllers gives you an overview of the MicroLogix 1400 controller system Refer to publication 1766 RM001 MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual for the MicroLogix 1400 instruction set and for application examples to show the instruction set in use Refer to your RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro programming software user documentation for more information on programming yout MicroLogix 1400 controller Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 xiv Related Documentation The following documents contain additional information concerning Rockwell Automation products To obtain a copy contact your local Rockwell Automation office or distributor Resource MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instru
295. n has higher priority than the Client connection A single TCP Client connection Any of the requests are accepted and the responses are transmitted via this connection The unsolicited responses are transmitted via this connection when this connection is available The MicroLogix 1400 does not request TCP client connection to DNP3 Master until an unsolicited response is generated UDP Datagram Accepts only broadcast packets when DNP3 destination node is one of OxFFFD OxFFFE and OxFFFF in the request Datagram End Point UDP Datagram only Any of the requests are accepted and the responses are transmitted via this connection All responses can be transmitted to the different DNP3 Master port according to the configuration of the parameters Remote UDP Port Number and Master IP Address0 If this parameter is not set to 0 the solicited responses are sent to the DNP3 Master port that is configured If this parameter is set to 0 the solicited responses are sent to the DNP3 Master port that sent the request TCP connection is not available in this configuration The parameter DNP3 over IP Enable is configured in the Channel 1 tab and other parameters are configured in the Chan 1 DNP3 tab Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 235 DNP3 over IP Enable The valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked
296. n pairs and every pair carries one differential signal Each line pair has to be twisted In small networks where only two Ethernet devices need to be connected together point to point a cross over RJ45 cable may be necessary where the transmit and receive lines on both JR45 connectors are cross connected The color coding for the cross over RJ45 cable have been defined in the EIA TIA 568A standard In a cross over cable layout you should remember that one end is normal and the other end has the cross over configuration However because the MicroLogix 1400 Ethernet port implements auto crossover also called Automatic MDI MDI X Configuration straight through cable may be used even for direct point to point connections between the MicroLogix 1400 and another Ethernet device TCP IP is the mechanism used to transport Ethernet messages On top of TCP Ethernet IP and or Modbus TCP protocol is required to establish sessions and to send the MSG commands Connections can be initiated by either a client program RSLinx application or a processor The client program or processor must first establish a connection to the MicroLogix 1400 to enable the MicroLogix 1400 to receive solicited messages from a client program or another processor In order to send an outgoing message the MicroLogix 1400 must first establish a connection with the destination node at a specified IP address on the Ethernet network A connection is established when
297. n port Channel 0 an Ethernet port Channel 1 and a non isolated RS 232 communication port Channel 2 The Channel 0 and Channel 2 ports on the MicroLogix 1400 can be connected to the following operator interfaces personal computers etc using DF1 Full Duplex point to point a DH 485 network a DF1 Radio Modem network a DF1 half duplex network as Master Slave a Modbus network as an RTU Master or RTU Slave an ASCII network a DeviceNet network as a slave or peer using a DeviceNet Interface catalog number 1761 NET DNT an Ethernet network using the Ethernet Interface module catalog number 1761 NET ENI or 1761 NET ENIW a DNP3 network as a Slave When connecting to RS 485 network using DH 485 DF1 Half Duplex Master Slave Modbus RTU Master Slave or DNP3 Slave protocols the MicroLogix 1400 can be connected directly via Channel 0 without an Advanced Interface Converter catalog number 1761 NET AIC The Channel 0 combo port provides both RS 232 and RS 485 isolated connections The approptiate electrical interface is selected through your choice of communication cable The existing MicroLogix 1761 communication cables provide an interface to the RS 232 drivers The 1763 NCO1 cable provides an interface to the RS 485 drivers Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 6 Hardware Overview Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 The controller may also be connected to serial devices s
298. nction Codes Qualifier Codes Function Qualifier Codes Num Num P dec hex Codes dec hex 91 1 Status of Requested 129 response 07 limited qty Operation qty 1 101 0 Binary Coded Decimal 1 read 06 no range or all Integers Any Variation 101 1 Binary Coded Decimal 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop Integers small 130 unsol resp 17 28 index 120 1 Authentication Challenge 32 Auth Request 5B free format 131 Auth resp 5B free format 120 2 Authentication Reply 32 Auth Request 5B free format 131 Auth resp 5B free format 120 3 Authentication Aggressive Any requests 07 limited qty 129 response 07 limited qty Mode Request 120 3 Authentication Aggressive 130 unsol resp 07 limited qty Mode Request 120 4 Authentication Session Key 32 Auth Request 07 limited qty Status Request 120 5 Authentication Session Key 131 Auth resp 5B free format Status 120 6 Authentication Session Key 32 Auth Request 5B free format Change 120 7 Authentication Error 33 Auth Request 5B free format 131 Auth resp 5B free format no ack 120 7 Authentication Error 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 5B free format 120 9 Authentication HMAC Any requests 5B free format 129 response 5B free format 120 9 Authentication HMAC 130 unsol resp 5B free format No Object function code only 13
299. nd Short Floating Point Analog Output Object File Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 257 For the MicroLogix 1400 Series A controllers General CharrelO Channel 1 Channel DNP3 Data Link Laver Channel for Unzolciied Response chano al Application Laver Enable Unsolicited On Stait Up Sendlritial U nsoicited On Start Up Eneble Unsolciled Fer Class mali Enable Unsolciled Fer Class2 arr ET um T Eneble Unsolciied Fer Class3 Man Responce Size 74 Synchronization ntery al rrins 0 Cerfrmetion Timeout 1 ma 10000 Number of Ratiiee D Number of Clase Events fo Held Time lass Everts xi s b Number Class2 Events fo Hold Time alte Class2 Events x1 Number Class3 Events fi 0 Hald Time aite Class3 Events 1 Selec Timeout x1 s 10 Groups Obiect Data File Number amp ect Contig File Number Bnawl fo Binsyinowt 0 Binary Outat 11 Binary Output 31 Courter 1Ebils 12 Counter 1 32 Analog Input 166118 Frozen Countes 1665 34 Analog Input 32615 Frozen Counter 32bits 35 Analog Inpul Short Floating 16 Analog Input 1 Shits Analog 16615 Analog Inout 32bts Analog Output S2biis 18 Analog Input Short Floating Analog OutpufShot Floating 1S DouleBimpa 33 Double Bit Inout SmaiBco O Smal BCD fa Lance Apply Help Publication 1766
300. nd Modems Rockwell Software RSLinx 2 0 or higher SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 DF1 Half Duplex Protocol SLC 5 05 PLC 5 or MicroLogix 1000 1200 and 1500 processors configured for DF1Half Duplex Master Rockwell Software ES D RSLinx 2 5 required for MicroLogix 1400 MicroLogix MicroLogix MicroLogix MicroLogix 1500 with MicroLogix 1500 with SLC 5 03 Slave 1000 Slave 1400 Slave 1200 Slave 1764 LSP or 1764 LRP 1764 LRP Processor Slave Processor Slave Connecting toa RS 485 The network diagrams on the next pages provide examples of how to connect MicroLogix 1400 controllers to the RS 485 network Network You can connect a MicroLogix 1400 controller to your RS 485 network directly without using an external optical isolator such as Advanced Interface Converter AIC catalog number 1761 NET AIC as shown in the illustrations below because Channel 0 is isolated within the controller TIP Use a 1763 NC01 Series A or later 8 pin mini DIN to 6 pin RS 485 connector cable or equivalent to connect a MicroLogix 1400 controller to a RS 485 network Mi
301. ned network is recommended Do not make the incorrect connection shown below Belden 31064 Belden 3106A or Belden 3106A or or 9842 9842 9842 lt lt 9 Connec Connector Connector Incorrect Single Cable Connection When connecting a single cable to the DH 485 connector use the following diagram Orange with White Stripes White with Orange Stripes ES Shrink Tubing Recommended Blue 3106A orN 77 Blue with White Drain Wire Stripes 79842 1 Chassis Ground Multiple Cable Connection When connecting multiple cables to the DH 485 connector use the following diagram to Previous Device to Next Device Communication Connections 73 Connections using Belden 3106A Cable For this Wire Pair Connect this Wire To this Terminal Shield Drain Non jacketed Terminal 2 Shield Blue Blue Terminal 3 Common White Orange White with Orange Stripe Terminal 4 Data B Orange with White Stripe Terminal 5 Data A Connections using Belden 9842 Cable For this Wire Pair To this Terminal Shield Drain Non jacketed Terminal 2 Shield Blue White White with Blue Stripe Cut back no connection Blue with White Stripe Terminal 3 Common White Orange White with Orange Stripe Terminal 4 Data B Orange with White Stripe Terminal 5 Data A 1 prevent confusion when installing the communication cable cut
302. ng Double Bit Input Small BCD THT Cancel Apply Help The MicroLogix 1400 controller currently supports the first of the two methods listed below for collision avoidance Detecting transmitted data line on RS485 communication Detecting out of band carrier DCD on RS232C communication When the MicroLogix 1400 is connected to RS485 network it monitors all data on the link If the MicroLogix 1400 is preparing to transmit a packet and finds the link busy it waits for an interval defined by the Backoff Time until it is no longer busy Backoff Time Pre Transmit Delay x1 ms Max Random Delay x1 ms The Pre Transmit Delay x1 ms in the Link Layer Channel Configuration file is a fixed delay and the Max Random Delay x1 ms in the Channel Configuration file is a maximum random delay for Channel 0 and Channel 2 You must specify those parameters to get the collision avoidance mechanism Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 311 Time Synchronization After the Backoff_Time the MicroLogix 1400 tries again either indefinitely or up to a configurable maximum number of retries If a maximum is used the protocol considers this as a link failure The time value in the embedded RTC module of the MicroLogix 1400 controller is updated by an RTC Function file every 2 seconds This resolution is insufficient to log DNP3 events in a DNP3 subsystem Another timer incremented by 1 mi
303. nity improvement This connection must be made for safety purposes on AC powered controllers This symbol denotes a functional earth ground terminal which provides a low impedance path between electrical circuits and earth for non safety purposes such as noise immunity improvement Terminal Block Layouts ATTENTION When you connect disconnect the Removable Terminal Block RTB with field side power applied an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding When used in a Class Division 2 hazardous location this equipment must be mounted in a suitable enclosure All wiring must be in accordance with Class Division 2 wiring methods of Article 501 of the National Electrical Code and or in accordance with Section 18 1J2 of the Canadian Electrical Code and in accordance with the authority having jurisdiction 1766 L32BWA L32BWAA Input Terminal Block IN10 COM IN13 IN15 IN17 IN19 IVo 4 W2 e000 Y COM 0 INT ING COM 2 IN9 INTI IN12 IN14 IN16 IN18 COM 1 1 W3 4 ANA uc VAC L2 N OUTO 0900900000 COM ANA VAC OUT OUT OUM DC5 OUT OUT8 ovi DCO VAC OO DC1 OUTH ovo VAC DC2 DC3 DC4 066 VAC VAC VAC VAC IL IL L 1 OUTS 00 6 00 9 Group Groupi
304. nnected or that the battery requires replacement The controller is designed to operate for up to 2 weeks from the time that the indicator first turns on We recommend that you replace the battery immediately when the indicator turns on Installation Follow the procedure below to ensure proper replaceable battery installation 1 Insert a battery into the battery pocket with wires facing up 2 Insert the battery wire connector into the battery connector 3 Secure the battery connector wires around the 1762 expansion bus connector as shown below Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 178 Replacement Parts Battery compartment Battery 1762 1 0 expansion bus connector Battery wire connector Battery connector Battery wires DOOM OOOO gt I 44522 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Replacement Parts 179 Battery Handling Follow the procedure below to ensure proper battery operation and reduce personnel hazards Use only for the intended operation Do not ship or dispose of cells except according to recommended procedures Do not ship on passenger aircraft ATTENTION A e Do not charge the batteries An explosion could result or the cells could overheat causing burns e Do not open puncture crush or otherwise mutilate the batteries A possibility of an explosion exists and or toxic corrosive and flammable liquids would be exposed e Do not incinerate or expose the batterie
305. no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop with flag and time 21 6 Frozen Counter 16 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop with flag and time 21 9 Frozen Counter 32 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop without flag 21 10 Frozen Counter 16 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop without flag 22 0 Counter Event Any 1 read 06 no range or all Variation 07 08 limited qty 22 1 Counter Event 32 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index with flag 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 22 2 Counter Event 16 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index with flag 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 23 0 Frozen Counter Event 1 read 06 no range or all Any Variation 07 08 limited qty Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Implementation Table for Series A controllers DNP Object Group amp Variation Request Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 DNP3 Master may issue MicroLogix 1400 must parse Response DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Group Description Function Qualifier Codes Function Qualifier Codes Num Num Codes dec hex Codes dec hex 23 1 Frozen Counter Event 1 read 06 no r
306. not interrupt the flash procedure once you have A begun to download the firmware If the flash procedure is interrupted the controller will be in a Missing or Corrupt OS state on the next power up When the controller is in this state the controller shows either one of the following The POWER LED is solid ON and the RUN FAULT and FORCE LEDs are blinking simultaneously The LCD shows this information 1 66 LEC BOOT FAN 01 BH ready The POWER and FAULT LED are solid ON and the LCD shows this information 1 755 LEC BOOT FAN H1 BB Fpga Corrupt When the LCD displays the Fpga Corrupt information the LEDs do not show the Walking pattern during the firmware upgrade process Recovering from Missing or Corrupt OS State In order to recover from this controller state you need to restart the operating system firmware upgrade as described here 1 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Ensure that the Ethernet connections are intact SNMP is enabled by default in the controller If the IP Address was configured during the Preparing for firmware upgrade stage the same IP configuration is retained in the controller Start the Firmware upgrade as explained in Using ControlFLASH for Firmware Upgrade on page 195 RS 232 Communication Interface RS 485 Communication Interface DF1 Full Duplex Protocol Appendix E Connecting to Networks via RS 232 RS 485 Interface The following protoc
307. ns toggle functionality connecting to RS 232 port connecting to RS 485 network connecting to connecting to DeviceNet connecting to Ethernet The MicroLogix 1400 controllers provide three communication channels an isolated RS 232 485 communication port Channel 0 an Ethernet port Channel 1 and a non isolated RS 232 communication port Channel 2 MicroLogix 1400 controllers support the following communication protocols from the primary RS 232 485 communication channel 0 and the RS 232 communication channel 2 DH 485 DF1 Full Duplex DF1 Half Duplex Master and Slave DF1 Radio Modem Modbus RTU Master and Slave ASCII DNP3 Slave The Ethernet communication channel Channel 1 allows your controller to be connected to a local area network for various devices providing 10 Mbps 100 Mbps transfer rate MicroLogix 1400 controllers support Ethernet IP with CIP explicit messaging message exchange BOOTP DHCP Client HTTP Server SMTP Client DNS Client SNMP Server Socket Interface with CIP Generic messaging Modbus TCP Client Server and DNP3 over IP MicroLogix 1400 controllers do not support Ethernet I O master capability through CIP implicit messaging real time I O messaging For more information on MicroLogix 1400 communications refer to the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 001 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P 2012 58 Comm
308. nter Threshold Config File Number In Series Word Offet Description Element 0 Threshold for point 0 Element 1 Threshold for point 1 Element 2 Threshold for point 2 Element 3 Threshold for point 3 Element 4 Threshold for point 4 Element 5 Threshold for point 5 For Analog Input type data you can configure Deadband information in the Configuration file Each element can be configured to the deadband value for each point An analog input event is generated if the absolute value of the difference between the present value of an analog input point and the value that was most recently queued as an event for that point exceeds the deadband value that was configured in this file Related Configuration File Numbers 16 bit Analog Input Deadband Config File Number In Series B 32 bit Analog Input Deadband Config File Number In Series B Short Floating Point Analog Input Deadband Config File Number In Series B Word Offet Description Element 0 Deadband for point 0 Element 1 Deadband for point 1 Element 2 Deadband for point 2 Element 3 Deadband for point 3 Element 4 Deadband for point 4 Element 5 Deadband for point 5 For Analog Output type data you can configure the object flag information in the Configuration file The upper byte of the configuration file of these objects is used to configure the object flag Other bits are reserved Related Configuration File Numbers 16 bi
309. o display the user defined screen implemented in your application program 1 On the Main Menu screen select User Display by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad as shown below If the menu items shown in the figure below are not displayed on the Main Menu screen you need to scroll down the screen by pressing the Down key 000000 RU User Display Acvanced Set 2 Then press the OK key on the LCD keypad If no user defined screen is used in your application program the screen is displayed as shown below RER SLOG SPOON 000009 RU Note that the U DISP indicator on the top of the LCD is displayed in solid rectangle It means the LCD is in User Defined LCD mode Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Configuring Advanced Settings Using the LCD 117 If a user defined screen is used in your application program the LCD screen is displayed as shown below according to the specific instructions used in your program 1 Select what 3 Hold down the ESC key more than 3 seconds to return to the Main Menu screen as shown below Monitor ing Hode Switch With the Advanced Set menu which is a sub menu under the main menu of the LCD you can use the following features changing Key In mode using communications toggle functionality configuring Ethernet Network Configuration using trim pots viewing system information viewing fault code saving
310. o mechanical relay type device that counts the occurrence of some event May be pulses developed from operations such as switch closures or interruptions of light beams 2 In controllers a software counter eliminates the need for hardware counters The software counter can be given a preset count value to count up ot down whenever the counted event occurs CPU Central Processing Unit The decision making and data storage section of a programmable controller data table The part of processor memory that contains I O values and files where data is monitored manipulated and changed for control purposes DIN rail Manufactured according to Deutsche Industrie Normenausshus DIN standards a metal railing designed to ease installation and mounting of your controller download Data is transferred from a programming or storage device to another device DTE Data Terminal Equipment Equipment that is attached to a network to send or receive data or both embedded I O Embedded I O is the controller s on board I O EMI Electromagnetic interference encoder 1 A rotary device that transmits position information 2 A device that transmits a fixed number of pulses for each revolution executing mode Any run or test mode expansion I O Expansion I O is I O that is connected to the controller via a bus or cable MicroLogix 1400 controllers use Bulletin 1762 expansion I O 375 false The status of an instru
311. oLogix 1400 must parse Response DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Group Description Function Codes Qualifier Codes Function Qualifier Codes Num Num hex Codes dec hex 3 0 Double bit Binary Input Any 1 read 00 01 start stop Variation 06 no range or all 3 1 Double bit Binary Input 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop Packed format 06 no range or all 3 2 Double bit Binary Input 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop With flags 06 no range or all 4 0 Double bit Binary Input 1 read 06 no range or all Event Any Variation 07 08 limited qty 4 1 Double bit Binary Input 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index Event Without time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 4 2 Double bit Binary Input 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index Event With absolute time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 4 3 Double bit Binary Input 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index Event With relative time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 10 0 Binary Output Any Variation 1 read 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 10 2 Binary Output Output 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop status with flags 06 no range or all 12 1 Binary Command Control 3 select
312. ode remote suspend mode operation halted by execution of the SUS instruction remote run mode remote test continuous mode remote test single scan mode RUN run mode Changing Mode Switch Position Mode Switch position can be changed at two different times using LCD keypad One is when the controller is powered up and the other is while the controller is powered on Mode Switch position can be set to either PROG or RUN when the controller is powered up This allows the controller operation which is different from the previous mode that is any program under RUN before can be stopped or any new program can be run when the controller is powered up How to forcibly set Mode Switch to RUN when the controller is powered up Press OK key for 5 seconds when the controller is powered up The following LCD screen appears if it s successfully done 000000 CPU Booted HUN Hode RU How to forcibly set Mode Switch to PROG when the controller is powered up Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 114 Using the LCD Press ESC key for 5 seconds when the controller is powered up The folowing LCD screen appears if it s successfully done 000000 PAO CPU Booted PROG Hode Note that I O output status may be changed for some programs While the controller is powered on follow these steps to change the position of the Mode Switch 1 On the Menu screen select Mode Switch
313. ode Res Response Trans Transmitted Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 333 If the data file is not configured in the parameter Diagnostic File Number of the Chan 1 DNP3 configuration the Channel 1 Ext dialog box will be shown as iol xl Channel 0 Channel 1 fi below Channel 2 No Diagnostic File Defined for this channel Diagnostics for Secure Authentication This feature is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers Counters in DNP3 Slave Secure Authentication subsystem are logged in the Data File The data file is configured in the parameter Diagnostic File Number in Secure Authentication The following table shows the 150 words of the data file for the troubleshooting The 50 words are used to log the counters for each channel Word offset 0 to 49 is for Channel 0 word offset 50 to 99 is for Channel 1 and word offset 100 to 149 is for Channel 2 Words 6 to 49 56 to 99 and 106 to 149 are the event counter for Challenger State Machine which is stated in the DNP3 Specification Supplement to Volume 2 Secure Authentication Version 2 00 Word Offset Current State Description CHO CH1 CH2 0 50 100 Security Idle Wait for Reply Authentication Error Counter 1 51 101 Security Idle Wait for Reply Reserved 2 52 102 Security Idle Wait for Reply Reserved 3 53 103 Security Idle Wait for Reply
314. odes 27 50 27 52 27 Reserved Always 0 28 CS0 28 CS2 28 Reserved Always 0 29 CS0 29 CS2 29 Reserved Always 0 30 CS0 30 CS2 30 Reserved Always 0 31 CS0 31 52 31 Reserved Always 0 32 CS0 32 52 32 Reserved Always 0 33 CS0 33 52 33 Reserved Always 0 34 CS0 34 CS2 34 Reserved Always 0 35 CS0 35 52 35 Reserved Always 0 36 CS0 36 CS2 36 Reserved Always 0 37 CS0 37 52 37 Reserved Always 0 38 CS0 38 CS2 38 Reserved Always 0 39 CS0 39 CS2 39 Reserved Always 0 40 CS0 40 CS2 40 Reserved Always 0 41 50 41 52 41 Reserved Always 0 42 50 42 52 42 Reserved Always 0 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 322 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Communication Status File Words Words Offset 43 File Element Description for Channel 0 CS0 43 File Element Description for Channel 2 52 43 Description List Category ID 10 44 CS0 44 CS2 44 Length 14 45 CS0 45 CS2 45 Format Code 2 46 CS0 46 CS2 46 Pre Send Time Delay 47 50 47 CS2 47 Node Address for this Slave 48 CS0 48 CS2 48 Reserved always 0 49 50 49 CS2 49 RTS Send Delay 50 CS0 50 CS2 50 RTS Off Delay 51 50 51 52 51 bits 0 7 Baud Rate bits 8 9 Parity bits 10 15 Reserved Always 0 52 CS0 52 52 52 List Category ID 6 53 50 53 52 53 Length 32
315. ogix communications are configured for DH 485 the following parameters can be changed DF1 Full Duplex Configuration Parameters Parameter Options Baud Rate 9600 19 2K Node Address 1 31 decimal Token Hold Factor 1 4 See Software Considerations on page 217 for tips on setting the parameters listed above Devices that use the DH 485 Network In addition to the MicroLogix controllers the devices shown in the following table also support the DH 485 network sale Description Installation Function Publication umber Bulletin 1761 MicroLogix Series or later These controllers support DH 485 communications 1761 6 3 Controllers 1000 Bulletin 1762 MicroLogix Series A or later These controllers support DH 485 communications 1762 UM001 1200 Bulletin 1763 MicroLogix Series A or later These controllers support DH 485 communications 1763 UM001 1100 Bulletin 1764 MicroLogix Series or later These controllers support DH 485 communications 1764 UM001 1500 Bulletin 1747 ISLC 500 SLC Chassis These processors support a variety of 1 0 requirements and 1747 UM011 Processors Processors functionality Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Connecting to Networks RS 232 RS 485 Interface 215 Catalog Description Installation Function Publication Number 1746 BAS BASIC Module SLC Chassis Provides an interface for SLC 500 de
316. ol program stored in a write protected memory module If a change is required use a different memory module Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 146 Using Real Time Clock and Memory Modules Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Removal Insertion Under Power The memory module can be installed or removed without risk of damage to either the memory module or the controller except during a data transaction If the memory module is removed during a data transaction data corruption can occur If a memory module is installed while the MicroLogix 1400 is executing the memory module is not recognized until either a power cycle occurs or until the controller is placed in a non executing mode program mode suspend mode or fault condition Memory Module Information File The controller has a Memory Module Information MMI File which provides status from the attached memory module At power up or on detection of a memory module being inserted the catalog number series revision and type are identified and written to the MMI file If a memory module is not attached zeros are written to the MMI file Refer to the MicroLogix 1400 Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 001 for more information Program Data Download To download the program and data from a memory module to the controller s memory on the Comms menu in your RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro programming software point EEPROM and then click
317. ol relay MCR provides a reliable means for emergency machine shutdown Since the master control relay allows the placement of several emergency stop switches in different locations its installation is important from a safety standpoint Overtravel limit switches or mushtoom head push buttons are wired in series so that when any of them opens the master control relay is de energized This removes power to input and output device circuits Refer to the figures on pages 15 and 16 ATTENTION Never alter these circuits to defeat their function since serious injury and or machine damage could result TIP If you are using an external DC power supply interrupt the DC output side rather than the AC line side of the supply to avoid the additional delay of power supply turn off The AC line of the DC output power supply should be fused Connect a set of master control relays in series with the DC power supplying the input and output circuits Place the main power disconnect switch where operators and maintenance personnel have quick and easy access to it If you mount a disconnect switch inside the controller enclosure place the switch operating handle on the outside of the enclosure so that you can disconnect power without opening the enclosure Whenever any of the emergency stop switches are opened power to input and output devices should be removed When you use the master control relay to remove power from the external I O circuits
318. olFLASH for Firmware 7 195 ControlFLASH Error Messages eeu ce verit e wor don 205 Missing or Corrupt OS State 208 Recovering from Missing or Corrupt OS 208 Appendix E RS 232 Communication 209 RS 485 Communication 209 DF1 Full Duplex Protocol t a a ee 209 DF1 Half Duplex Protocol 210 DF1 Halt Duplex Operation 210 Considerations When Communicating as a DF1 Slave a Multi drop Link 211 13 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P 2012 14 Table of Contents Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Using Modems with MicroLogix Programmable Controllers 212 DH 485 Communication 213 DH 485 Configuration 214 Devices that use the DH 485 214 Important DH 485 Network Planning Considerations 215 Example DH 485 Connections 219 Modbus Communication Protocol 221 PAS CL acres ELA eee E I S 221 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 22 Appendix F Channel Configuration for DNP3 5 223
319. oller mode is set to REMOTE RUN 1515 HSC PTOX PWMX STI JE LCD BHI 4 Address EILCU U m CBL Customized Boot Logo ASCII File L SCD Start with Customized Display 0 TO Data Input Timeout of LCD Instructic 0 LDN LCD Instruction Job Done L ERR LCD Display Operation Error Bit ERN LCD Module Operation Error Num 1 LCD 0 CBL Integer 0 0 E 3 L JOG Jog data update Mode Set 0 L TMIN Trimpot Low value 0 Trimpot High V 2 Trimpot 0 Data MIN 0 Trimpot 1 Data TMIN TMAX 0 L WND Instruction Display Window 0 OK key Customized Display Follow these steps to view and change the data values of the double integer file L9 1 On the Main Menu screen select Monitoring by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad 000000 I Status bHonitoring Mode Switch Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 108 Using the LCD 2 Then press the OK key on the LCD keypad The File Number prompt is displayed B II HEHUTE File Hum 989 Data Tvpe L Press UK to edi 3 If Integer is selected as shown in step 2 press the OK key If not selected press the Down key to select it and then press the OK key 4 The current data value ON of the L9 0 word is displayed Note that the target word 0 which is at the right L9 is flashing which means the cursor is at the target word pos
320. ollers In this document is used to explain File Object feature Generating IMG files using RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro Typically RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro stores the ladder program as RSLogix Files RSS However to download a ladder program using a File Object via DNP3 network you must save your ladder program in the RSLogix IMG Files IMG format Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 314 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 After you write your ladder program select Save As from the File menu of RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro Select the save type as RSLogix IMG Files Save Program As BE Path D DNP3S Save in G DNP3S E ek Ee File name ML14004_DNF35 Cancel Help Export file types Export database E Logix C Al AFS Eypart options Save data as external files File PLC Information Processor Name Station 09 Processor Bul 1766 MicroLogix 1400 Series A Save as type Revision Note Version o E After saving the file you can see the file ML1400A_DNP3S IMG This is the file to be used for download gdt view Favorites Tools p Search Folders E Name Size Type File and Folder Tasks 3KB IMG File 8 Rename this ML1400A DNP3S PRF 1KB PICS Rules File w Move this file IMPORTANT RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro v8 10 00 and the
321. ols are supported from the RS 232 485 combo communication channel Channel 0 and the RS 232 communication channel Channel 2 DF1 Full Duplex DF1 Half Duplex Master Slave DF1 Radio Modem DH 485 Modbus Master Slave ASCII DNP3 Slave The communications port on Channel 0 of the MicroLogix 1400 controller utilizes a combined isolated RS 232 485 interface RS 232 and RS 485 are Electronics Industries Association standards that specify the electrical and mechanical characteristics for serial binary communication They provide a variety of system configuration possibilities RS 232 and RS 485 define electrical connection characteristics zof protocols The MicroLogix 1400 controller supports an additional non isolated RS 232 interface on Channel 2 One of the biggest benefits of an RS 232 interface is that it lets you integrate telephone and radio modems into your control system using the appropriate DF1 protocol only not DH 485 protocol but it is for point to point connections only between two devices The RS 485 interface supports connection of devices in a multidrop hard wired configuration using DH 485 DF1 Half Duplex Modbus or DNP3 protocols Also the RS 485 interface supports connection in a multidrop hard wired configuration using ASCII protocols DF1 Full Duplex protocol provides a point to point connection between two devices DF1 Full Duplex protocol combines data transparency American N
322. on Output 2 3 and 4 Only Power supply voltage 24V DC 1596 10 Class 2 On state voltage drop at max load current 1V DC Not Applicable at max surge current 2 5V DC Not Applicable Current rating per point max load See graphs above 100 mA min load 1 0mA 20 mA max leakage 1 0mA 1 0 mA Surge current per point peak current 4 0 Not Applicable max surge duration 10 ms Not Applicable max rate of repetition at 30 C 86 F once every second Not Applicable max rate of repetition at 60 C 140 F once every 2 Not Applicable seconds Turn On Time maximum 11 Us 28 ns Turn Off Time maximum 89 us 2 3 us 1 Output 2 3 and 4 are designed to provide increased functionality over the other FET outputs Output 2 3 and 4 may be used like the other FET transistor outputs but in addition within a limited current range they may be operated at a higher speed Output 2 3 and 4 also provide a pulse train output PTO or pulse width modulation output PWM function Specifications 157 AC Input Filter Settings OFF Delay ms Nominal Filter Setting ms Maxi aximum High Speed DC Input Filter Settings Inputs 0 to 11 Nomi ON Delay ms OFF Delay ms Maximum Counter Frequency Hz ominal Filter Setting ms f Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum 50 Duty Cycle 0 005 0 001 0 005 0 001 0 005 100 0 kHz 0 008 0 003 0 008 0 003 0 008 60 0 kHz 0 0125 0 0075 0
323. on 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 360 Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface Configuration Parameters Parameter Description Default Status MSG The amount of time in ms allowed for a MSG instruction to establish a connection with 15 000 ms read write Connection the destination node The MSG Connection Timeout has 250 ms resolution and a range Timeout from 250 to 65 500 MSG Reply The amount of time in ms that the MicroLogix 1400 will wait for a reply to a command 3 000 ms read write Timeout that it has initiated via a MSG instruction The MSG Reply Timeout has 250 ms resolution and a range from 250 65 500 Inactivity The amount of time in minutes that a MSG connection may remain inactive before itis 30 minutes read write Timeout terminated The Inactivity Timeout has a 1 minute resolution and a range from 1 65 500 minutes Contact The Contact string which is specified by the SNMP client The maximum length is 63 read only characters Location The Location string which is specified by the SNMP client The maximum length is 63 read only characters Network Link The Link ID assigned to the MicroLogix 1400 by either an RSLinx OPC topic or by the 0 read write ID routing table in a 1756 DHRIO or 1756 DH485 module The range is 0 199 Starting Data The first ASCII A file number in a contiguous block of 4 32 ASCII files 4 per User 0 read write File Number Provided Web Page The r
324. onfirmation Timeout x20 ms When Request LL Confirmation is enabled the MicroLogix 1400 waits to receive a confirmation frame until this timeout has expired The valid range is 1 65535 Default value is 1 Message Retries When Confirmation Timeout x1 ms has expired and this parameter was non zero value the MicroLogix 1400 tries to send retry packets The valid range is 0 255 Default value is 0 Pre Transmit Delay x1 ms The MicroLogix 1400 waits for the specified time before sending the packet The valid range is 0 65535 Default value is 0 RTS Off Delay x20 ms When the Control is set at Half Duplex Modem CTS RTS handshaking this feature is enabled This specifies a time delay between the end of a transmission and dropping of the RTS signal The valid range is 0 65535 Default value is 0 RTS Send Delay x20 ms When the Control is set at Half Duplex Modem CTS RTS handshaking this entry is enabled This specifies a time delay between the raising of the RTS and the initiation of a transmission The valid range is 0 65535 Default value is 0 Max Random Delay x1 ms This parameter is used with Pre Transmit Delay x1 ms for Collision Avoidance on RS 485 network For more details see Collision Avoidance on page 310 The valid range is 0 65535 Default value is 0 Channel 1 Ethernet Link Layer Configuration Parameters This section is only applicable to MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers Th
325. only output circuits require MCR protection The following illustrations show the Master Control Relay wired in a grounded system TIP In most applications input circuits do not require MCR protection however if you need to remove power from all field devices you must include MCR contacts in series with input power wiring Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Install Your Controller 15 Schematic Using IEC Symbols L1 L2 230V AC 4 Disconnect Fuse MCR 230V AC 1 0 M Circuits Isolation Operation of either of these contacts will Vaser ay x1 15V AC J yo Cat No 700 PK400A1 or 230V AC Emergency Stop Stop Start Suppressor Fuse Push Button Overtravel Cat No 700 N24 rn Limit Switch rm Suppr MCR 115V AC or 1 230 1 0 Circuits DC Power Supply Use IEC 950 EN 60950 s 24V DC Lo Hi UO Line Terminals Connect to terminals of Power Circuits Supply 1766 L32AWA 1766 L32AWAA 1766 L32BWA 1766 L32BWAA Line Terminals Connect to 24V DC terminals of Power Supply 1766 L32BXB 1766 L32BXBA 44564 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 16 Install Your Controller Schematic Using ANSI CSA Symbols
326. onnected to the AIC the power selection switch determines what device powers the ATTENTION If you use an external power supply it must be A 24V DC 15 20 Permanent damage results if a higher voltage supply is used Set the DC Power Source selector switch to EXTERNAL before connecting the power supply to the AIC The following illustration shows where to connect external power for the AIC Bottom View ATTENTION Always connect the CHS GND chassis ground A terminal to the nearest earth ground This connection must be made whether or not an external 24V DC supply is used Power Options Below are two options for powering the AIC Use the 24V DC user power supply built into the MicroLogix 1000 1200 or 1500 controller The AIC is powered through a hard wired connection using a communication cable 1761 2 or equivalent connected to port 2 Usean external DC power supply with the following specifications operating voltage 24V DC 15 20 output current 150 mA minimum rated NEC Class 2 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 82 Communication Connections Make a hard wired connection from the external supply to the screw terminals on the bottom of the AIC ATTENTION If you use an external power supply it must be 24V A DC 15 20 Permanent damage results if miswired with the wrong power source Connecting to DeviceNet You can connect a MicroLogix 14
327. onse 17 28 index with time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 32 5 Analog Input Event 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index Single prec flt pt without 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp time 32 7 Analog Input Event 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index Single prec flt pt with time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 40 0 Analog Output Status 1 read 00 01 start stop Variation 06 no range or all 40 1 Analog Output Status 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop 32 bit with flag 06 no range or all 40 2 Analog Output Status 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop 16 bit with flag 06 no range or all Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 348 Implementation Table for Series controllers DNP Object Group amp Variation Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Request DNP3 Master may issue MicroLogix 1400 must parse Response DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Group Description Function Codes Qualifier Codes Function Qualifier Codes Num Num hex Codes dec hex 40 3 Analog Output Status 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop Single prec flt pt with flag 06 no range or all 41 1 Analog Output 32 bit 3 s
328. onsiderations preventing excessive heat master control relay installing a memory module using the battery controller mounting dimensions controller and expansion I O spacing mounting the controller mounting 1762 expansion I O connecting 1762 expansion I O UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment for use in Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations Groups A B C D CE marked for all applicable directives C Tick marked for all applicable acts C UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment for use in Canada This product has the CE mark and is approved for installation within the European Union and EEA regions It has been designed and tested to meet the following directives EMC Directive This product is tested to meet Council Directive 2004 108 EC Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC and the following standards in whole or in part documented in a technical construction file Publication 1766 UM001G EN P 2012 8 Install Your Controller Installation Considerations Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 11 EN 61000 6 4 EMC Part 6 4 Generic Standards Emission Standard for Industrial Environments E IN 61000 6 2 EMC Part 6 2 Genetic Standards Immunity for Industrial Environments This product is intended for use in an industrial environment Low Voltage Directive This product is
329. ormal contro 1 function Please make sure that al processes Contr ol affected by this equipment have been suspended and that all safety critical functions are not affected To abort this firmware update press Cancel now To begin the update now press P 2 Finish 7 Catalog Number 1766LEC 3 ome Serial Number Curent Revision amp 2 0 New Revision A 2 0 More Info es 11 Click the Finish button The ControlFLASH dialog box is displayed ControlFLASH e Are you sure you want to begin updating the target device 12 Click the Yes button If your computer has more than one Ethernet interface installed the following dialog box displays the assigned IP addresses of each of the listed Ethernet interfaces Otherwise go to step 16 Select IP address af Ethernet interface to use far fx 10 116 34 94 10 116 38 204 13 Highlight the IP address of the PC Ethernet interface that connects to the Ethernet network hosting the target processor and click the OK button Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System 201 14 You may need to wait several seconds before the Progress dialog box is displayed A typical sequence is shown below While the download is in progress the RUN LED FAULT LED and FORCE LED display a Walking Pattern First RUN LED ON then FAULT LED ON and then FORCE LED ON in sequence When the flashing starts the
330. ost effective Typical network topology is pictured below Ethernet Network Topology Ethernet Hub or Switch RJ45 connectors on both ends of cable 10 100Base T to MicroLogix 1400 to PC Ethernet Card Channel 1 IMPORTANT The MicroLogix 1400 controller contains a 10 100Base T RU45 Ethernet connector which connects to standard Ethernet hubs or switchs via 8 wire twisted pair straight through cable To access other Ethernet mediums use 10 100Base T media converters or Ethernet hubs or switchs that can be connected together via fiber thin wire or thick wire coaxial cables or any other physical media commercially available with Ethernet hubs or switchs Connecting an Ethernet switch on the Ethernet Network The MicroLogix 1400 Ethernet port supports the following Ethernet settings 10 Mbps half duplex or full duplex 100 Mbps half duplex or full duplex Mode selection can be automatic based on the IEEE 802 3 auto negotiation protocol In most cases using the auto negotiation function results in proper operation between a switch port and MicroLogix 1400 Ethernet port With RSLogix500 RSLogix Micro programming software version 8 10 00 or later you can manually set the communication rate and duplex mode of an Ethernet port you have connected to the switch port The settings of the Ethernet port and the switch port must match Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 354 Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface Publ
331. ostic Counters Category Identifier 7 50 7 52 7 Length 8 CS0 8 CS2 8 Format Code 9 50 9 52 9 bits 4 15 Reserved modem control line states Always 0 bit 3 Data Carrier Detect bit 2 Reserved modem control line state Always 0 bit 1 Request To Send bit 0 Clear To Send 10 CS0 10 CS2 10 Total Packets Sent 11 CS0 11 52 11 Total Packets Received for this node 12 CS0 12 CS2 12 Total Packets Observed 13 CS0 13 52 13 Undelivered Message Packets Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Communication Status File Words Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 321 File Element File Element Words Offset Description for Description for Description Channel 0 Channel 2 14 50 14 52 14 Message Packets Retried 15 50 15 52 15 Packets Received 16 50 16 52 16 Link Layer Error Count 17 50 17 52 17 Link Layer Error Codes 0 ERR_NO_ERROR 1 ERR_NO_RX_BUFFER 2 ERR_TOO_SHORT 3 ERR_TOO_LONG 4 ERR_UART_ERROR 5 ERR_BAD_CRC 6 ERR CTS TIMEOUT 7 ERR CTS DROP MID PKT 8 ERR UNKNOWN CHAR 18 50 18 52 18 Reserved Always 0 19 50 19 52 19 Reserved Always 0 20 50 20 52 20 Reserved Always 0 21 50 21 52 21 Reserved Always 0 22 50 22 52 22 Reserved Always 0 23 50 23 52 23 Data Link Layer Active Node Table 24 CS0 24 CS2 24 Length 25 CS0 25 CS2 25 Format Code 26 CS0 26 52 26 Number of N
332. ou specify in the TUF element as well as the appropriate number of elements exist in the MicroLogix 1400 user program The data protection for a file depends on the LCD edit disable setting When LCD Edit Disable is set 1 Checked in file properties the corresponding data file is considered read only by and the Protected message is displayed When LCD Edit Disable is clear 0 Unchecked the UnProtected message is displayed and the corresponding data file is editable from the LCD keypad Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 96 Using the LCD Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 IMPORTANT Although you cannot change protected data from the LCD keypad the control program or other communication devices do have access to this data The Protection bit LCD Edit Disable only provides write protection from the LCD keypad This does not provide any overwrite protection from ladder logic HMI or programming software It is the user s responsibility to ensure that data is not inadvertently overwritten TIP The LCD always starts at bit 0 of a data file It cannot start at any other address within the file Monitoring a Bit File For explanations in this section we assume the following in the application program A bit file B3 which is 256 elements long 256 words 4096 bits is defined with the preset data as shown in the screen capture below BIET Offset ZW B3 0 000002020000 02
333. ounter Config File Number 16 bit Analog Input Config File Number 32 bit Analog Input Config File Number Short Floating Point Analog Input Config File Number Bit Offset 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Element 0 F7 FG F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 FO r r DCE r r C1 CO Element 1 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 Fi FO r r DCE r r C1 CO Element 2 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 FO r r DCE r r C1 CO Element 3 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 Fi FO r r DCE TE r r C1 CO Element 4 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 FO r r DCE r r C1 CO Element 5 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 Fi FO r r DCE r r C1 CO reserved C1 C0 Class level 0 to 3 TE Trigger Event for the point In Series B DCE Disable Change of state Event for the point In Series B For other Inputs Element _0 for data index 0 F7 F0 Object Flags FLAG7 FLAG6 FLAG5 LOCAL_FORCED REMOTE_FORCED COMM_LOST RESTART ONLINE Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 For Counter type data you can configure Threshold information in the Configuration file Each element can be configured to the threshold value for each point counter event is generated if the absolute value of the difference between the present value of a counter point and the value that was most recently queued as an event for that point exceeds the threshold value that was configured in this file Related Configuration File Numbers 16 bit Counter Threshold Config File Number In Series B Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 263 32 bit Cou
334. pendix H to determine how much heat a certain combination generates 1762 Expansion 1 0 1762 Expansion 1 0 1762 Expansion 1 0 Connected to MicroLogix 1400 Controller 44581 44563 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 4 Hardware Overview Communication Cables Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Expansion 1 0 Catalog Number Description Digital 1762 1 8 8 Point 120V Input Module 1762 108 8 Point Sink Source 24V DC Input Module 1762 1016 16 Point Sink Source 24V DC Input Module 1762 1032T 32 Point Sink Source 24V DC Input Module 1762 048 8 Point 120 240V AC Triac Output Module 1762 0 8 8 Point Sourcing 24V DC Output Module 1762 0B16 16 Point Sourcing 24V DC Output Module 1762 0B32T 32 Point Sourcing 24V DC Output Module 1762 0V32T 32 Point Sinking 24V DC Output Module 1762 0W8 8 Point AC DC Relay Output Module 1762 0W16 16 Point AC DC Relay Output Module 1762 0X6l 6 Point Isolated AC DC Relay Output Module 1762 lIO80W6 8 Point Sink Source 24V DC Input and 6 Point AC DC Relay Output Module Analog 1762 IF4 4 Channel Voltage Current Analog Input Module 1762 OF4 4 Channel Voltage Current Analog Output Module 1762 IF20F2 Combination 2 Channel Input 2 Channel Output Voltage Current Analog Module Temperature 1762 IRA 4 Channel RTD Resistance Input Module 1762 IT4 A Channel Thermocouple mV Input Module Use only the follo
335. pgraded through the Ethernet port of the controller In order to download a new operating system you must have the following ControlFLASH Upgrade Kit containing the new OS Go to http www ab com programmablecontrol plc micrologix downloads html to download the upgrade kit e a Windows 7 Windows 2000 Windows NT Windows XP or Windows Vista fj based computer to run the download software The ControlIFLASH Upgrade Kit includes the operating system upgrade to be downloaded the ControlFLASH programming tool along with its support drivers and on line help Pre pari n g for Fi rmware Before upgrading the controller s operating system OS you must U p 9 d e install ControlFLASH software on your personal computer prepare the controller for updating Install ControlFLASH Software Double click the ControlFLASH msi file to install the operating system upgrade If a ControlFLASH directory does not already exist one is created in your Program Files directory Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 194 Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Prepare the Controller for Firmware Upgrade 1 It is important that the SNMP server is enabled before the firmware upgrade begins You can check if the SNMP server is enabled by looking at the Channel Configuration page for Channel 1 in RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro If the SNMP server is not enabled you can still
336. pplication program is made The TUF element of the LCD Function File is set to 8 This specifies the floating point file F8 as the target file to monitor via the LCD Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Using the LCD 111 Most of the steps outlined in this section are similar to those found in Monitoring Double Integer files on page 105 However you will not be able to edit floating point files from the LCD 1 2345BBe H37 Protected The Protected message is displayed on the LCD for floating point files TIP MicroLogix 1400 Series A controllers display an Unprotected message but you will not be able to edit the corresponding data file Monitor System Status Files In this section this assumption regarding the application program is made The TUF element of the LCD Function File is set to 2 This specifies the system status file S2 as the target file to monitor via the LCD The format string on the third line is displayed as decimal hexadecimal or binary for each word element depending on what each elements means Arithmetic flags For more information see the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 001 Using the Mode Switch The MicroLogix 1400 provides the controller mode switch on the LCD The possible positions of the mode switch are PROGRAM REMOTE and RUN You can change Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 112 Using th
337. processor file The set of program and data files used by the controller to control output devices Only one processor file may be stored in the controller at a time program file The area within a processor file that contains the ladder logic program program mode When the controller is not executing the processor file and all outputs are de energized program scan A part of the controller s operating cycle During the scan the ladder program is executed and the output data file is updated based on the program and the input data file programming device Executable programming package used to develop ladder diagrams protocol The packaging of information that is transmitted across a network 379 read To acquire data from a storage place For example the processor READs information from the input data file to solve the ladder program relay An electrically operated device that mechanically switches electrical circuits relay logic A representation of the program or other logic in a form normally used for relays restore To download transfer a program from a personal computer to a controller tesetved bit A status file location that the user should not read or write to tetentive data Information associated with data files timers counters inputs and outputs in a program that is preserved through power cycles RS 232 An standard that specifies electrical mechanical and functional ch
338. protocol configuration parameters 69 214 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 DH485 network configuration parameters 217 68 devices that use the network 214 example system configuration 219 installation 71 planning considerations 215 DIN rail 374 disconnecting main power 10 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 221 DNP3 analog input object 276 280 BCD object 282 binary input object 264 266 counter object 271 device attribute object 298 320 269 frozen counter object 274 objects 256 slave application layer 250 238 double integer file monitoring 105 download 374 download a user program via DNP3 network 312 DTE Data Terminal Equipment 374 duplicate IP address detection 357 E Electronics Industries Association EIA 209 EMC Directive 7 8 EMI 374 encoder 374 error recovery model 186 errors configuration 190 189 extended error information field 190 hardware 190 module error field 190 non critical 189 Ethernet advanced functions 364 messaging 352 processor performance 352 using the SLC 5 05 processors 351 Ethernet communication 351 Ethernet connections 356 Ethernet network configuration 120 Ethernet protocol setup 129 European Union Directive compliance 7 EMC Directive 7 low voltage directive 8 event generation control 306 executing mode 374 expansion 1 0 1762 IF20F2 input type selection 49 50 expansion 1 0 mounting 24 25 mounting on DIN rail 24 expansion 1 0 specifications 159 expansion 1 0 wiring 42 1
339. r Point Address 10 Point Address Type Point Type Point Index Standard DNP NONE 0 m Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 294 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 For instance if Prototype 0 includes a Namespace at Index 2 and Name at Index 3 then the first DAEL in the Prototype 0 is at Index 4 The Prototype DAEL at Index 4 matches Point Address 4 in the PTYP element configuration Because of this Point Address 4 in the PTYP element configuration of the Descriptor should be configured properly Number of Prototype Elements Prototype Element Configuration DataType Code Max Data Length Ancillary Value Lengt Ancillary Value ON U b P 020200 200200 2 0 16 Application Name 3 NAME NONE 0 10 Fault Name 4 INT 2 27 Fault Code in System Status 5 NONE NONE 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 7 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 9 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 Cancel Help Descriptor Element Configuration nex p Point Address 1 Point Address Paint Address Standard DNP3 Point Point Addre 4 Point NONE Po 7o 7 7 Ru gt Paint Index 0 Poi Data Type Code NONE m Point Address 2 Paint Address Point Address Standard DNP3 Point Point Addre Max DataLength bytes p Point NONE
340. r File Frozen 32 bit Counter Config File Only B file 9 to 255 256 16 bit Analog Input File 16 bit Analog Input Config File Only B file 3 910 255 256 16 bit Analog Input Deadband Config File In Only N file 7 910 255 Series 32 bit Analog Input File 32 bit Analog Input Config File Only B file 9 to 255 256 32 bit Analog Input Deadband Config File In Only L file 9 to 255 Series B Short Floating Point Analog Short Floating Point Analog Input Config File Only B file 9 to 255 256 Input Fig Short Floating Point Analog Input Deadband Only F file 8 9 to 255 Config File In Series B 16 bit Analog Output File 16 bit Analog Output Config File In Series B Only B file 9 to 255 256 32 bit Analog Output File 32 bit Analog Output Config File In Series B Only B file 9 to 255 256 Short Floating Point Analog Short Floating Point Analog Output Config File In Only B file 9 to 255 256 Output File Series B Small BCD File Small BCD Class Config File Only B file 9 to 255 256 For Binary Input Double Bit Binary Input and Small BCD type data you can configure Class information in the Configuration file The lower 2 bits in the elements of the Configuration files are the configuration of Class information to the relative objects Other bits are reserved Related Configuration Files Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 261 Binary Input Config File Number Double
341. r Manual publication 1766 UM002 System Loading Calculations Appendix H System Loading and Heat Dissipation TIP A maximum of seven 1762 1 0 modules in any combination can be connected to a MicroLogix 1400 controller You can use this appendix to determine the power supply load and heat dissipation for your system The MicroLogix 1400 controller is designed to support up to any seven 1762 expansion I O modules When you connect MicroLogix accessories and expansion I O an electrical load is placed on the controller power supply This section shows how to calculate the load of your control system The following example is provided to illustrate system loading calculation The system calculation procedure accounts for the amount of 5V DC and 24V DC current consumed by controller expansion I O and user supplied equipment Use the System Loading Worksheet on page 369 to calculate your controller configuration Publication 1766 UM001G EN P 2012 368 System Loading and Heat Dissipation System Loading Example Calculations Current Loading Calculating the Current for Expansion 1 0 n A B nxA nxB Catalog Number Number of m Requirement Calculated Current Modules at 5V DC mA at24V DC mA at5VDC mA at24V DC mA 1762 1A8 2 50 0 100 0 1762 IFA 40 50 1762 IF20F2 40 105 1762 108 50 0 1762 1016 70 2 0 1762 10327 170 0 1762 1984 40 5
342. r system represented as logic 0 OFF or 1 ON terminal point on an I O module that external I O devices such as a push button or pilot light are wired to throughput The time between when an input turns on and the corresponding output turns on true The status of an instruction that provides a continuous logical path on a ladder rung upload Data is transferred to a programming or storage device from another device watchdog timer timer that monitors a cyclical process and is cleared at the conclusion of each cycle If the watchdog runs past its programmed time period it causes a fault workspace The main storage available for programs and data and allocated for working storage wtite To copy data to a storage device For example the processor WRITEs the information from the output data file to the output modules Numerics 1747 BA battery 17 1762 expansion 1 0 dimensions 24 1762 24AWA wiring diagram 36 1762 1 8 wiring diagram 42 1762 IF20F2 input type selection 49 output type selection 50 terminal block layout 51 wiring 50 1762 IF4 input type selection 52 terminal block layout 53 1762 1016 wiring diagram 43 1762 1032T wiring diagram 44 1762 108 wiring diagram 43 1762 1080W6 wiring diagram 48 1762 0A8 wiring diagram 44 1762 0B16 wiring diagram 45 1762 0B32T wiring diagram 46 1762 0B8 wiring diagram 45 1762 0V32T wiring diagram 46 1762 0W16 wiring diagram 47 1762 OW8 wiring diagram 47
343. r vibration and shock concerns use the panel mounting method described on page 23 rather than DIN rail mounting Pollution Degree 2 is an environment where normally only non conductive pollution occurs except that occasionally a temporary conductivity caused by condensation shall be expected Over Voltage Category Il is the load level section of the electrical distribution system At this level transient voltages are controlled and do not exceed the impulse voltage capability of the product s insulation Pollution Degree 2 and Over Voltage Category Il are International Electrotechnical Commission IEC designations Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 22 Install Your Controller Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 DIN Rail Mounting The maximum extension of the latch is 14 mm 0 55 in in the open position A flat blade screwdriver is required for removal of the controller The controller can be mounted to EN50022 35x7 5 or EN50022 35x15 DIN rails DIN rail mounting dimensions are shown below P amp gt 44518 Dimension Height A 90 mm 3 5 in B 27 5 mm 1 08 in C 27 5 mm 1 08 in Follow this procedure to install your controller on the DIN rail 1 Mount your DIN rail Make sure that the placement of the controller on the DIN rail meets the recommended spacing requirements see Controller and Expansion I O
344. rcuits WARNING Explosion Hazard Do not connect or disconnect connectors while circuit is live Circuits installed on the machine for safety reasons like overtravel limit switches stop push buttons and interlocks should always be hard wired directly to the master control relay These devices must be wired in series so that when any one device opens the master control relay is de energized thereby removing power to the machine Never alter these circuits to defeat their function Serious injury or machine damage could result Power Distribution There are some points about power distribution that you should know Install Your Controller 11 Power Considerations e The master control relay must be able to inhibit all machine motion by removing power to the machine I O devices when the relay is de energized It is recommended that the controller remain powered even when the master control relay is de energized e If you are using a DC power supply interrupt the load side rather than the AC line power This avoids the additional delay of power supply turn off The DC power supply should be powered directly from the fused secondary of the transformer Power to the DC input and output circuits should be connected through a set of master control relay contacts Periodic Tests of Master Control Relay Circuit Any part can fail including the switches in a master control relay circuit The failure of one of these switches would most l
345. re Authentication Enable Aggressive Mode Critical FCs File Number D Expected Session Key Channe Interval xi s 1800 Groups Reply Timeout x100ms Maximum Error Count HMAC Algorithm Foal User Info Config File Number o OL OnLine OffLine Diagnostic File Number o Cancel Apply Help Each of the data files for a DNP3 Object will have a file number in the user memory as shown below You can configure the Data file number for each DNP3 Object in the DNP3 Slave tab of the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration File types for this object file can be Binary Integer Long or Float data files The file numbers for each DNP3 Object cannot be in conflict with each other Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 259 DNP3 Data Files Relationship between DNP3 object database and MicroLogix data files DNP Objects Micrologix Data Files Related Maximum File Maximum Object Name Configurable File name for Data File Type Configurable Groups Number Index Elements Binary Input Object 1 2 4096 Binary Input Object File Only B file 3 9 to 255 256 Double Bit Binary 3 4 2048 Double Bit Binary Input Object File Only B file 3 9 to 255 256 Input Object Binary Output Object 10 12 4096 Binary Input Object File Only B file 3 9 to 255 256 Counter Object 20 22 256 16 bit Counter Object File Only N file 7 9 to
346. red to 0 IIN1 4 bit is never turned on Max Response Size The MicroLogix 1400 sends Application Layer frame to fit in Max Response Size If the Response packet size is larger than this value the MicroLogix 1400 fragments the Response packet The valid range is 27 2048 in bytes Default value is 2048 Confirmation Timeout x7 ms When Enable Confirmation is enabled the MicroLogix 1400 waits for Application Layer Confirmation until the Confirmation Timeout x1 ms has expired The valid range is 100 65535 in 1ms increments Default value is 10000 Number of Retries This parameter is only for Unsolicited Response If this value has the maximum which is 65535 it means infinite retries of the Unsolicited Response The valid range is 0 65535 Default value is 0 Number of Class Events If the MicroLogix 1400 is configured not to initiate Unsolicited Response this parameter used to limit the maximum number of events which is generated and logged into the event buffer for Class 1 events In this case value 0 will disable to generate the event If the MicroLogix 1400 is configured to generate Unsolicited Response and the number of queued Class 1 events is reached to this value Unsolicited Response is initiated The valid range is 0 to 6013 Default value is 10 Hold Time after Class1 Events x1 s This parameter is only for Unsolicited Response The MicroLogix 1400 holds the events during Hold Time after Class1 Events x
347. requests at powerup The BOOTP Valid parameter remains clear until a BOOTP reply has been received BOOTP lets you dynamically assign IP Addresses to processors on the Ethernet Link Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface 361 To use BOOTP a BOOTP Server must exist on the local Ethernet subnet The server is a computer that has BOOTP Server software installed and reads a text file containing network information for individual nodes on the network The host system s BOOTP configuration file must be updated to service requests from MicroLogix 1400 controllers The following parameters must be configured Configuration Parameters Parameter Description IP Address A unique IP Address for the MicroLogix 1400 controller Subnet Mask Specifies the net and local subnet mask as per the standard on subnetting RFC 950 Internet Standard Subnetting Procedure Gateway Specifies the IP address of a gateway on the same subnet as the MicroLogix 1400 that provides connections to another IP network TIP You can use any commercially available BOOTP server If you do not have BOOTP Server capabilities on your network and you want to dynamically configure Channel 1 you can download the free Rockwell Automation BOOTP server from the Rockwell Automation website Go to http Awww ab com networks ethernet bootp html When is enabled the following events occur at power up
348. ress The valid value is an IP address Default value is 0 0 0 0 Master IP Address1 Master Address2 Master IP Address3 Master IP Address4 This value is used for validation of the Master IP address when the Enable Access Control is Enabled Checked This value is only valid when the Enable Access Control is Enabled Checked The valid value is an IP address Default value is 0 0 0 0 Remote TCP Port Number This value is used to configure Master Port Number for Unsolicited Response The valid range is 0 to 65535 Default value is 20000 Remote UDP Port Number for Initial Unsolicited This value is used to configure Master UDP Port Number for Initial Unsolicited Response if the parameter End Point Type is selected as Datagram Only The valid range is 0 to 65535 Default value is 20000 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 237 Remote UDP Port Number This value is used to configure Master UDP Port Number if the parameter End Point Type is selected as Datagram Only The valid range is 0 to 65535 Default value is 20000 Keep Alive Interval x1 s This parameter specifies a time interval for TCP Keep Alive mechanism If the timer times out the MicroLogix 1400 transmits a keep alive message The keep alive message is a DNP Data Link Layer status request FC REQUEST LINK STATUS If response is not received to the keep alive message the MicroLogix 1400 deems the TCP connection broken and close
349. rizes shipment of Lithium batteries for disposal by motor vehicle only in regulation 173 1015 of CFR 49 effective January 5 1983 For additional information contact US Department of Transportation Research and Special Programs Administration 400 Seventh Street S W Washington D C 20590 Although the Environmental Protection Agency at this time has no regulations specific to lithium batteries the material contained may be considered toxic reactive or corrosive The person disposing of the material is responsible for any hazard created in doing so State and local regulations may exist regarding the disposal of these materials For a lithium battery product safety data sheet contact the manufacturer Sanyo Energy Corporation Tadarand US Battery Division 2001 Sanyo Avenue 2 Seaview Blvd San Diego CA 92173 Port Washington NY 11050 619 661 4801 516 621 4980 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 182 Replacement Parts Notes Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Understanding the Controller Status Indicators Appendix C Troubleshooting Your System This chapter describes how to troubleshoot your controller Topics include understanding the controller status indicators controller error recovery model analog expansion I O diagnostics and troubleshooting calling Rockwell Automation for assistance The MicroLogix 1400 provides three groups of status indicators the status LEDs on the top o
350. rnet bootp html The device must have BOOTP enabled factory default or DHCP enabled to use the utility To configure your device using the BOOTP utility perform the following steps Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 1 Run the BOOTP DHCP server utility software It will ask you to configure your netwotk settings before using the BOOTP DHCP server tool Enter your Ethernet settings for Subnet Mask and Gateway If you are not sure about it get a help from your system administrator Just leave Primary DNS Secondary DNS and Domain Name If corresponding information is allocated to the PC where BOOTP DHCP server utility is installed enter the same information Network Settings x Defaults Subnet 255 255 252 0 Gateway 10 121 28 1 Primar 0 0 0 0 Secondary DNS 0 0 0 OK Cancel 2 In the Request History panel you will see the hardware addresses of devices issuing BOOTP or DHCP requests BOOTP DHCP Server 2 3 File Tools Help Request History Clear History Add to Relation List hrxmin s Ethernet Address MAC IP Address DO 0F 73 FF 00 78 0 20 8 00 00 0 73 00 78 Hostname 00 06 73 FF 00 78 00 00 0F 73 FF 00 78 B Relation List Mew Delete Enable Enable Disable Ethernet Address Type IP Address Hostname Descrip
351. roLogix 1400 Channel 0 to a modem using an RS 232 cable the maximum that the cable length may be extended is 15 24 m 50 ft DTE Device DCE Device MicroLogix Modem 1400 PanelView Channel 0 etc 8 Pin 25 Pin 9 Pin 7 TXD gt TXD 2 3 4 RXD lt 3 2 2 GND lt gt GND 7 5 1 B DCD 8 1 8 DTR 20 4 5 DCD DSR 6 6 6 CIS CTS 5 8 3 RTS gt RIS 4 7 ATTENTION Do not connect pins 1 and 8 This connection will cause damage to the RS 232 485 communication port channel 0 of the MicroLogix 1400 and or the controller itself Constructing Your Own Modem Cable If you construct your own modem cable the maximum cable length is 15 24 m 50 ft with a 25 or 9 pin connector Refer to the following typical pinout for constructing a straight through cable pins 4 and 6 are internally connected for 1766 LEC only AIC Optical Isolator Modem or 1766 LEC Channel 2 9 25 Pin 9 3 TXD gt TXD 2 3 2 4 3 2 5 GND lt gt GND 7 5 1 CD CD 8 1 4 gt DTR 20 4 6 DSR DSR 6 6 8 CIS 4 CTS 5 8 7 RTS gt RTS 4 7 Constructing Your Own Null Modem Cable Communication Connections 65 If you construct your own null modem cable the maximum cable length is 15
352. rototype Any Variation g85v1 Data Set Prototype With UUID g86v1 Data Set Descriptor Data set contents g86v2 Data Set Desctiptor Characteristics g87v0 Static Data Set Any Variation g87v1 Static Data Set Present value g88v0 Event Data Set Any Variation g88v1 Event Data Set Snapshot Related Object Configuration File Number Data Set Prototypes Object File Number Data Set Descriptors Object File Number Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 284 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 To generate a Data Set Object from the DNP3 Subsystem in the controller configure Data Set Prototypes Descriptors Object File Number in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file and also the Maximum Number of Data Set Prototypes Descriptors Files Each Data Set Prototypes Object file N data file can have up to 10 elements of Data Set Prototypes and each Data Set Descriptors Object file N data file can have up to 10 elements of Data Set Descriptors As an example with Data Set Prototypes files if you configure Data Set Prototypes Object File Numbers to 50 and Maximum Number of Data Set Prototypes Files to 9 N Data files 50 to 58 are reserved to store the structure of the Data Set Prototypes configuration amp Data Set Prototypes file N50 4 Data Set Prototypes file N51 lt Data Set Proto
353. rs MicroLogix controllers can respond to MSG instructions received The MicroLogix controllers can initiate MSG instructions to devices on the DH network PC can send read and write commands to MicroLogix controllers PC can do remote programming of MicroLogix controllers Connecting to Networks RS 232 RS 485 Interface TIP Use a 1763 NCO1 Series A or later cable to connect a MicroLogix 1400 controller to a DH 485 network 219 You can connect a MicroLogix 1400 controller to your DH 485 network directly without using a RS 232 to RS 485 converter and optical isolator such as the AIC catalog number 1761 NET AIC as shown the illustration below because Channel 0 has isolation and RS 485 built in AIC AIC PanelView L1 E 000 0 00900 p PanelView 550 SLC 5 04 DH 485 Network AIC AIC Oat MicroLogix 1400 Ey Je icroLogix 1000 MicroLogix 1200 MicroLogix SLC 5 04 DH Network SLC 5 04 PLC 5 44609 Example DH 485 Connections The following network diagrams provide examples of how to connect MicroLogix controllers to the DH 485 network You can connect a MicroLogix 1400 controller to your DH 485 network directly without using a RS 232 to RS 485 converter and optical isolator such as the Ad
354. ry Input Event With relative time default Related Object File Number Double Bit Binary Input Object File Number Related Configuration File Number Double Bit Binary Input Config File Number To generate a Double Bit Binary Input Object from the DNP3 Subsystem in the controller you should configure Double Bit Binary Input Object File Number in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file When the Double Bit Binary Input Object File is configured the Index number starts from 0 2 bits are used for one Index As an example a Double Bit Binary Input Object File is shown below This file has 10 elements and 80 Double Bit Binary Input points Index 0 of the Double Bit Binary Input Object is B20 0 0 and B20 0 1 Index 1 is B20 0 2 and B20 0 3 and Index 79 is B20 9 14 and B20 9 15 cO c D oo o o a G G O eB oOo oOo a a dc O oa o a odd lt E z pe 0000000 Prepertics Usage Help Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 271 As an example a Double Bit Binary Input Config File is shown below This
355. s Relay Operation 1 5 g Shock Operating 30G panel mounted 3 pulses per axis Relay Operation 7 g Non Operating 50 g panel mounted 3 pulses per axis 40G DIN Rail mounted Agency Certification C UL certified under CSA C22 2 No 142 UL 508 listed CE compliant for all applicable directives C Tick marked for all applicable acts Hazardous environment class For 1762 1032T 1762 2 and 1762 OV32T modules Hazardous Location Class Division 2 Groups A B C D UL 1604 C UL under CSA C22 2 No 213 ANSI ISA 12 12 01 For all other modules Hazardous Location Class Division 2 Groups A B C D UL 1604 C UL under CSA C22 2 No 213 for all modules Radiated and conducted emissions EN50081 2 Class A Electrical EMC The module has passed testing at the following levels ESD immunity For 1762 1032T 1762 2 and 1762 0V32T modules IEC61000 4 2 4 kV contact 8 kV air 4 kV indirect For all other modules IEC1000 4 2 4 kV contact 8 kV air 4 kV indirect Radiated RF immunity For 1762 1032T 1762 2 and 1762 0V32T modules IEC61000 4 3 10V m 80 2700 MHz 80 amplitude modulation For all other modules IEC1000 4 3 10 V m 80 1000 MHz 80 amplitude modulation 900 MHz keyed carrier for all modules EFT B immunity For 1762 10327 1762 2 and 1762 0V32T modules IEC61000 4 4 2 kV 5 kHz on signal ports For all other modules IEC1000 4 4 2 kV 5 kHz Surg
356. s default value Restore Events After Power Cycle When the selection is disabled unchecked DNP3 events which are generated before a power cycle are flushed after a power cycle When the option is enabled checked all DNP3 events are restored after a power cycle Enable Unsolicited On Start Up Valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked When the selection is Disabled Unchecked the MicroLogix 1400 will not send any enabled Unsolicited Responses after a restart until it has received a FC_ENABLE_UNSOLICITED 20 command from the DNP3 Master When the selection is Enabled Checked the MicroLogix 1400 will send any enabled Unsolicited Responses after a restart to the DNP3 Master unconditionally Enable Unsolicited For Classi Valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked When the selection is Disabled Unchecked Unsolicited Response is disabled for Class 1 events To prevent overflowing of the event buffer DNP3 Master should poll for Class 1 events When the selection is Enabled Checked Unsolicited Response is enabled for Class 1 events Enable Unsolicited For Class2 Valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked When the selection is Disabled Unchecked Unsolicited Response is disabled for Class 2 events To prevent overflowing of the event
357. s the corresponding data file is considered read only by the LCD and the Protected message is displayed IMPORTANT Although you cannot change protected data from the LCD keypad the control program or other communication devices do have access to this data The Protection bit LCD Edit Disable only provides write protection from the LCD keypad This does not provide any overwrite protection from ladder logic HMI or programming software It is the user s responsibility to ensure that data is not inadvertently overwritten For explanations in this section we assume the following in the application program A bit file L9 which is 256 elements long 256 words is defined with the preset data as shown in the screen capture below 23 Data File 19 dec Radix Decimal z Symbol s Dese d E Properties Usage Help Using the LCD 107 LCD Edit Disable is set to unchecked disable Data File Properties X General File 9 Type L Nam EY rd Elements 256 Attributes Debug Skip When Deleting Unused Memory Scope Global C Local To File LAD 2 MAIN PROG Protection Constant C Static None Memory Module Download Web View Disable LCD Edit Disable The TUF element of the LCD Function File is set to 9 to specify the integer file L9 as the target file to monitor on the LCD as shown in the screen capture below The contr
358. s is not configured you can still perform the IP configuration using Static BOOTP or DHCP settings Once the IP configuration is done it is used throughout the firmware upgrade process If the IP configuration has been done the IP address may be read from the processor when online with RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro In the Channel Configuration dialog box select the Chan 1 System tab or use the LCD If BOOTP DHCP Enable is selected and if the IP Address is 0 0 0 0 then note the Ethernet Hardware Address which begins with 00 00 BC 3 The controller should be in Program mode before you start the firmware upgrade access the Mode Switch from the LCD See Using the Mode Switch on page 111 for information about controller modes and how to use the Mode Switch See Viewing Ethernet Status on page 120 to find how to browse for the controller s IP address ATTENTION Do not interrupt the flash procedure once you have N begun to download the firmware If the flash procedure is interrupted the controller will be in a Missing or Corrupt OS state on the next power up To recover the controller from a missing corrupt OS state see Missing or Corrupt OS state on page 208 1 Launch the ControlFLASH application under Programs Flash Programming Tools If the Ethernet connection IP configuration has not been established attach an Ethernet cable to the controller from your computer or a hub and ensure that the Ethernet connection is inta
359. s or minutes to appear AB SNMP BOOTP Server Running 23 Waiting for BOOTP request from hardware address 00008 394 89 Providing IP address 10 116 38 203 You may need to wait several seconds before you are returned to the AB_SNMP DLL Enter IP Address dialog box Within several seconds the Device Identification box displays the processor s current revision information Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System 199 9 Click the OK button AB_SNMP DLL Enter IP Address Enter the IP address of the target module name or dot notation 10 116 38 203 Device Identification Vendor Allen Bradley Product Name 1766 L32BWAA Series Revision 2 0 System Name MicroLogix 1400 Location Contact OK 10 Select the appropriate revision from the Firmware Revision dialog box and click the Next button Firmware Revision Cetalog Number 1766LEC Serial Number Curert Revision 4 20 Con trol Select the new revision lor this update Revision Show All M Current Folder c program liles controlilash lt Back Cancel Publication 1766 UM001G EN P 2012 200 Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System The Summary dialog box is displayed DANGER The target module is about to be update with new frmware During the update the module will be unable to perform its n
360. s the TCP connection The valid range is 1 to 65535 Default value is 10 Slave Node Address This value is a node address of this DNP3 Slave The valid range is 0 to 65519 Default value is 1 Local TCP Port Number This value is used to configure Local TCP Port Number which is used for TCP socket listening The valid range is 0 to 65535 Default value is 20000 Local UDP Port Number This value is used to configure Local UDP Port Number which is used for UDP socket listening The valid range is 0 to 65535 Default value is 20000 Diagnostic File Number The diagnostic file number is used to store the diagnostics for the troubleshooting of DNP3 Ethernet subsystem The status of DNP3 TCP and UDP subsystem is stores to this data file The value of this parameter is file only Valid range is 0 7 9 to 255 Default value is 0 See Diagnostics on page 320 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 238 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration Parameters Channel for Unsolicited Response Only channels already configured for DNP3 protocol appear in the Channel for Unsolicited Response dropdown menu Any and all Unsolicited Responses are transmitted via this selected channel Channel 1 is only supported in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers Valid selections are enabled checked and disabled unchecked with disabled a
361. s to high temperatures Do not attempt to solder batteries An explosion could result e Do not short positive and negative terminals together Excessive heat can build up and cause severe burns Storage Store lithium batteries in a cool dry environment typically 20 C 2 5 C 68 F 77 F and 40 60 humidity Store the batteries and a copy of the battery instruction sheet in the original container away from flammable materials Transportation One or Two Batteries Each battery contains 0 23 g of lithium Therefore up to two batteries can be shipped together within the United States without restriction Regulations governing shipment to or within other countries may differ Three or More Batteries Procedures for the transportation of three or more batteries shipped together within the United States are specified by the Department of Transportation DOT in the Code of Federal Regulations CFR49 Transportation An exemption to these regulations DOT E7052 covers the transport of certain hazardous materials classified as flammable solids This exemption authorizes transport of lithium batteries by motor vehicle rail freight cargo vessel and cargo only aircraft providing certain conditions are met Transport by passenger aircraft is not permitted Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 180 Replacement Parts Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 A special provision of DOT E7052 11th Rev October 21
362. screen and specifying the CBL element of the LCD Function File to the address of this ASCII file The screen shown below is an example of a customized Startup screen HACHI NE Your imported Bitmap file format should meet the following criteria image resolution 128 x 64 pixels black white image image size 1088 bytes consisting of image header 62 bytes raw image data size 1024 bytes padding data 2 bytes To load a customized boot logo image to your controller the CBL Customized Boot Logo ASCII File element in the LCD Function File should be configured properly If the CBL element is set to 0 default or if the indexed ASCII file does not exist the embedded default logo will be displayed Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 88 Using the LCD Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 10 5 HSC 57 ATC LCD SS BHI cso 54 m TT H Start with Customized Display TO Data Input Timeout of LCD LDN LCD Instruction Job Done ERR LCD Display Operation Error Bit ERN LCD Module Operation Error Num 2 TUF Target User Define File Number 7 JOG Jog data update Mode Set 1 L Trimpot Low Value 1 Trimpot High Value 2 L Trimpot 0 Data TMIN 1 Trimpot 1 Data TMAX 1 WND Instruction Display Window 0 OK OK key in Customized Display 0
363. served 78 Reserved 79 Reserved 80 Reserved Word offset 7 27 and 47 reflect the Error Codes that have been caused in the sessions for DNP3 TCP Server UDP and TCP Client respectively The following table lists the possible ranges of the Error Code Any others are reserved Value DEC Mnemonic Description 0 NO ERROR No error found 1 ERR SOCKET CREATE Socket error during Create operation 2 ERR SOCKET LISTEN Socket error during Listen operation 3 ERR SOCKET BIND Socket error during Bind operation 4 ERR SOCKET ACCEPT Socket error during Accept operation 5 ERR SOCKET CONNECT Socket error during Connect operation 6 ERR SOCKET SEND Socket error during Send operation 7 ERR SOCKET RECEIVE Socket error during Receive operation 8 ERR SOCKET UNLISTEN Socket error during Unlisten operation 9 ERR SOCKET UNBIND Socket error during Unbind operation 10 ERR SOCKET UNACCEPT Socket error during Unaccept operation 11 ERR SOCKET DISCONNECT Socket error during Disconnect operation 12 ERR SOCKET DELETE Socket error during Delete operation 13 14 Reserved 15 ERR QUE FULL Firmware use only 16 ERR BUFFER ALLOC Firmware use only Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 332 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Value DEC Mnemonic Description 17 ERR_PACKET_ALLOC Firmware use only 18 ERR_PACKET_REL
364. stems The following diagram shows an output with a suppression device We recommend that you locate the suppression device as close as possible to the load device DC L1 Suppression VAC DC Device AC or DC Outputs DC COM or L2 If the outputs are DC we recommend that you use an 1N4004 diode for surge suppression as shown below For inductive DC load devices a diode is suitable A 1N4004 diode is acceptable for most applications A surge suppressor can also be Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 30 Wire Your Controller used See for recommended suppressors As shown below these surge suppression circuits connect directly across the load device 24V DC VAC DC Relay or Solid State DC Outputs IN4004 Diode A surge suppressor 24V DC common can also be used Suitable surge suppression methods for inductive AC load devices include a varistor an RC network or an Allen Bradley surge suppressor all shown below These components must be approptiately rated to suppress the switching transient charactetistic of the particular inductive device See Recommended Surge Suppressors page 30 for recommended suppressors surge Suppression for Inductive AC Load Devices Output Device Output Device Output Device Surge Suppressor Varistor RC Network Recommended Surge Suppressors Use the Allen Bradley surge suppressors shown in the fo
365. stics Used to assign characteristics to this Descriptor RD set if data set is readable ST set if outstation maintains a static data set EV set if outstation generates a data set event Event Class Used to assign Event Class to this Descriptor 0 None 1 Class 1 2 Class 2 3 Class 3 Trigger Event Set this parameter to generate an event unconditionally This bit can also be set by the ladder logic to generate timed events Once this parameter is set by the ladder logic or communications the MicroLogix 1400 clears it automatically after generating an event at the end of scan This parameter is stored as a bit in the relevant Data Set Descriptor Config file and the bit can be accessed by Nx 2 4 where x is the relevant Data Set Descriptor Config file number Disable Change of State Event Setting this parameter suppresses the events generated by any Event Occurrence Condition Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 289 Event Occurrence Condition The conditions of Data Set Event for each Data Set Descriptor can be configured by Data Set Event Occurrence Condition 0 1 2 3 in the DNP3 Data Set Descriptors Object File When one of the values that are pointing to the Event Occurrence Condition 0 1 2 3 are changed or the criteria are met the MicroLogix 1400 generates a Data Set Event retrievable using the object g88v1 This table shows the supported conditions for Point Addressing Double click each cas
366. stop tune 2 write 00 start stop index 7 85 0 Data Set Prototype 1 read 06 no range or all 85 1 Data Set Prototype 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 5B free format 06 no range or all 17 28 index 86 1 Data Set Descriptor 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 5B free format Contents 06 no range or all 17 28 index 86 2 Data Set Descriptor 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 5B free format Characteristics 06 no range or all 17 28 index 87 0 Data Set Present Value 1 read 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 17 28 index 87 1 Data Set Present Value 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 5B free format 06 no range or all 17 28 index 88 0 Data Set Event 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited qty 88 1 Data Set Event Snapshot 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 5B free format 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 90 1 Application Identifier 16 init appl 06 no range or all 17 start appl 5B free format 18 stop appl Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 350 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Implementation Table for Series B controllers DNP Object Group amp Variation Request DNP3 Master may issue MicroLogix 1400 must parse Response DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Group Description Fu
367. sually provides sufficient noise immunity However for best cable shield performance earth ground the shield at both ends using a 0 01 uF capacitor at one end to block AC power ground currents if necessary Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 54 Wire Your Controller Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Sensor Transmitter Types 2 Wire Transmitter Transmitter Module Transmitter Supply Signal Transmitter Supply Signal 1 power supplies rated N E C Class 2 1762 OF4 Output Type Selection The output type selection current or voltage is made by wiring to the appropriate terminals Iout or Vout and by the type range selection bits in the Configuration Data File 1762 OF4 Terminal Block Layout ut 0 ut 1 ut 2 ut 3 Commons connected internally Wire Your Controller 55 1762 OF4 Wiring Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 56 Wire Your Controller Notes Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Chapter 4 Supported Communication Protocols Communication Connections This chapter describes how to communicate with your control system The method you use and cabling required to connect your controller depends on what type of system you ate employing This chapter also describes how the controller establishes communication with the appropriate network Topics include supported communication protocols default communication configurations using communicatio
368. t 30 196 30 196 range 0 500 Hz referred to output range Non linearity in percent full scale lt 0 59 2 lt 0 59 2 Open and short circuit protection Continuous Continuous Output protection 32 mA 32 mA Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 1 Includes offset gain non linearity and repeatability error terms 2 Only applicable to Series B 1 0 modules Valid Input Output Data Word Formats Ranges for 1762 IF20F2 Specifications 175 Normal Operating Range Full Scale Range RAW Proportional Data Scaled for PID 0 10V DC 10 5V DC 32760 16380 0 0V DC 0 0 4 20 mA 21 0 mA 32760 16380 20 0 mA 31200 15600 4 0 mA 6240 3120 0 0 mA 0 0 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 176 X Specifications Notes Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 MicroLogix 1400 Replacement Kits Lithium Battery 1747 BA Appendix B Replacement Parts This chapter contains the following information a table of MicroLogix 1400 replacement parts procedure for replacing the lithium battery The table below provides a list of replacement parts and their catalog numbet Description d Lithium Battery See page 177 1747 BA IMPORTANT When the controller s Battery Low indicator 1s lit check whether the battery wire connector is connected correctly or replace the replaceable battery with a new one immediately When the indicator turns on it means that either the battery is disco
369. t handshaking The modem connected to the MicroLogix controller should support auto answer The MicroLogix 1400 supports ASCII out communications Therefore it can cause a modem to initiate or disconnect a phone call leased line modems Leased line modems are used with dedicated phone lines that are typically leased from the local phone company The dedicated lines may be in a point to point topology supporting Full Duplex communications between two modems or in a multi drop topology supporting Half Duplex communications between three or more modems radio modems Radio modems may be implemented in a point to point topology supporting either Halt Duplex or Full Duplex communications or in a multi drop topology supporting Half Duplex communications between three or more modems MicroLogix 1400 also supports DF1 Radio Modem protocol DH 485 Communication Protocol Connecting to Networks via RS 232 RS 485 Interface 213 line drivers Line drivers also called short haul modems do not actually modulate the serial data but rather condition the electrical signals to operate reliably over long transmission distances up to several miles Line drivers are available in Full Duplex and Half Duplex models Allen Bradley s AIC Advanced Interface Converter is a Half Duplex line driver that converts an RS 232 electrical signal into an RS 485 electrical signal increasing the signal transmission distance from 50 to 4000 feet 8000 feet wh
370. t max 2 5 mA at 265V On state current min 10 1 0 mA 1 0 mA 1 0 mA 1 0 mA On state voltage drop 1 5V at 0 5 1 0V DC 1 0V DC 0 3V DC at 0 5 A 0 3V DC at 0 5A max Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Output Specifications Specifications 163 Specification 1762 0A8 1762 0B8 1762 0B16 1762 0B32T 1762 0V32T Continuous current per 0 25 A at 55 C 0 5 A at 55 C 0 5 A at 55 C 0 5 A at 60 C 0 5A at 60 C point max 131 F 131 F 131 F 140 F 140 F 0 5 A at 30 C 1 0 A at 30 C 1 0 A at 30 C 86 F 86 F 86 F Continuous current per 1 0 A at 55 C 4 0 at 55 C 4 0 A at 55 C 2 0 A at 60 C 2 0 A at 60 C common max 131 F 131 F 131 F 140 F 140 F 2 0 A at 30 C 8 0 A at 30 C 8 0 A at 30 C 86 F 86 F 86 F Continuous current per 2 0 A at 55 C 4 0 A at 55 C 4 0 A at 55 C 4 0 A at 60 C 4 0 A at 60 module max 131 F 8 0 A at 30 131 F 140 F 140 F 4 0 A at 30 C 86 F 8 0 A at 30 C 86 F Surge current max 5 0 A Repeatability is once every 2 s for a duration of 25 ms 2 0 A Repeatability is once every 2 s at 55 C 131 F once every second at 30 C 86 F duration of 10 ms 2 0 A Repeatability is once every 2 s at 55 C 131 F once every second at 30 86 F duration of 10 ms 2 0 A Repeatability is once every 2 s at 60
371. t Analog Input Deadband Config File Number In Series B 32 bit Analog Input Deadband Config File Number In Series B Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 264 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Short Floating Point Analog Input Deadband Config File Number In Series B BitOffset 15 1 1 12 n 0 9 e 5 h fo Element 0 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 FO Element 1 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 FO Element 2 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 FO Element F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 FO Element 4 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 FO r r Element 5 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 FO reserved F7 F0 Object Flags FLAG7 FLAG6 FLAG5 LOCAL_FORCED REMOTE_FORCED COMM_LOST RESTART ONLINE For Small BCD type data you can configure Class information in the Configuration file The lower 2 bits in each element of the Configuration files are the configuration of Class information to the relevant objects PO bit in the first element is for excluding Small BCD Data from Class 0 poll responses Other bits are reserved Related Configuration File Numbers Small BCD Config File Number Bit Offset 15 14 113 112 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Element 0 r r PO r r C1 CO E
372. t UESTRO IR 83 Ethernet Connections edet tratte a a rada 84 Chapter 5 Using the LCD Operating Principles deri aaah rara 86 Startup Screenin inis yae m nis ee E E A E A hal ak hhh 87 Main Menu and Default 89 Operating Buttons toss TERT MM MEUS 91 Using Menus to Choose Values 91 Selecting Between Menu Items 92 Cursor ete He e dee HI eda 92 Serting Values uy eese eee sana denas eae Res er Wc eese 23 L Status s us o et dedi fif Ge 93 Viewing O 94 Monitor User Defined Target PIS baee siet 95 Target User Defined File Number TUF 95 Monitoring a Bit File dix us exce tud 96 Monitoring Integer Files 100 Monitoring Double Integer files 1 esee prr t etes 105 Monitor Floating point Files 110 Monitor System Status Files 111 Using the Mode wih an Pm 111 Controller 112 Changing Mode Switch Position 113 Using User Defined LCD Screen 115 User Defined LCD Screen 116 Configuring Advanced Settings wee cues d e uo Ne ERE C n 117 Changing Key In Mode 118 Key In OCS ic V Oen amas 118 Changing Key In Mode oed sed ciate ive D RARE RS apes 118 Using Commun
373. t transmitting via Ethernet port Channel 1 empty rectangle on Transmitting via Ethernet port Channel 1 solid rectangle COMM 2 off Not transmitting via RS 232 port Channel 2 empty rectangle on Transmitting via RS 232 port Channel 2 solid rectangle off Configured communications Channel 0 empty rectangle on solid rectangle Default communications Channel 0 Troubleshooting Your System 185 Status Indicators on the LCD Indicator Color Indicates BAT LO off Battery level is acceptable empty rectangle on Battery low solid rectangle U DISP off Default display mode empty rectangle on Customized display mode solid rectangle 1 When using a MicroLogix 1400 controller the DCOMM LED applies only to Channel 0 1 0 Status Indicators on the LCD 1 0 Status Indicators on the LCD 1 0 LED screen on the LCD 000000 RU I BBOOOOO000000 Input status indicators 20 100000 6123456789812 456789 a rr iiim Output status indicators 12 1 0 Status Indicators on the LCD Indicator Color Indicates INPUTS off Input is not energized empty rectangle on Input is energized terminal status solid rectangle OUTPUTS off Output is not energized empty rectangle on Output is engerized logic status solid rectangle 1 To view the status of inputs and outputs on the LCD you need to enter the 1 0 LED mode screen
374. t used 4 LOCAL_FORCED Always 0 Not used 5 CHATTER_FILTER Always 0 Not used 6 STATE Reflects point state of Double Bit Binary Input point Double bit LSB 7 STATE Reflects point state of Double Bit Binary Input point Double bit MSB Object Flags for Binary Output Bit Offset Name Description 0 ONLINE 0 when the controller is or was in Non Executing mode 1 when the controller is or was in Executing mode and the configuration file does not exist May be 1 when the controller is in Executing mode and the configuration file exists 1 RESTART Always 0 Not used 2 COMM_LOST Always 0 Not used 3 REMOTE_FORCED Always 0 Not used 4 LOCAL_FORCED Always 0 Not used 5 reserved Always 0 Not used 6 reserved Always 0 Not used 7 STATE Reflects point state of Binary Output point Object Flags for Counter Bit Offset 0 Name ONLINE Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Description 0 when the controller is or was in Non Executing mode 1 when the controller is or was in Executing mode and the configuration file does not exist May be 1 when the controller is in Executing mode and the configuration file exists Object Flags for Counter Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 297 Bit Offset Name Description 1 RESTART 0 when the controller is or was in Non Executing mode P 2 COMM LOST
375. tection Port Setting 10A 00 Mbps Full Duplex Half Duplex Contact Location Cancel Apply Help This section covers DNP3 Slave Application Layer Function Codes and Internal Indications For details of Packet Formats for the request and response refer to the DNP3 Protocol specifications Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 251 Function Codes FC_CONFIRM FC Byte 0x00 00 Confirm A DNP3 master sends a message with this function code to confirm receipt of a response fragment In a general environment the MicroLogix 1400 receives a response with this function code But the MicroLogix 1400 may generate a response with this function code when a DNP3 Master sends a request with the CON bit set in the application control header FC_READ FC Byte 0x01 01 Read The READ function code is used by a DNP3 master to request data from the MicroLogix 1400 FC WRITE FC Byte 0x02 02 Write The WRITE function code is used to write the contents of DNP3 objects from the DNP3 master to the MicroLogix 1400 This function code is used for clearing bit IIN1 7 DEVICE_RESTART setting time in the MicroLogix 1400 and downloading user programs to the MicroLogix 1400 controller FC SELECT FC Byte 0x03 03 Select The SELECT function code is used in conjunction with the OPERATE function code as part of select before operate method for issuing control requests This proced
376. ted Network Protocol DNP3 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 DNP3 Analog Output Object The supported object group and variations are listed in this section The MicroLogix 1400 responds with the default group and variation when the DNP3 Master requests to read an object with Any variation Analog Output Status Objects e g40v0 Analog Output Status Any Variations g40v1 Analog Output Status 32 bit with flag default g40v2 Analog Output Status 16 bit with flag default g40v3 Analog Output Status Single prec flt pt with flag default Analog Output Command Objects g41v1 Analog Output 32 bit g41v2 Analog Output 16 bit g41v3 Analog Output Single prec flt pt Related Object File Number 16 bit Analog Output Object File Number 32 bit Analog Output Object File Number Short Floating Point Analog Output Object File Number Related Configuration File Number None To generate Analog Output Object from the DNP3 Subsystem in the controller you should configure the Analog Output Object File Number in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file When only one of the Analog Output Object File is configured Index number starts from 0 for the configured object 1 word is used for 1 Index of 16 bit Analog Output Object 1 double word is used for 1 Index of 32 bit Analog Output Object and 1 short float is used for 1 Index of Short Floating Point Analog Output Object
377. ted methods of operation Example run test or program 377 negative logic The use of binary logic in such a way that 0 represents the voltage level normally associated with logic 1 for example 0 5V 1 OV Positive is more conventional for example 1 5V 0 OV network A series of stations nodes connected by some type of communication medium A network may be made up of a single link or multiple links nominal input current The current at nominal input voltage normally closed Contacts on a relay or switch that are closed when the relay is de energized or the switch is deactivated they are open when the relay is energized or the switch is activated In ladder programming a symbol that allows logic continuity flow if the referenced input is logic 0 when evaluated normally open Contacts on a relay or switch that are open when the relay is de energized or the switch is deactivated They are closed when the relay is energized or the switch is activated In ladder programming a symbol that allows logic continuity flow if the referenced input is logic 1 when evaluated off delay time The OFF delay time is a measure of the time required for the controller logic to recognize that a signal has been removed from the input terminal of the controller The time is determined by circuit component delays and by any filter adjustment applied offline Describes devices not under direct comm
378. tes request 0 255 Device Attributes List 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 start stop of attribute variations 06 no range or all 1 0 Binary Input Any 1 read 06 no range or all Variation Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Implementation Table for Series A controllers DNP Object Group amp Variation Request Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 339 DNP3 Master may issue MicroLogix 1400 must parse Response DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Group Description Function Qualifier Codes Function Qualifier Codes Num Num p Codes dec hex Codes dec hex 1 1 Binary Input Packed 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop format 1 2 Binary Input With 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop flags 2 0 Binary Input Event 1 read 06 no range or all Any Variation 07 08 limited qty 2 1 Binary Input Event 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index Without time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 2 2 Binary Input Event 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index With absolute time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 2 3 Binary Input Event 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index With relative time 07 08 l
379. these steps to view and change the data values of the bit file B3 1 On the Main Menu screen select Monitoring by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad I O Status bHonitor ing Mode Switch 2 Press the OK key on the LCD keypad The File Number prompt is displayed B III HEHUTE File Hum 983 Data Press UK to edi 3 If number 3 is selected as shown in step 2 press the OK key If not selected press the Up or Down key to select it and then press the OK key 4 The current data value ON of the B3 0 0 bit is displayed as shown below Note that 0 0 is flashing which means the cursor is at the target bit position B 6 6 UnProtected 5 We will change the data value of the B3 0 0 bit to OFF 0 First press OK to select the displayed address and move the cursor to the data value position Then ON will flash which means the cursor is at the data value position Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 the LCD 99 6 Press the Down key Then the data value will be represented as Note that OFF is still flashing which means the cursor is still at the data value position 7 Press OK to apply the changes Then the new value OFF 0 is applied Note that the target bit 0 0 in this example is flashing The cursor is moved automatically to the target bit position B REMOTE B H OF
380. tings on page 158 Continuous current per 16A 16A 30A Also see 8A module max Module Load Ratings 1762 on page 167 Surge current max See Relay Contact Ratings on page 165 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 See Relay Contact Ratings on page 166 See Relay Contact Ratings on page 165 Specifications 165 Output Specifications Specification 1762 0W8 1762 0W16 1762 0X61 1762 1080W6 Isolated groups Group 1 Outputs O Group 1 Outputs 0 All 6 Outputs Group 3 to 3 to 7 Individually Outputs 0 to 5 Isolated Group 2 Outputs 4 Group 2 Outputs 8 to 7 to 15 Output group to Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1836V AC for 1 s or 2596V DC for 1 s backplane isolation 265V AC working voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Output group to output Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1836V AC for 1 s or 2596V DC for 1 s group isolation 265V AC working voltage basic insulation 150V AC working voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Vendor D code 1 Product type code 7 Product code 120 121 124 98 1 Only applicable to Series 1 0 modules Relay Contact Ratings 1762 0W8 1762 OW16 and 1762 1080W6 Maximum Amperes Amperes Volt Amperes Volts Continuous Make Break Make Break 240V AC 25A 7 5A 0 754 1800 180 VA 120V AC 2 5A 15A 15A 1800VA 180 VA 125V DC 1 0A 0 2249 28 VA 24V DC
381. tion Unable to service BOOTP request from 00 0 73 00 78 O of 256 Status EE Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface 363 Using a DHCP Server To Configure Your Processor 3 Double click on the hardware address of the device you want to configure You will see the New Entry pop up window with the device s Ethernet Address MAC New Entry x Ethernet Addres gq 0F 73 FF 00 78 PAddes 192 168 1 11 Hostnam Description 1100 Device No 1 OK Cancel 4 Enter the IP Address and Description you want to assign to the device and click OK Leave Hostname blank Tools Help Request History Clear History Add to Relation List hriminis Ethernet Address MAC IP Address Hostname T i EAE 13 36 22 00 0F 73 FF 00 78 13 35 49 00 0 73 00 76 13 35 41 DHCP 20 8 13 35 17 00 0 73 00 78 Bi DHE Relation List New Delete Enable BOOTE Enable DCR Digable Ethernet Address MAC Type IP Address 00 0F 73 FF 00 78 800 192 168 1 11 ML1100 Device No 1 Status Entries Sent 182 168 1 11 to Ethernet address 00 0 73 00 78 1 of 256 The device will be added to the Relation List displaying the Ethernet Address MAC and corresponding IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway if applicable A DHCP server automaticall
382. tions available from http www modbus org ASCII provides connection to other ASCII devices such as bar code readers weigh scales serial printers and other intelligent devices You can use ASCII by configuring the RS 232 485 port channel 0 and the RS 232 port Channel 2 for the ASCII driver Refer to the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 001 for detailed configuration information For more information on configuring your MicroLogix 1400 controller for Distributed Network Protocol see Channel Configuration for DNP3 Slave on page 223 For more information about Distributed Network Protocol see the Distributed Network Protocol Specifications available from http www dnp org Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 222 Connecting to Networks via RS 232 RS 485 Interface Notes Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Channel Configuration for DNP3 Slave Appendix F Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 This appendix e describes the MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 describes the procedures used to program and troubleshoot DNP3 protocol in the controller gives an overview of the DNP3 implementation in the controller shows application examples of DNP3 applications The default communication protocol for the serial ports Channel 0 and Channel 2 in the MicroLogix 1400 is DF1 Full Duplex To communicate with
383. to 255 used the Point Index must be set to a point offset that is BSTR 6 255 divisible by 16 TIME 7 0 or 6 B21 3 Double bit input 0 to Maximum 2047 When the Data Types other than OSTR and BSTR are used the Point Index must be set to a point offset that is divisible by 8 Cl 20 0 to Maximum 511 Counter Al 30 0 to Maximum 767 Analog input BCD 101 0 to Maximum 255 BCD point Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 292 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Point Address Type MicroLogix Data File Point Address Data Type Maximum Data Type Code Length bytes File Number File Element File Sub Element MicroLogix Data NONE 0 0 0 0 0 i VSTR 1 0 82 9 255 ST 9 255 0 40 2 0 1 20r4 2 S 0 65 for S OforS 3 9 255 0 255 for B N L 0 15 for B 7 9 255 N 9 255 L INT 3 0 1 20 4 2 5 0 65 for S 0 for S L 3 9 255 B 0 255 for B N L 0 15 for B 7 9 255 N 9 255 L FLT 4 Oor 4 8 9 255 F 0 255 0 OSTR 5 0 255 2 S 0 65 for S 0 for S N 3 9 255 0 255 for B N 0 15 for B 7 9 255 N BSTR 6 0 255 2 S 0 65 for S 0 for S N 3 9 255 B 0 255 for B N 0 15 for B 7 9 255 N TIME 27 0 6 AS 0 65 for S Ofor S 3 9 255 0 255 for B N L 0 15 for B 7 9 255 N 9 255 L Publication 1766 UM001G EN P
384. to communicate with DNP3 protocol using Channel 0 port both Channel 0 and DNP3 Slave configurations should be set If you want to communicate with DNP3 protocol using Channel 2 port Channel 2 and DNP3 Slave configurations should be set If you want to communicate with DNP3 protocol using both Channel 0 port and Channel 2 port Channel 0 Channel 2 and DNP3 Slave configurations should be set In this case the channel which is directed in DNP3 Slave configuration supports full functionality But the other port supports limited functionality and it does not support some features like Unsolicited Response DNP3 Slave configuration is shared by both Channel 0 and Channel 2 ports if the Channel 0 and Channel 2 are configured to DNP3 protocol Any changes in DNP3 Slave configuration tab will affect both channels Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 230 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 For the MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers you can see the following tabs Channel Configuration General Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel2 DNP3 Slave DNP3 Slave Application Layer Enable Confirmation Max Response Size 2048 Confirmation Timeout x1 ms 23000 Number of Retries 2 Select Timeout 1 so Time Sync Interval 1 mins f1 440 Enable Time Sync On Start Up Only Channel for Unsolicited Responses Restore Events After Power Cycle Sen
385. transmitted Number of Class3 Events If the MicroLogix 1400 is configured not to initiate Unsolicited Response this parameter used to limit the maximum number of events which is generated and logged into the event buffer for Class 3 events In this case value 0 will disable to generate the event If the MicroLogix 1400 is configured to generate Unsolicited Response and the number of queued Class 3 events is reached to this value Unsolicited Response is initiated The valid range is 0 to 6013 Default value is 10 Hold Time after Class3 Events x1 s This parameter is only for Unsolicited Response The MicroLogix 1400 holds the events during Hold Time after Class3 Events x1 s before initiating an Unsolicited Response The valid range is 0 to 65535 Default value is 5 The value of 0 indicates that responses are not delayed due to this parameter Note that parameters Number of Class3 Events and Hold Time after Class3 Events x1 s are used together so that if either one of the criteria are met an Unsolicited Response is transmitted Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 242 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Select Timeout x1 s The valid range is 1 65535 Default value is 10 This parameter is used for controlling CROB Control Relay Output Block and AOB Analog Output Block After receiving the request with the function code FC_SELECT 3 DNP3 Master shou
386. twork Belden shielded twisted pair cable Belden shielded twisted pair cable 1763 NC01 1761 CBL AP00 or 1761 CBL PM02 24V DC user supplied port 1 or port 2 1747 CP3 to PC or 1761 CBL ACOO 1 DB 9 RS 232 port a M 2 mini DIN 8 RS 232 port 3 RS 485 port 4 Series A or later cables are required Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Communication Connections 71 Typical 3 Node Network Channel 0 Connection PanelView 550 e PanelView LEO m MicroLogix 1400 RJ45 port 1761 CBL AS09 FH or 1761 03 T m 1747 CP3 or 176LCBLAMOQ CHO m 1761 CBL ACOO or 1761 CBL HM02 B _ _ g Ti Recommended Tools To connect a DH 485 network to additional devices you need tools to strip the shielded cable and to attach the cable to the AIC Advanced Interface Converter We recommend the following equipment or equivalent Working with Cable for DH 485 Network Description Part Number Manufacturer Shielded Twisted Pair Cable 3106 or 9842 Belden Stripping Tool Not Applicable Not
387. twork Protocol DNP3 Word Offset Description 60 Application Layer Error Codes 0 NO_ERROR No error found in the Application Layer 1 FC_CANNOT_BROADCAST Reserved 2 FC_NOT_SUPPORTED The received packet has unsupported Function Code 3 OBJ NOT SUPPORTED The received packet has unsupported objects 4 BAD REQUEST LENGTH Reserved 5 CONFIGURATION ERROR The error was caused by the invalid configuration during packet generating E g invalid Data Set Configuration 6 BAD PARAMETER The received packet has invalid parameters except Function Code and Object Codes E g invalid Qualifier codes 7 BAD FILE TYPE The error was caused by invalid configuration in DNP3 Slave Application Layer Invalid File Type specified 8 BAD FILE NUMBER The error was caused by invalid configuration in DNP3 Slave Application Layer Invalid File Number specified 9 BAD DNP3 ADDRESS The error was caused by invalid configuration in DNP3 Slave Application Layer Invalid File Number specified 10 TABLE WRITE PROTECTED The specified DNP3 object data file has been locked to be written 11 TABLE ACCESS DENIED The specified DNP3 object data file has been locked to be read or written 12 TABLE OWNERSHIP ERROR The specified DNP3 object data file has been locked to be read or written If an error code is within 6 to 12 related file number and element number are shown in word 64 and 65 61 Appli
388. tworks The 1761 NET AIC needs delay time to change from transmit to receive mode e When the Control Line is set to DF Half Duplex Modem this is the minimum time delay between receiving the last character of a packet and the RTS assertion Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Communication Connections 67 DF1 Half Duplex Master Slave Network Use the following diagram for DF1 Half Duplex Master Slave protocol without hardware handshaking SLC 5 03 A EET EE SS A Tesssvevesvevesi i MicroLogix 1400 processor ales FR E B DFI Master E EIU H 40 Ww i 1761 CBL AMOO or 1761 CBL HMO2 1761 CBL APOO or 1761 CBL PM02 Slave radio modem or lease line straight 9 25 pin cable straight 9 25 pin cable 4 MicroLogix MicroLogix 1400 1400 Slave Slave RS 485 DF1 85 485 Half Duplex Half Duplex 1 DB 9 RS 232 port 2 mini DIN 8 RS 232 port 3 RS 485 port 4 Series C or later cables are required for Class Div 2 applications Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 68 Communication Connections DF1 Half Duplex Network Using PC a
389. types file N52 lt lt Data Set Prototypes file 53 Data Set Prototypes ml Data Set Prototypes file N54 Element Array N data file Data Set Prototypes file N58 d Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 285 As an example with Data Set Descriptors files if you configure Data Set Descriptors Object File Number to 60 and Maximum Number of Data Set Descriptors File to 9 Data files 60 to 68 are reserved to store the structure of the Data Set Descriptors configuration Data Set Descriptors pen Data Set Descriptors file N60 Data Set Descriptors file N61 Data Set Descriptors file N62 Element Array N data file B Te Data Set Descriptors file N63 Data Set Descriptors file N64 lt Data Set Descriptors file N68 Once the Data Set Prototypes and Descriptors are configured in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration of RSLogix500 RSLogix Micro software you can see the DNP3 DS Prototype X and DNP3 DS Descriptor X trees under the Channel Configuration of RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro software where X is the element numbers of each Prototype or Descriptor L14008_UMRSS H 28 Project 28 Help 8 Controller i Controller Properties D Processor Status Function Files Al io Configuration fie Channel Configuration Channel Status B DNP3 DS Prototype 0 E
390. ublication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 372 System Loading and Heat Dissipation Heat Dissipation Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 1762 108 3 7 W x number of modules 3 7 Wx W 1762 1016 5 4 W x number of modules 5 4 x W 1762 1032T 6 8 W x number of modules at 30 0V dc 6 8 W x at 30 0V dc W 5 4 W x number of modules at 26 4V dc 5 4 W x at 26 4V dc W 1762 IR4 1 5 W x number of modules 1 5Wx W 1762 IT4 1 5 W x number of modules 15Wx W 1762 0A8 2 9 W x number of modules 2 9 W x W 1762 0 8 1 6 W x number of modules 16Wx W 1762 0B16 2 9 W x number of modules 29Wx W 1762 2 3 4 W x number of modules 3 4 W x W 1762 4 3 8 W x number of modules 3 8 W x W 1762 0V32T 2 7 W x number of modules 2 7 W x W 1762 OW8 2 9 W x number of modules 2 9 W x W 1762 OW16 6 1 x number of modules 6 1 WP x W 1762 OX6l 2 8 W x number of modules 2 8 W x W 1762 1080W6 4 4 W x number of modules AAW x W Add Sub Totals to determine Heat Dissipation W 1 Only applicable to Series modules Glossary The following terms are used throughout this manual Refer to the Allen Bradley Industrial Automation Glossary publication AG 7 1 for a complete guide to Allen Bradley technical terms address A character string that uniquely identifies a memory location For example I 1 0 is the memory address for the data located in the Input file location word
391. uch as bar code readers weigh scales serial printers and other intelligent devices using ASCII See Default Communication Configuration on page 58 for the configuration settings for Channel 0 MicroLogix 1400 can be connected directly to RS 485 network via channel 0 using ASCII The MicroLogix 1400 supports EtherNet IP communication via the Ethernet communication Channel 1 In addition either Modbus TCP or DNP3 over IP can be enabled for Channel 1 You can connect your controller to a local area network that provides communication between various devices at 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps This port supports CIP explicit messaging message exchange only The controller cannot be used for CIP implicit messaging real time I O messaging The controller also includes an embedded web server which allows viewing of not only module information TCP IP configuration and diagnostic information but also includes the data table memory map and data table monitor screen using a standard web browser See Chapter 4 for more information on connecting to the available communication options Agency Certifications Compliance to European Union Directives Chapter 2 Install Your Controller This chapter shows you how to install your controller The only tools you require are a flat or Phillips head screwdriver and drill Topics include agency certifications compliance to European Union Directives installation considerations safety considerations power c
392. ult code 135 viewing system information 134 W wiring analog channels 39 wiring diagram 1762 1 8 42 51 52 43 44 43 48 44 45 46 45 46 41 48 36 38 37 39 38 terminal block layouts 33 51 53 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 386 Index wiring diagrams 32 wiring recommendation 27 wiring with spade lugs 28 wiring without spade lugs 28 wiring your controller 27 working voltage 158 workspace 380 write 380 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Rockwell Automation Support Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At http www rockwellautomation com support you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative ot visit http www rockwellautomation com support Installation Assistance If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manual You can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running United States or Canada 1 440 646 3434
393. unication offset The steady state deviation of a controlled variable from a fixed point off state leakage current When an ideal mechanical switch is opened off state no current flows through the switch Practical semiconductor switches and the transient suppression components which are sometimes used to protect switches allow a small current to flow when the switch is in the off state This current 15 referred to as the off state leakage current To ensure reliable operation the off state leakage current rating of a switch should be less than the minimum operating current rating of the load that is connected to the switch Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 378 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P 2012 on delay time The ON delay time is a measure of the time required for the controller logic to recognize that a signal has been presented at the input terminal of the controller one shot A programming technique that sets a bit for only one program scan online Describes devices under direct communication For example when RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro is monitoring the program file in a controller operating voltage For inputs the voltage range needed for the input to be in the On state For outputs the allowable range of user supplied voltage output device device such as a pilot light or a motor starter coil that is controlled by the controller processor A Central Processing Unit See CPU
394. unication Connections Default Communication Configuration Using the Communications Toggle Functionality Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 The MicroLogix 1400 communication Channel 0 has the following default communication configuration TIP For Channel 0 the default configuration is present when e The controller is powered up for the first time e The communications toggle functionality specifies default communications specified using the LCD Display The DCOMM indicator on the LCD Display is on i e lit in solid rectangle An OS upgrade is completed See Chapter 5 for more information about using the LCD Display See Appendix E for more information about communicating DF1 Full Duplex Default Configuration Parameters Parameter Default Baud Rate 19 2 KBps Parity none Source ID Node Address 1 Control Line no handshaking Error Detection CRC Embedded Responses auto detect Duplicate Packet Message Detect enabled ACK Timeout 50 counts NAK retries 3 retries ENQ retries 3retries Stop Bits 1 Data Bits 8 The Communications Toggle Functionality can be operated using the LCD display on the controller as shown below Use the Communications Toggle Functionality to change from the user defined communication configuration to the default communications mode and back on Channel 0 The Default Communications indicator on the LCD display op
395. up to Backplane Isolation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1100V AC for 1 second or 1697V DC for 1 second 75V DC Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Relay Output Group to Backplane Isolation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1836V AC for 1 second or 2596V DC for 1 second 265V AC Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Relay Output Group to Relay Output Group and FET Output Group Isolation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1836V AC for 1 second or 2596V DC for 1 second 265V AC Working Voltage basic insulation 150V Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Expansion 1 0 Specifications General Specifications Specification Dimensions Digital Value 1 0 Modules 90 mm height x 87 mm depth x 40 4 mm width height including m ounting tabs is 110 mm 3 54 in height x 3 43 in depth x 1 59 in width height including m ounting tabs is 4 33 in Temperature storage 40 85 C 40 185 F Temperature operating 20 65 C 4 1 49 F 5 95 non cond ensing Operating humidity Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 160 Specifications General Specifications Specification Value Operating altitude 2000 m 6561 ft Vibration Operating 10 500 Hz 5 g 0 030 in max peak to peak 2 hours per axi
396. uration Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 225 Channel 0 and Channel 2 Link Layer Configuration Link Layer related configuration can be done in the Channel 0 and or Channel 2 tab Channel Contigur ation Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 226 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Channel Contigur ation ae Channel 1 Link Layer Configuration In RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro open Channel Configuration in the MicroLogix 1400 Series B project tree To enable DNP3 over IP protocol check DNP3 over IP Enable in the Channel 1 configuration Publication 1766 UM001G EN P 2012 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 227 Unlike serial port configuration cycle power to the controller after downloading the Ethernet port configuration to enable the DNP3 over IP feature Channel Configuration 10 100 Mbps Full Duplex Half Duplex Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 228 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Link Layer related configuration can also be done in the Chan 1 DNP3 tab Channel Configuration DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration Application Layer related configuration can be done in the DNP3 Slave tab Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 229 For the MicroLogix 14
397. ure is used for controlling binary output CROB or analog output objects FC OPERATE FC Byte 0x04 04 Operate See the comment for FC_SELECT FC Byte 0x03 on page 251 FC_DIRECT_OPERATE FC Byte 0x05 05 Direct Operate This direct operate function is similar to the FC OPERATE function code except that no preceding select command is required FC DIRECT OPERATE FC Byte 0x06 06 Direct Operate No Resp Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 252 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 See the comment for FC DIRECT OPERATE No response message is returned when this request is issued from a DNP3 master FC IMMED FREEZE FC Byte 0x07 07 Immediate Freeze Upon receiving a request with this function the MicroLogix 1400 copies the current value of a counter point to a separate memory location associated with the same point The copied value remains constant until the next freeze operation to the same point FC IMMED FREEZE FC Byte 0x08 08 Immediate Freeze No Resp See the comment for FC IMMED FREEZE No response message is returned when this request is issued from a DNP3 master FC FREEZE CLEAR FC Byte 0x09 09 Freeze and Clear Upon receiving a request with this function the MicroLogix 1400 copies the current value to the frozen value then clears the current value to 0 immediately FC FREEZE CLEAR FC Byt
398. using 1766 L32AWA or 1766 L32BXB Maximum Allowable Values Calculated Values Current Current Subtotal from Table 1225 mA at 5V DC 1155 mA at 24V DC mA at 5V DC mA at 24V DC System Loading System Loading mA x 5V mA x 24V mW mW mW 33 845 W Validating Systems using 1766 L32BWA Maximum Allowable Values Calculated Values Current for Devices Connected to the 24V DC Sensor f Sum of all sensor currents Supply 250 mA at 24V DC mA at 24V DC Current for MicroLogix Accessories and Expansion 1 0 Current Subtotal from Table 1225 mA at 5V DC 1155 mA at 24V DC mA at 5 V DC mA at 24V DC System Loading System Loading mA x 24V mA x 5V mA x 24V mW mW mW mW 39 845 W W Calculating Heat Use the following table when you need to determine the heat dissipation of your 212 8 A system for installation in an enclosure For System Loading take the value from the Dissipation appropriate system loading worksheets on pages 369 or 371 Heat Dissipation Heat Dissipation Catalog Number Equation or Constant Calculation Sub Total 1766 L32AWA 15 2 W 0 4 x System Loading 15 2 W 0 4 x W W 1766 L32BWA 15 7 W 0 4 x System Loading 15 7 W 0 4 x W W 1766 L32BXB 17 0 W 0 3 x System Loading 17 0 W 0 3 x W W 1762 1A8 2 0 W x number of modules 2 0 W x W 1762 1 4 2 0 W x number of modules 2 0 W x W 1762 IF20F2 2 6 W x number of modules 26Wx W P
399. using the LCD menu See 1 0 Status on page 5 93 for more information Normal Operation The POWER and RUN LEDs are On If forcing is enabled and forces are installed in I O force files the FORCE LED turns on and remains on until all forces are removed And if forcing is disabled and forces are installed in I O force files the Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 186 Troubleshooting Your System FORCE LED flashes and remains flashing until forces are removed from I O force files Error Conditions If an error exists within the controller the controller LEDs operate as described in the following table Ir the LEDS ne Following Error Probable Cause Recommended Action indicate Exists All LEDs off No input power or No line Power Verify proper line voltage and connections to the controller powprsunpiy pror Power Supply This problem can occur intermittently if power supply is overloaded Overloaded when output loading and temperature varies Power and Hardware faulted Processor Hardware Cycle power Contact your local Allen Bradley representative if the FAULT LEDs on Error error persists solid Loose Wiring Verify connections to the controller Power LED on Application fault Hardware Software For error codes and Status File information see MicroLogix 1400 and FAULT LED Major Fault Detected Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual flashing Publication 1766 RM001 RUN Operating syst
400. ut Element_0 for data index 0 to 15 For other Input type data you can configure Class information and the object flag information in the Configuration file The lower 2 bits in the elements of the Configuration files are the configuration of Class information to the relevant objects The upper byte of the configuration file of these objects is used to configure the object flag Other bits are reserved Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 262 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Two new bits are defined in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers The bit TE is used to generate an event by setting it regardless of the change of state This bit can be used to generate the timed events Once this bit is set by the ladder logic or communications the MicroLogix 1400 clears it automatically after generating an event at the end of scan The bit DCE is used to suppress the events by the change of state For example if you want to trigger an event for an analog point every 15 minutes you should set the TE bit every 15 minutes by the ladder logic But in this case you may not want the state change events to be generated Then set the bit DCE You can get the timed events every 15 minutes Related Configuration File Number 16 bit Counter Config File Number 32 bit Counter Config File Number 16 bit Frozen Counter Config File Number 32 bit Frozen C
401. ut Status 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop 16 bit with flag 40 3 Analog Output Status 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop Single prec flt pt with flag 41 1 Analog Output 32 bit 3 select 17 28 index 129 response echo of request 4 operate 5 direct op 6 dir op no ack 41 2 Analog Output 16 bit 3 select 17 28 index 129 response echo of request 4 operate 5 direct op 6 dir op no ack 41 3 Analog Output 3 select 17 28 index 129 response echo of request Single prec flt pt 4 operate 5 direct op 6 dir op no ack 50 1 Time and Date 1 read 07 limited qty 1 129 response 07 limited qty Absolute time qty 1 2 write 07 limited qty 1 50 3 Time and Date Absolute time at last recorded time 51 1 Time and Date CTO 129 response 07 limited qty Absolute time 130 unsol resp qty 1 synchronized 51 2 Time and Date CTO 129 response 07 limited qty Absolute time 130 unsol resp qty 1 unsynchronized 52 1 Time Delay Coarse 129 response 07 limited qty qty 1 52 2 Time Delay Fine 129 response 07 limited qty qty 1 60 1 Class Objects Class 0 1 read 06 no range or all data Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Implementation Table for Series A controllers DNP Object Group amp Variation Request Micrologix 1400 Distribute
402. valid range for the MicroLogix controllers is 1 31 controllers cannot be node 0 The default setting is 1 The node address is stored in the controller Communications Status file CS0 5 0 to CS0 5 7 Setting Controller Baud Rate The best network performance occurs at the highest baud rate which is 19 200 This is the default baud rate for a MicroLogix device on the DH 485 network All devices must be at the same baud rate This rate is stored in the controller Communications Status file CS0 5 8 to CS0 5 15 Setting Maximum Node Address Once you have an established network set up and are confident that you will not be adding more devices you may enhance performance by adjusting the maximum node address of your controllers It should be set to the highest node address being used IMPORTANT All devices should be set to the same maximum node address MicroLogix Remote Packet Support MicroLogix controllers can respond and initiate with communications or commands that do not originate on the local DH 485 network This is useful in installations where communication is needed between DH 485 and networks The example below shows how to send messages from a device on the DH network to a MicroLogix controller on the DH 485 network This method uses an SLC 5 04 processor as the bridge connection When using this method as shown in the illustration below PLC 5 devices can send read and write commands to MicroLogix controlle
403. vanced Interface Converter AIC catalog number 1761 NET AIC as shown in the illustrations below because Channel 0 has isolation and RS 485 built in However you may need to use an AIC to connect Channel 2 of the MicroLogix 1400 controller to a DH 485 network For more information on the AIC see the Advanced Interface Converter and DeviceNet Interface Installation Instructions Publication 1761 5 11 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 in 220 Connecting to Networks via RS 232 RS 485 Interface DH 485 Network AIC M 57 MicroLogix 1000 DH 485 Network 1763 NCO14 DH 485 Network with a MicroLogix Controller AIC MicroLogix 1400 SLC 5 04 AlC AlC S Sea o PanelVi Persona 1747 CP3 or 1761 CBL ACO0 1 DB 9 RS 232 port 2 mini DIN 8 RS 232 port 3 RS 485 port 4 Series A or later cables are required Belden shielded twisted pair cable Belden shielded twisted pair cable 1761 or 1761 CBL PM02 24V DC user supplied port 1 or port 2 to PC En B Mi
404. vate all configurations you need to send a command with the function code Activate Configuration 0x1F after downloading the user program Maximum file size is 384 Kbytes The MicroLogix 1400 supports downloading up to 256Kbyte size of user program when Recipe is not configured When Recipe is configured Maximum file size is 384 Kbytes Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 317 The first application segment of the ladder program should be larger than or equal to the size of System Exe File structure 64 bytes An application segment of the ladder program cannot be exceed 2048 bytes When the MicroLogix 1400 receives the first application segment it acquires Edit Resource from the system If the last application segment is received properly the MicroLogix 1400 returns Edit Resource to the system After acquiring Edit Resource each of the application segments should be received within the Edit Resource Owner Timeout The MicroLogix 1400 controller checks the integrity of the program after receiving the last application segment If the downloaded user program fails the integrity check MicroLogix 1400 clears the downloaded user program and restores the default user program In this case the configured Channel configuration is not changed from the last valid configuration A user program cannot be downloaded while the controller is in Executing mode Before downloading send a mode change request with the function code
405. vices to foreign devices 1746 UM004 Program in BASIC to interface the 3 channels 2 RS232 and 1 1746 001 DH 485 to printers modems or the DH 485 network for data 1746 01 collection 2760 RB Flexible 1771 PLC Provides an interface for SLC 500 using protocol cartridge 1747 6 12 Interface Chassis 2760 SFC3 to other A B PLCs and devices Three configurable Module channels are available to interface with Bar Code Vision RF 2760 ND001 Dataliner and PLC systems 1784 PKTX PC DH 485 IM PCl Computer Provides DH 485 using RSLinx 1784 6 5 22 PKTXD Bus 1784 PCMK PCMCIA IM PCMCIA slotin Provides DH 485 using RSLinx 1784 UM519 computer 2711 K5A2 PanelView 550 Panel Mount Provides electronic operator interface for SLC 500 processors 2711 UM014 B5A2 K5A5 PanelView B5A5 K5A1 900 Operator B5A1 K9A2 Terminals 9A2 K9A5 T9A5 K9A1 and T9A1 Important DH 485 Network Planning Considerations Carefully plan your network configuration before installing any hardware Some of the factors that can affect system performance are amount of electrical noise temperature and humidity in the network environment number of devices on the network connection and grounding quality in installation amount of communication traffic on the network type of process being controlled netwotk configuration The major hardware and software issues you need to resolve
406. w byte 376 manually configuring channel 1 for controllers on subnets 365 manuals related xiv master control relay 13 emergency stop switches 14 using ANSI CSA symbols schematic 16 15 Master Control Relay MCR 376 master control relay circuit periodic tests 11 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 384 Index memory module 2 data file protection 145 information file 146 operation 144 program and data download 146 145 removal installation under power 146 write protection 145 menu structure 86 menu structure tree 86 minimizing electrical noise 39 minimizing electrical noise on analog channels 41 mnemonic 376 Modbus communication protocol 221 mode switch 111 modem 376 modem cable constructing your own 64 modems using with MicroLogix controllers 212 modes 376 module error field 190 monitoring user defined target files 95 motor starters bulletin 509 surge suppressors 30 negative logic 377 network 377 nominal input current 377 normally closed 377 normally open 377 null modem cable 65 0 object quality flags 295 oerformance considerations 352 offline 377 offset 377 off state leakage current 377 one shot 378 online 378 online editing 147 directions and cautions 147 edit functions in program online editing 149 types 148 operating buttons 91 operating voltage 378 output device 378 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 P performance Ethernet processor 352 planning considerations for a network 215 pow
407. will not accept an Analog Output Command The MicroLogix 1400 returns a Control Status Code 7 in the response To access the objects 41 AOB the controller mode should be in Executing mode Note that Executing mode includes Run Remote Run Test Continuous Scan and Test Single Scan modes Any other modes are Non Executing modes Publication 1766 UM001G EN P 2012 282 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 DNP3 BCD Object The supported object group and variations are as below Numeric Static Objects gl01v1 Binary Coded Decimal Integer Small Related Object File Number Small BCD Object File Number Related Configuration File Number Small BCD Config File Number To generate a Small BCD Object from the DNP3 Subsystem in the controller you should configure the Small BCD Object File Number in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file When a Small BCD Object File is configured the Index number starts from 0 1 word is used for 1 Index of Small BCD Object As an example a Small BCD Object File is configured as shown below Data File N21 has 10 elements Index 0 of the Small BCD Object is N21 0 Index 1 is N21 1 and Index 9 is N21 9 File N21 dec Small BCD Object File As an example a Small BCD Config File is configured as shown below The file has 10 elements B40 0 0 and B40 0 1 can be configured for Class Level 0 1 2 or 3 for DN
408. wing communication cables with the MicroLogix 1400 controllers These cables are required for Class I Div 2 applications e 1761 CBL AMOO Series or later e 1761 CBL AP00 Series or later e 1761 CBL PMQ02 Series or later e 1761 CBL HM02 Series C or later 2707 NCO Series C or later e 1763 NC01 Series A or later 1747 CP3 Series A or later Programming Communication Options Hardware Overview 5 ATTENTION UNSUPPORTED CONNECTION A Do not connect a MicroLogix 1400 controller to another MicroLogix family controller such as MicroLogix 1000 MicroLogix 1200 MicroLogix 1500 or the network port of a 1747 DPS1 Port Splitter using a 1761 CBL AMOO 8 pin mini DIN to 8 pin mini DIN cable or equivalent This type of connection will cause damage to the RS 232 485 communication port Channel 0 of the MicroLogix 1400 and or the controller itself The communication pins used for RS 485 communications on the MicroLogix 1400 are alternately used for 24 power on the other MicroLogix controllers and the network port of the 1747 DPS1 Port Splitter Programming the MicroLogix 1400 controller is done using RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro Revision 8 10 00 or later for Series A controllers and 8 30 00 or later for Series B controllers Communication cables for programming are available separately from the controller and software The MicroLogix 1400 controllers provide three communications ports an isolated combination RS 232 485 communicatio
409. wn in the figure below are not displayed on the Main Menu screen you need to scroll down the screen by pressing the Down key 000000 User Display bAcvanced Set Then press the OK key on the LCD keypad The Advanced Settings Menu screen is displayed HU DCOHH Cfg Cfg Select KeyIn Mode using the Up and Down keys and then press the OK key The Key In Mode screen is displayed The current mode Continuous in this example is selected marked up with the symbol Discrete Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 120 Using the LCD Using Communications Toggle Functionality Ethernet Network Configuration Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 5 Press the Up or Down key to select the different mode Discrete in this example Press the OK key 000006 Hode Continuous bDiscrete 6 The Key In Mode Change Notification screen is displayed as shown below RU 000006 Hode Change Done RU 7 Press the ESC key to return to the Advanced Set Menu screen as shown in step 2 The MicroLogix 1400 provides the Communications Toggle Functionality which allows you to change from the user defined communication configuration to the default communications mode and back to the user defined communication configuration on Channel 0 See Using the Communications Toggle Functionality on page 58 for more information on this feature Viewing Ethernet St
410. x 1400 the Authentication Key must be used for sending the request with the function code OPEN_FILE 25 or DELETE FILE 27 Rules for Downloading a User Program A DNP3 master should send the function code OPEN FILE 25 WRITE 2 and CLOSE FILE 26 for downloading user programs When a master sends the function code OPEN FILE 25 with the file command object the file name string in File command object must be in this directory and file name format EXE processorName IMG The directory and file name extension string must all be in capital letters and the string size cannot be exceed 64 bytes The file name processorName is from the Processor Name in the Controller Properties dialog in RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro This ladder program processorName IMG is generated from RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro DNP3 Master should send the processorName IMG file without any modification When the MicroLogix 1400 Series controller receives a request with the function code WRITE 2 for User Program download the MicroLogix 1400 activates all configurations as well as channel configurations after the last application file segment is received For the MicroLogix 1400 Series B controller the function code Activate Configuration 0x1P is supported Unlike Series controller the MicroLogix 1400 Series B controller does not activate all configurations as well as channel configurations after the last application file segment is received To acti
411. x 1400 and PC Connections to the Ethernet Network 353 Ethernet Network Topology de eet tr n nca 353 Connecting an Ethernet switch on the Ethernet Network 353 AN LOSS ses PR CHEN DOCET RICE 354 BthetnetComnec ecu cs eee rut E tais ed 356 Duplicate address Detection 222569 357 Configuring the Ethernet Channel on the MicroLogix 1400 358 Configuration Using RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro Programming Software s iuc ode ee tob ena eri ae o e Barua vst ass 360 Configuration Via DOOT B 360 Using the Rockwell BOOTP DHCP Utility 361 Using a DHCP Server To Configure Your 363 Using Subnet Masks and Gateways 00 cece cence ee eee ees 364 Manually Configuring Channel 1 for Controllers on Subnets 365 MicroLogix 1400 Embedded Web Server Capability 366 Appendix H System Loading Calculations 367 System Loading Example Calculations 368 System Loading Worksheet as ies etes ern tese due esa dies 369 Current Loading tace eU S S eas 370 Calculating Heat Dissipation 371 Glossary Index 15 Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 16 Table of Contents Notes Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Preface Who Should Use this Manual Purpose of this Manual Read this preface to familiarize yourself with the rest of the manual It provides informatio
412. x Programmable Controller or between two MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers via slave to slave communication on a larger multi drop link the devices depend on a DF1 Half Duplex Master to give each of them access in Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 212 Connecting to Networks via RS 232 RS 485 Interface Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 a timely manner As the number of slave devices increase the time between when slave devices are polled also increases This increase in time may also be large if you are using low baud rates As these time periods grow you may need to increase the poll timeout and reply timeout values for slave devices IMPORTANT If a program download is started when using DF1 Half Duplex but then is interrupted due to electromagnetic interference or other events discontinue communications to the controller for the ownership timeout period and then restart the program download The ownership timeout period is 60 seconds After the timeout you can re establish communications with the processor and try the program download again The only other way to remove program ownership is to cycle power on the processor Using Modems with MicroLogix Programmable Controllers The types of modems you can use with MicroLogix controllers include the following dial up phone modems A MicroLogix controller on the receiving end of the dial up connection can be configured for DF1 Full Duplex protocol with or withou
413. xes are 0 241 3520 d uU 0 U 0 0 HU O D Jg O U 35 1 0 UU 0 0 0 DO D D i B35 2 CoD 8 8 08 pb be oo 1 63523 oo 000 000 00 089 0 0 8 335 4 oo 000 000 00 0 0 0 335 5 D n n Do 0 BD D B35 6 00000002000020000 35 7 Do n g o0 007 o o 0 7 B35 8 D d 0 0H 0 DU eo 835 9 000000080000 00 Km EE Radic may x Syt o Laure 1S Dec p Properties Usage Help DNP3 Analog Input Object The supported object group and variations are listed in this section The MicroLogix 1400 responds with the default group and variation when the DNP3 Master requests to read the object with Any variation Analog Input Static Objects g30v0 Analog Input Any Variations g30v1 Analog Input 32 bit with flag g30v2 Analog Input 16 bit with flag g30v3 Analog Input 32 bit without flag default 930v4 Analog Input 16 bit without flag default g30v5 Analog Input Single prec flt pt with flag default Analog Input Event Objects e g32v0 Analog Input Event Any Variation g32v1 Analog Input Event 32 bit without time default g32v2 Analog Input Event 16 bit without time default g32v3 Analog Input Event 32 bit with time g32v4 Analog Input Event 16 bit with time g32v5 Analog Input Event Single prec flt pt without time default g32v7 Analog Input Event Single prec flt pt with ti
414. xpansion module cover on your controller 000000 Mode bootp nnn Ip 6 When an IP address is assigned to your controller both the MAC and IP addresses of your controller are displayed as shown below In this example the MAC address is represented as XXXXXXXXXXXX The IP address is represented as xxx xxx xxx xxx where each xxx is a decimal number between 0 255 000000 ENET Mode bootp H L KAA 7 Press the ESC key to return to the Advanced Set Menu screen as shown in step 2 Configuring the IP Address The IP Address screen of the LCD displays Ethernet network configuration assigned to the controller Follow these steps to edit the Ethernet network configuration for your controller 1 N Using the LCD 123 On the Main Menu screen select Advanced Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad as shown below If the menu items shown in the figure below are not displayed on the Main Menu screen you need to scroll down the screen by pressing the Down key 000000 User Display b dvanced Set Press the OK key on the LCD keypad The Advanced Settings Menu screen is displayed as shown below If ENET is selected press the OK key Otherwise select ENET Cfg using the Up and Down keys and then press the OK key 000006 REMOTE KeyIn Mode DCOHH Cfg EHET Cfg If IP A
415. y 2012 188 Troubleshooting Your System Analog Expansion 1 0 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Module Operation and Channel Operation The module performs operations at two levels module level channel level Module level operations include functions such as power up configuration and communication with the controller Internal diagnostics are performed at both levels of operation Both module hardware and channel configuration error conditions are reported to the controller Channel over range or under range conditions are reported in the module s input data table Module hardware errors are reported in the controller s I O status file Refer to the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 RM001 for more information When a fault condition is detected the analog outputs are reset to Power up Diagnostics At module powet up a series of internal diagnostic tests are performed Module Status LED State Table If module Indicated status LED is condition On Proper Operation No action required Off Module Fault Cycle power If condition persists replace the module Call your local distributor or Allen Bradley for assistance Module Error Table Don t Care Bits Troubleshooting Your System 189 Critical and Non Critical Errors Non critical module errors are recoverable C
416. y assigns IP addresses to client stations logging onto a TCP IP network DHCP is based on BOOTP and maintains some backward compatibility The main difference is that BOOTP was designed for manual configurations to newly attached devices ATTENTION The processor must be assigned a fixed network address The IP address of the processor must not be dynamically provided Failure to observe this precaution may result in unintended machine motion or loss of process control Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2 configuration while DHCP allows for dynamic allocation of network addresses and 012 364 Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface Using Subnet Masks and Gateways Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Configure subnet masks and gateways using the Ethernet channel 1 configuration screen IMPORTANT If BOOTP is enabled you can t change any of the advanced Ethernet communications characteristics If your network is divided into subnetworks that use gateways or routers you must indicate the following information when configuring channel 1 subnet mask gateway address A subnet mask is a filter that a node applies to IP addresses to determine if an address is on the local subnet or on another subnet If an address is located on another subnetwork messages are routed through a local gateway to be transferred to the destination subnetwork If your network is not divided into subnets then leave the subnet m
417. your application program The TMIN and TMAX elements can only be changed by a program download For more information on how to change Trim Pot configuration including TMIN and TMAX refer to the LCD Function File described in the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 01 IMPORTANT The same TMIN and TMAX values are used for both trim pots POTO and POT1 This behavior is intended by design for simplicity in Trim Pot configuration When you enter this screen the last digit of the POTO value is flashing It indicates the current digit Press the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad to change the value of the current digit Press the Left and Right keys to select a different digit as the current digit If the Key In mode is set to Continuous the changes ate applied immediately after you press the Up and Down keys While if it is set to Discrete you have to press the OK key to apply the changes after you change the data value For more information on how to set the Key In mode see Changing Key In Mode on page 118 TIP The Key In mode has an effect only when you change the data value of a trim pot on a Trim Pot screen either the Trim Pot 0 or Trim Pot 1 screen 5 If you have finished changing the data value of the selected trim pot POTO in this example press the ESC key to return to the Trim Pot Select screen as shown in step 2 Trim Pot Configuration in LCD Function File Th
418. ype of thermocouple you are using Follow thermocouple manufacturer s recommendations Agency certification C UL certified under CSA C22 2 No 142 UL 508 listed CE compliant for all applicable directives C Tick marked for all applicable acts 1762 IR4 and 1762 IT4 Hazardous environment class Class Division 2 Hazardous Location Groups A B C D UL 1604 C UL under CSA C22 2 No 213 Noise immunity NEMA standard ICS 2 230 Radiated and conducted emissions EN50081 2 Class A Electrical EMC The module has passed testing at the following levels ESD immunity 4 kV contact 8 kV air 4 kV indirect IEC1000 4 2 Radiated RF immunity 10 V m 80 1000 MHz 80 amplitude modulation 900 MHz keyed carrier IEC1000 4 3 EFT B immunity 2 kV 5 kHz IEC1000 4 4 Surge transient immunity 1 kV galvanic gun IEC1000 4 5 Conducted immunity 10V 0 15 80 9 IEC1000 4 6 1 Referto the module s Installation Instruction for exact operating temperature range 2 Conducted Immunity frequency range may be 150 kHz to 30 MHz if the Radiated Immunity frequency range is 30 1000 MHz 3 For grounded thermocouples the 10V level is reduced 3V Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 General Specifications Specifications 169 Specification 1762 IF20F2 1762 IF4 1762 0F4 1762 IR4 1762 IT4 Shipping weight 240 g 0 53 Ibs 235 g 0 517 Ibs 260 g 0 57 Ibs 220
419. ypes for grounding electrical equipment Allen Bradley Publication Index SD499 A complete listing of current documentation including ordering instructions Also indicates whether the documents are available on CD ROM or in multi languages Allen Bradley Industrial Automation Glossary AG 7 1 A glossary of industrial automation terms and abbreviations Common Techniques Used in this Manual The following conventions are used throughout this manual Bulleted lists such as this one provide information not procedural steps Numbered lists provide sequential steps or hierarchical information type is used for emphasis Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Chapter 1 Hardware Overview Hardware Fe atures The Bulletin 1766 MicroLogix 1400 programmable controller contains a power supply input and output circuits a processor an isolated combination RS 232 485 communication port an Ethernet port and a non isolated RS 232 communication port Each controller supports 32 discrete I O points 20 digital inputs 12 discrete outputs and 6 analog I O points 4 analog inputs and 2 analog outputs 1766 L32BWAA AWAA and BXBA only The hardware features of the controller are shown below A D M GSE CD

- NFI: Industrial Automation Training Academy

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents